BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191

[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014

𝓐– 𝟏 • 𝑷𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 (𝒐𝒖 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆): 𝑬𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 (𝒅𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒖𝒓𝒆)𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒓𝒏é

𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒆 é𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆. 𝑶𝒏 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒍𝒆 𝒂𝒖𝒔𝒔𝒊 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒎𝒑 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′é𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆.

𝑺𝒊 𝒍′ 𝒐𝒏 𝒔′ 𝒊𝒏𝒕é𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅′ 𝒖𝒏 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆 𝒅′ é𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔, 𝒄𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏.

𝓐– 𝟐 • 𝑰𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖 (𝒐𝒖 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒕é 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆): 𝑶𝒏 𝒅é𝒔𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒕 é𝒍é𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏

𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓é𝒆. 𝑫𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍’𝒆𝒙𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒒𝒖é 𝒄𝒊­𝒅𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒖𝒔, 𝒖𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒕 é𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒖 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆.

𝓐– 𝟑 • É𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝑫𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒆 é𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆, 𝒊𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒐𝒏 𝒏′ 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒔

𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒕 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊è𝒓𝒆, 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅’𝒖𝒏 𝒑𝒉é𝒏𝒐𝒎è𝒏𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓é 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒓é𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒔é𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒓

𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏, 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍é𝒆 é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏.

𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔­𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕

𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒓é𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒔é𝒆𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔.

𝓐– 𝟒 • 𝑻𝒂𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′ é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝑪’𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒅𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′ é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏, 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒕 𝒄′ 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆

𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅′ 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔 𝒒𝒖′ 𝒊𝒍 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 (é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝟖𝟎𝟎, 𝒅𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎. . . ).

𝑬𝒏 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍, 𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆 𝒏 𝒍𝒂 𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓é.

𝓐– 𝟓 • 𝑬𝒏𝒒𝒖ê𝒕𝒆 (𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆): 𝑪’𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍′ 𝒐𝒑é𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 à 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒆𝒓 (𝒐𝒖 𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒓, 𝒐𝒖

𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒓. . . )𝒍’𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔 𝒅′ 𝒖𝒏 é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏 (𝒐𝒖, é𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕, 𝒅𝒆

𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒍è𝒕𝒆. )

𝓐– 𝟔 • 𝑹𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 ∶ 𝑬𝒏𝒒𝒖ê𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒍′ é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗é 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒕 𝒍𝒂

𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒕 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊è𝒓𝒆 (𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒍𝒆 𝒂𝒖𝒔𝒔𝒊 𝒅′𝒆𝒏𝒒𝒖ê𝒕𝒆 𝒆𝒙𝒉𝒂𝒖𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆).

𝓐– 𝟕 • 𝑺𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒈𝒆 ∶ 𝑪’𝒆𝒔𝒕, 𝒂𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆, 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒒𝒖ê𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒍′ é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗é

𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔­𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒄𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 (𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒍𝒆, 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔, 𝒅′𝒆𝒏𝒒𝒖ê𝒕𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒙𝒉𝒂𝒖𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆).

67 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝓐– 𝟖 • 𝑽𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 : 𝑪’𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕é𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 (â𝒈𝒆, 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆, 𝒔𝒆𝒙𝒆. . . ), 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒆
( )

𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒕 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗é𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒍′é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏.

𝑫′ 𝒖𝒏 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒖𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒉é𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆, 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒍′é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏.

𝑺𝒊 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 à 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 ℝ (𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒓é𝒆𝒍𝒔), 𝒐𝒖 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆

𝒅𝒆 ℝ , 𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 (â𝒈𝒆, 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆, 𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆. . . ); 𝒔𝒊𝒏𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆

(𝒔𝒆𝒙𝒆, 𝒄𝒂𝒕é𝒈𝒐𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒄𝒊𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒇𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆. . . ).

𝑶𝒏 𝒓𝒆𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒂 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒏𝒖𝒎é𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔

𝒆𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒏𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒖𝒎é𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔

(𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝒂𝒕𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒖 𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒕 𝒒𝒖′𝒖𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒏𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 ∶

𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒔𝒊 𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝟏 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒉𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝟐 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒆𝒎𝒎𝒆𝒔, 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 « 𝒔𝒆𝒙𝒆 » 𝒅𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆).

𝓐– 𝟗 • 𝑺é𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑬𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒐𝒖 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒓

𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒖 𝒖𝒏 é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏 𝒅’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔.

𝓐– 𝟏𝟎 • 𝑫𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 (𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔): 𝑳𝒆 𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒔 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔é 𝒆𝒏 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆.

𝑰𝒍 𝒅é𝒔𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗é𝒔 (𝒄𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′ é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏), 𝒍′ 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓é𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔.

𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒏 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍 𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕é𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖𝒙 (𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔) 𝒆𝒕 𝒔𝒕𝒐𝒄𝒌é𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒖𝒏 𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒉𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒊𝒏𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆.

𝓑– 𝟏 • 𝑽𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝑷𝒂𝒓 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏, 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅′ 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝒏𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒏𝒖𝒎é𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔,

𝒎𝒂𝒊𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕é𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔, 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔. 𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔

(𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒆𝒙𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆, 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒖 𝒃𝒂𝒄 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅′ é𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔), 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆, 𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆

𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒖𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆 𝒂𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒈𝒖𝒆 à 𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒄𝒓è𝒕𝒆.

𝑫𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 (𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒆𝒙𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆, 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒇𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔)𝒍𝒂

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆.

68 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝓑– 𝟐 • 𝑻𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 ∶
𝑰𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓 𝒒𝒖′ 𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒆𝒏𝒗𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒈𝒆𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕é𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒏𝒖𝒎é𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒖𝒏𝒆

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 (𝒒𝒖′ 𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒐𝒖 𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆). 𝑫𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍′ é𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅′ 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒕𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆, 𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒂 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒅𝒆 𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔

𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔. 𝑬𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝒇𝒂𝒖𝒕­𝒊𝒍 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅′ é𝒋𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒏′ 𝒐𝒏𝒕

𝒅𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 (𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒏𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔).

𝓪 • 𝑪𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒖𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝑳𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒄𝒊­𝒅𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒓é𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆

 𝑶𝒏 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒌 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝑴𝟏 , 𝑴𝟐 , . . . , 𝑴𝒌 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆.

 𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é, 𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒕𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆

𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒅 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é. 𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒆𝒕 𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆 𝒏𝒊 𝒍’𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇

𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒊­è𝒎𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝑴𝒊 .

 𝑶𝒏 𝒓𝒆𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒖𝒏 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔.

 𝑳𝒂 𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒊𝒕 ê𝒕𝒓𝒆 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝒍’𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍 ∶
𝒌
∑ 𝒏𝒊 = 𝒏𝟏 + 𝒏𝟐 + ⋯ + 𝒏𝒌 = 𝒏
𝒊=𝟏

 𝑶𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆 𝒇𝒊 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏( 𝒐𝒖 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆)𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒊­è𝒎𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é: 𝒇𝒊 = 𝒏𝒊 ⁄𝒏

𝑶𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆 𝒂𝒖𝒔𝒔𝒊 ∶ 𝑷(𝑿 = 𝑴𝒊 ) = 𝒇𝒊 = 𝒏𝒊 ⁄𝒏

𝒌
 𝑳𝒂 𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝟏 𝒐𝒖 𝟏𝟎𝟎% ∶ ∑ 𝒇𝒊 = 𝒇𝟏 + 𝒇𝟐 + ⋯ + 𝒇𝒌 = 𝟏
𝒊=𝟏

𝑴𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔: 𝑴𝒊 𝑬𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔: 𝒏𝒊 𝑭𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔: 𝒇𝒊

𝑴𝟏 𝒏𝟏 𝒇𝟏
𝑴𝟐 𝒏𝟐 𝒇𝟐
⋮ ⋮ ⋮
𝑴𝒌 𝒏𝒌 𝒇𝒌
∑ 𝒏 𝟏
𝓫 • 𝑬𝒙𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆 ∶ 𝑳𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒄𝒊­𝒅𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒓é𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆

𝒐𝒄𝒄𝒖𝒑é𝒆 (𝒂𝒚𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒖𝒏 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒐𝒊) 𝒔𝒆𝒍𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒂 𝑪𝑺𝑷 (𝒄𝒂𝒕é𝒈𝒐𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒄𝒊𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒇𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆)

𝑪𝑺𝑷 (𝑴𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔): 𝑴𝒊 𝑬𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝒎𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒓𝒔 ∶ 𝒏𝒊 𝑭𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 (%) : 𝒇𝒊
𝑴𝟏 : 𝑨𝒈𝒓𝒊𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝟏𝟑𝟏𝟐 𝟔, 𝟏%
𝑴𝟐 : 𝑨𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒔, 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆𝒓ç𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔, 𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒇𝒔 𝒅′𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝟏𝟕𝟑𝟗 𝟖, 𝟏%
𝑴𝟑 : 𝑪𝒂𝒅𝒓𝒆𝒔, 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒇𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒑é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝟐𝟐𝟔𝟕 𝟏𝟎, 𝟔%
𝑴𝟒 : 𝑷𝒓𝒐𝒇𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝟒𝟑𝟐𝟕 𝟐𝟎, 𝟏%
𝑴𝟓 : 𝑬𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒐𝒚é𝒔 𝟓𝟖𝟏𝟓 𝟐𝟕%
𝑴𝟔 : 𝑶𝒖𝒗𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒓𝒔 𝟔𝟎𝟒𝟗 𝟐𝟖, 𝟏%
∑ 𝟐𝟏𝟓𝟎𝟗 𝟏𝟎𝟎%
𝓑– 𝟑 • 𝑹𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 ∶

69 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒐𝒏 𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕
𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒛 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆𝒖𝒔𝒆𝒔. 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔, 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒖𝒔𝒔𝒊 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒆𝒔, 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 ∶
 𝑳𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒆𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔  𝑳𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒆𝒏 𝒃𝒂𝒓𝒓𝒆  𝑳𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒆𝒏 𝒔𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔

Répartition de la population active occupée selon la CSP Répartition de la population active occupée selon la CSP

7000 6,1%
6000 Agriculteurs exploitants 8,1%
5000
4000 Artisans, commerçants, chefs d'entreprises
3000 10,6%
2000 28,1%
1000 Cadres, professions intellectuelles
0 20,1%
supérieures 27,0%
Professions intermédiaires

Employés
Diagrammeen colonnes Diagramme en secteurs

Répartition de la population active occupée selon la CSP

Ouvriers
Employés
28,10%
Professions intermédiaires 27%
Cadres, professions intellectuelles supérieures 20,10%
10,60%
Artisans, commerçants, chefs d'entreprises
8,10%
Agriculteurs exploitants 6,10%

𝓑– 𝟒 • 𝑴𝒐𝒅𝒆 ∶ 𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒐𝒖 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔

𝒂𝒚𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒐𝒖 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏.

𝓒– 𝟏 • 𝑰𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒅𝒖𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒄𝒓è𝒕𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆

𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒍é𝒆𝒔(𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊è𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒓𝒂𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅é𝒄𝒊𝒎𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔).

𝑳𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅′ 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒕𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒉𝒂𝒃𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒛 𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆 .

𝑪𝒊𝒕𝒐𝒏𝒔, 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒆𝒙𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆, 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅′ 𝒆𝒏𝒇𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒇𝒂𝒎𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔, 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆

𝒅′𝒂𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒅′é𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒑𝒓è𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒃𝒂𝒄 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅′é𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔. . .

𝓒– 𝟐 • 𝑶𝒓𝒈𝒂𝒏𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝑶𝒏 é𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒊𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒄𝒓è𝒕𝒆 𝑿 à 𝒓 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒏.

𝑴𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝑬𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝑬𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒔 𝑬𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒔 𝑭𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝑭𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝑭𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔
𝒙𝒊 𝒏𝒊 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔: 𝑵↗𝒊 = 𝑵𝒊 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔: 𝑵↘𝒊 𝒇𝒊 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔: 𝑭↗𝒊 = 𝑭𝒊 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔: 𝑭↘𝒊
𝒙𝟏 𝒏𝟏 𝑵𝟏 = 𝒏 𝟏 𝒓 𝒏𝟏 𝑭𝟏 = 𝒇𝟏 𝒓
𝒇𝟏 =
𝑵↘𝟏 = 𝒏 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊 𝒏 𝑭↘𝟏 = 𝟏 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏
𝒙𝟐 𝒏𝟐 𝑵𝟐 = 𝒏 𝟏 + 𝒏 𝟐 𝑵↘𝟐 = 𝒏 − 𝑵𝟏 = 𝑵↘𝟏 − 𝒏𝟏 𝒏𝟐 𝑭𝟐 = 𝒇𝟏 + 𝒇𝟐 𝑭↘𝟐 = 𝟏 − 𝑭𝟏 = 𝑭↘𝟏 − 𝒇𝟏
𝒇𝟐 =
𝒏
𝒙𝟑 𝒏𝟑 𝑵𝟑 = 𝒏 𝟏 + 𝒏 𝟐 + 𝒏 𝟑 𝑵↘𝟑 = 𝒏 − 𝑵𝟐 = 𝑵↘𝟐 − 𝒏𝟐 𝒏𝟑 𝑭𝟑 = 𝒇𝟏 + 𝒇𝟐 + 𝒇𝟑 𝑵↘𝟑 = 𝟏 − 𝑭𝟐 = 𝑭↘𝟐 − 𝒇𝟐
𝒇𝟑 =
𝒏
⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮
𝒙𝒓 𝒏𝒓 𝒓
𝑵↘𝒓 = 𝒏 − 𝑵𝒓−𝟏 𝒏𝒓 𝒓
𝑭↘𝒓 = 𝟏 − 𝑭𝒓−𝟏
𝒇𝒓 =
𝑵𝒓 = 𝒏 = ∑ 𝒏 𝒊 = 𝑵↘𝒓−𝟏 − 𝒏𝒓−𝟏 𝒏 𝑭𝒓 = 𝟏 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊 = 𝑭↘𝒓−𝟏 − 𝒇𝒓−𝟏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏
∑ 𝒏 𝟏

70 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒊

 𝒏𝒊 = 𝑪𝒂𝒓𝒅(𝑿 = 𝒙𝒊 )  𝑵↗𝒊 = 𝑵𝒊 = ∑ 𝒏𝒌 = 𝑪𝒂𝒓𝒅(𝑿 ≤ 𝒙𝒊 )

𝒌=𝟏

 𝑵↘𝒊 = 𝑪𝒂𝒓𝒅(𝑿 ≥ 𝒙𝒊 ) = 𝒏 − 𝑪𝒂𝒓𝒅(𝑿 ≤ 𝒙𝒊−𝟏 ) = 𝒏 − 𝑵𝒊−𝟏 = 𝑵↘𝒊−𝟏 − 𝒏𝒊−𝟏

𝒊
𝒏𝒊 𝑵𝒊
 𝒇𝒊 = 𝑷(𝑿 = 𝒙𝒊 ) =  𝑭↗𝒊 = 𝑭𝒊 = ∑ 𝒇𝒌 = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝒙𝒊 ) =
𝒏 𝒏
𝒌=𝟏

 𝑷(𝒂 < 𝑋 ≤ 𝑏) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝒃) − 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝒂) = 𝑭(𝒃) − 𝑭(𝒂)

𝑵↘𝒊
 𝑭↘𝒊 = 𝑷(𝑿 ≥ 𝒙𝒊 ) = 𝟏 − 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝒙𝒊−𝟏 ) = 𝟏 − 𝑭𝒊−𝟏 = 𝑭↘𝒊−𝟏 − 𝒇𝒊−𝟏 =
𝒏

𝓒– 𝟑 • 𝑹𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒖𝒔𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒄𝒓è𝒕𝒆, 𝒐𝒏 𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒔𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔

𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕, 𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒕, 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒍é𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒆𝒏 𝒃â𝒕𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆

𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒇 (𝒆𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒓𝒔).

𝓪 • 𝑬𝒙𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆 ∶ 𝑶𝒏 𝒂 𝒏𝒐𝒕é 𝒍′ â𝒈𝒆 (𝒂𝒓𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊 à 𝒍′ 𝒂𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒑𝒓è𝒔)𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝟒𝟖 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊é𝒔 𝒅′ 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆.

𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒕é𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝟒𝟑 𝟐𝟗 𝟓𝟕 𝟒𝟓 𝟓𝟎 𝟐𝟗 𝟑𝟕 𝟓𝟗 𝟒𝟔 𝟑𝟏 𝟒𝟔 𝟐𝟒 𝟑𝟑 𝟑𝟖 𝟒𝟗 𝟑𝟏 𝟔𝟐 𝟔𝟎 𝟓𝟐 𝟑𝟖 𝟑𝟖 𝟐𝟔 𝟒𝟏 𝟓𝟐

𝟔𝟎 𝟒𝟗 𝟓𝟐 𝟒𝟏 𝟑𝟖 𝟐𝟔 𝟑𝟕 𝟓𝟗 𝟓𝟕 𝟒𝟏 𝟐𝟗 𝟑𝟑 𝟑𝟑 𝟒𝟑 𝟒𝟔 𝟓𝟕 𝟒𝟔 𝟑𝟑 𝟒𝟔 𝟒𝟗 𝟓𝟕 𝟓𝟕 𝟒𝟔 𝟒𝟑
𝑺𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗é𝒆𝒔, 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔,

𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒔, 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔.

𝒙𝒊 𝒏𝒊 𝑵𝒊 𝒇𝒊 (%) 𝑭𝒊 (%) 105%
Diagramme en bâtons 100% Diagramme cumulatif
𝟐𝟒 𝟏 𝟏 𝟐, 𝟎𝟖 𝟐, 𝟎𝟖 95%
90%
𝟐𝟔 𝟐 𝟑 𝟒, 𝟏𝟕 𝟔, 𝟐𝟓 85%
7 80%
𝟐𝟗 𝟑 𝟔 𝟔, 𝟐𝟓 𝟏𝟐, 𝟓𝟎 75%
6 70%
𝟑𝟏 𝟐 𝟖 𝟒, 𝟏𝟕 𝟏𝟔, 𝟔𝟕 65%
5 60%
55%
𝟑𝟑 𝟒 𝟏𝟐 𝟖, 𝟑𝟑 𝟐𝟓, 𝟎𝟎 50%
4 45%
𝟑𝟕 𝟐 𝟏𝟒 𝟒, 𝟏𝟕 𝟐𝟗, 𝟏𝟕 40%
3 35%
𝟑𝟖 𝟒 𝟏𝟖 𝟖, 𝟑𝟑 𝟑𝟕, 𝟓𝟎 30%
2 25%
𝟒𝟏 𝟑 𝟐𝟏 𝟔, 𝟐𝟓 𝟒𝟑, 𝟕𝟓 20%
1 15%
𝟒𝟑 𝟑 𝟐𝟒 𝟔, 𝟐𝟓 𝟓𝟎, 𝟎𝟎 10%
0 5%
𝟒𝟓 𝟏 𝟐𝟓 𝟐, 𝟎𝟖 𝟓𝟐, 𝟎𝟖 24 26 29 31 33 37 38 41 43 45 46 49 50 52 57 59 60 62 0%
𝟒𝟔 𝟔 𝟑𝟏 𝟏𝟐, 𝟓𝟎 𝟔𝟒, 𝟓𝟖 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64
𝟒𝟗 𝟑 𝟑𝟒 𝟔, 𝟐𝟓 𝟕𝟎, 𝟖𝟑
𝟓𝟎 𝟏 𝟑𝟓 𝟐, 𝟎𝟖 𝟕𝟐, 𝟗𝟏
𝟓𝟐 𝟑 𝟑𝟖 𝟔, 𝟐𝟓 𝟕𝟗, 𝟏𝟔
𝟓𝟕 𝟓 𝟒𝟑 𝟏𝟎, 𝟒𝟐 𝟖𝟗, 𝟓𝟖
𝟓𝟗 𝟐 𝟒𝟓 𝟒, 𝟏𝟕 𝟗𝟑, 𝟕𝟓
𝟔𝟎 𝟐 𝟒𝟕 𝟒, 𝟏𝟕 𝟗𝟕, 𝟗𝟐
𝟔𝟐 𝟏 𝟒𝟖 𝟐, 𝟎𝟖 𝟏𝟎𝟎
∑ 𝟒𝟖 𝟏𝟎𝟎

𝓒– 𝟒 • 𝑵𝒐𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 ∶

𝓪 • 𝑫é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝑶𝒏 𝒂 𝒗𝒖 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆 𝑭𝒊 (𝟎 ≤ 𝑭𝒊 ≤ 𝟏) 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏

𝒅′ 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒇é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒖 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 à 𝒙𝒊 .

𝑼𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒍é𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒆 à 𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒓, 𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒐𝒓𝒊, 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝜶𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆

71 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝟏, 𝒆𝒕 à 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓 𝒙𝜶 , 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒕𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖′ 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝜶 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒖𝒊 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕

𝒊𝒏𝒇é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒖 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 (𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒕, 𝒙𝜶 𝒗é𝒓𝒊𝒇𝒊𝒆 𝑭(𝒙𝜶 ) ≅ 𝜶).

𝑳𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒙𝜶 (𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒏′ 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒏é𝒄𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆)𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍é𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 (𝒐𝒖 𝒇𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆)

𝒅′ 𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝜶 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆. 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔é𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒐𝒄𝒊é𝒔 à 𝒄𝒆𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔

𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒊è𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝜶.

𝑨𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒕, 𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝒅′ 𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝜶, 𝒏𝒐𝒕é 𝒙𝜶 , 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒕𝒆𝒍 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔

𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒍𝒖𝒊 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒇é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒖 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒖𝒕 𝜶 ∶ (𝑭(𝒙𝜶 ) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝒙𝜶 ) = 𝜶 ), 𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂

𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒍𝒖𝒊 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒔𝒖𝒑é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒖𝒕 𝟏 – 𝜶 ∶ (𝑷(𝑿 > 𝒙𝜶 ) = 𝟏 − 𝜶 )

𝓫 • 𝑳𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝒙𝟏 𝑸𝟏 𝑸𝟐 = 𝑴𝒆 𝑸𝟑 𝒙𝒏

𝟐𝟓% 𝟐𝟓% 𝟐𝟓% 𝟐𝟓%

 𝑳𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 (𝒐𝒖 𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆)𝑴𝒆 = 𝑸𝟐 ∶

𝟏
𝑳𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝒅′ 𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 . 𝑬𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒍𝒂 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙
𝟐
𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅′ 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 é𝒈𝒂𝒖𝒙: (𝑭(𝑴𝒆 ) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝑴𝒆 ) = 𝟓𝟎% )

• 𝑺𝒊 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅’𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒂𝒊𝒓, 𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆 𝒙⌊𝒏⌋+𝟏 , 𝒍’𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏

𝟐

𝒏
𝒏𝒖𝒎é𝒓𝒐 (⌊ ⌋ + 𝟏) . 𝑳𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒆𝒙𝒂𝒄𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒙⌊𝒏⌋+𝟏 ∶ (𝑴𝒆 = 𝒙⌊𝒏⌋+𝟏 ) .
𝟐 𝟐 𝟐

• 𝑺𝒊 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅’𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒊𝒓, 𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆 𝒙⌊𝒏⌋ , 𝒍’𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏

𝟐

𝒏 𝒏
𝒏𝒖𝒎é𝒓𝒐 𝒆𝒕 𝒙⌊𝒏⌋+𝟏 , 𝒍𝒂 (⌊ ⌋ + 𝟏) è𝒎𝒆 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 .
𝟐 𝟐 𝟐

𝑨𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒏’𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏: [𝒙⌊𝒏⌋ ; 𝒙⌊𝒏⌋+𝟏 ]
𝟐 𝟐

𝒏 𝒏
𝑶ù ⌊ ⌋ 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊è𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒓é𝒆𝒍
𝟐 𝟐
𝒙⌊𝒏⌋ + 𝒙⌊𝒏⌋+𝟏
𝟐 𝟐
𝑷𝒂𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏, 𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒅 𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒖 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒆 ∶ 𝑴𝒆 =
𝟐
 𝑳𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 (𝑸𝟏 )𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒊è𝒎𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 (𝑸𝟑 ):

𝟏 𝟑
𝑳𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝒅’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 , 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒊è𝒎𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒖𝒊 𝒅′𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆
𝟒 𝟒

72 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝑶𝒏 𝒗𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝟐𝟓 % 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒇é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒖 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒖 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆:

(𝑭(𝑸𝟏 ) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝑸𝟏 ) = 𝟐𝟓% ) , 𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝟕𝟓 % 𝒍𝒖𝒊 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒔𝒖𝒑é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒔 ∶ (𝑷(𝑿 > 𝑸𝟏 ) = 𝟕𝟓%)

𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒊è𝒎𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆, 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒔′ 𝒊𝒏𝒗𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕 ∶ 𝟕𝟓 % 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒍𝒖𝒊 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕

𝒊𝒏𝒇é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒖 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶ (𝑭(𝑸𝟑 ) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝑸𝟑 ) = 𝟕𝟓% ), 𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝟐𝟓 % 𝒍𝒖𝒊 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒔𝒖𝒑é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒔

: (𝑷(𝑿 > 𝑸𝟑 ) = 𝟐𝟓%)

• 𝑺𝒊 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅’𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝟒, 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 ∶ 𝑸𝟏 = 𝒙⌊𝒏⌋ 𝒆𝒕 𝑸𝟑 = 𝒙 𝟑𝒏

𝟒 ⌊ ⌋
𝟒

𝑸𝟏 = 𝒙⌊𝒏⌋+𝟏
𝟒
• 𝑺𝒊 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅’𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒏 𝒏′ 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝟒, 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 ∶ { 𝒆𝒕
𝑸𝟑 = 𝒙 𝟑𝒏
⌊ ⌋+𝟏
𝟒

𝒏 𝟑𝒏 𝒏 𝟑𝒏
𝑶ù ⌊ ⌋ 𝒆𝒕 ⌊ ⌋ 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊è𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒓é𝒆𝒍𝒔 𝒆𝒕
𝟒 𝟒 𝟒 𝟒

𝓬 • 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒅é𝒄𝒊𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅′ 𝒖𝒔𝒂𝒈𝒆

𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒕. 𝑰𝒍 𝒆𝒙𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒆 𝟗 𝒅é𝒄𝒊𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍′ 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝟏𝟎

𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒔 𝒅′ é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 (𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒄𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝟏𝟎 % 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔)

(𝑭(𝑫𝟏 ) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝑫𝟏 ) = 𝟏𝟎% 𝒆𝒕 𝑷(𝑿 > 𝑫𝟏 ) = 𝟗𝟎%), (𝑭(𝑫𝟐 ) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝑫𝟐 ) = 𝟐𝟎% 𝒆𝒕 𝑷(𝑿 > 𝑫𝟐 ) = 𝟖𝟎%), …

, (𝑭(𝑫𝟗 ) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝑫𝟗 ) = 𝟗𝟎% 𝒆𝒕 𝑷(𝑿 > 𝑫𝟗 ) = 𝟏𝟎%)𝒆𝒕 𝟗𝟗 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒆𝒏

𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒔 𝒅′ 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 é𝒈𝒂𝒖𝒙 ∶ (𝑭(𝜶𝟏 ) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝜶𝟏 ) = 𝟏% 𝒆𝒕 𝑷(𝑿 > 𝜶𝟏 ) = 𝟗𝟗%),

(𝑭(𝜶𝟐 ) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝜶𝟐 ) = 𝟐% 𝒆𝒕 𝑷(𝑿 > 𝜶𝟐 ) = 𝟗𝟖%) , … , (𝑭(𝜶𝟗𝟗 ) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝜶𝟗𝟗 ) = 𝟗𝟗% 𝒆𝒕 𝑷(𝑿 > 𝜶𝟗𝟗 ) = 𝟏%)

𝓒– 𝟓 • 𝑷𝒓𝒊𝒏𝒄𝒊𝒑𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒎è𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 (𝒐𝒖 𝒅𝒆 𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒆) ∶

𝑺𝒊 𝒍′ 𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒖𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕é𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆

𝒅′ 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒅′ 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔, 𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒄𝒉𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒊𝒓 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆. 𝑶𝒏 𝒓𝒆𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒂

𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍′ 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒍, 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒖, 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔é 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔

𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆.

𝑫𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔, 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒉é𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒖𝒏 𝒓é𝒔𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒕 𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒔

𝒂𝒎𝒃𝒊𝒈𝒖ï𝒕é, 𝒄𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒏′ 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆. 𝑷𝒂𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆, 𝒊𝒍 𝒇𝒂𝒖𝒕 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂

𝒔𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒊𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 ê𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒇𝒂𝒖𝒔𝒔é𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒕𝒓è𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒖 𝒕𝒓è𝒔

𝒑𝒆𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔, 𝒄𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒏′ 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆.

𝑶𝒏 𝒑𝒓é𝒇è𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒓𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔𝒒𝒖′ 𝒐𝒏 𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 é𝒗𝒐𝒒𝒖é𝒆 𝒄𝒊­𝒅𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒖𝒔, 𝒆𝒏

73 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒔 𝒕𝒓è𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒚𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔.

𝓪 • 𝑳𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒆 ∶ 𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒄𝒓è𝒕𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒐𝒖 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓(𝒔)

𝒂𝒚𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒐𝒖 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆.

𝑳𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅 𝒂𝒖𝒔𝒔𝒊 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒐𝒖 𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓(𝒔)𝒂𝒚𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆 𝒉𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂

𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆.

𝓫 • 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝑴𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆, 𝒈é𝒐𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆, 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒅𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒉𝒂𝒓𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 ∶

 𝑳𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑳𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏 𝒓é𝒔𝒖𝒎é

𝒏𝒖𝒎é𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅 𝒂𝒖 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒗𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏.

𝒓 𝒓
𝟏
̅ = ∑ 𝒏𝒊 𝒙𝒊 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊 𝒙𝒊
𝑬𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎é𝒆 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒕é 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 ∶ 𝑿
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

 𝑳𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒈é𝒐𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒓 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔 𝒙𝒊 ∶

𝟏
𝒓 𝒓 𝒏 𝒓 𝒓 𝒓
𝒏
̅ = √∏ 𝒙𝒊 𝒏𝒊 = [∏ 𝒙𝒊 ] = ∏ 𝒙𝒊
𝑮 𝒏𝒊 𝒇𝒊 ̅ ) = ∑ 𝒇𝒊 𝐥𝐧(𝒙𝒊 )
= 𝐞𝐱𝐩 [∑ 𝒇𝒊 𝐥𝐧(𝒙𝒊 )] , 𝒄𝒂𝒓 𝐥𝐧(𝑮
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝒓 𝒓
𝟐
̅=
 𝑳𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒅𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑸 √∑ 𝒇𝒊 𝒙𝟐𝒊 ̅ = ∑ 𝒇𝒊 𝒙𝟐𝒊
𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝑸
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

 𝑳𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒉𝒂𝒓𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒓 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒏𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒖𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒙𝒊 ∶

𝒓 −𝟏 𝒓
𝒇 𝟏 𝒇𝒊
̅ = [∑ 𝒊 ]
𝑯 𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 = ∑
𝒙𝒊 ̅
𝑯 𝒙𝒊
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

̅≤𝑿
̅ ≤𝑮
𝑳𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒂 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒋𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒗é𝒓𝒊𝒇𝒊é𝒆 ∶ 𝑯 ̅
̅≤𝑸

𝓒– 𝟔 • 𝑷𝒓𝒊𝒏𝒄𝒊𝒑𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒎è𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶

𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒎è𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕 à 𝒑𝒓é𝒄𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆, 𝒄′ 𝒆𝒔𝒕­à­𝒅𝒊𝒓𝒆 à

𝒓é𝒔𝒖𝒎𝒆𝒓 𝒍′ é𝒍𝒐𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 à 𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆

𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒆. 𝑶𝒏 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕é𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏, 𝒄𝒆𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒔 é𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔

𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅′𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔.

𝓪 • 𝑳′ é𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 é𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔

𝒑𝒆𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 ∶ 𝑬 = 𝒙𝒓 − 𝒙𝟏

74 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
′
𝓫 • 𝑳 é𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒖𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 ∶ É𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒊è𝒎𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆, 𝒊𝒍

𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒖 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒔 𝟓𝟎% 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏, 𝒊𝒍 𝒏’𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒇𝒍𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄é

𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒆𝒙𝒕𝒓ê𝒎𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑬𝑰𝑸 = 𝑸𝟑 − 𝑸𝟏

𝒓

𝓬 • É𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕 𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒐𝒍𝒖 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 ∶ 𝒆𝑴𝒆 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊 |𝒙𝒊 − 𝑴𝒆 |

𝒊=𝟏

𝒓
̅|
𝓭 • É𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕 𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒐𝒍𝒖 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 ∶ 𝒆𝑿̅ = ∑ 𝒇𝒊 |𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
𝒊=𝟏

𝓮 • É𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕­𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒆 𝒐𝒖 é𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒅𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏 ∶ 𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒐𝒖 𝒇𝒍𝒖𝒄𝒕𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏,

𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 é𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒓é𝒔𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗é𝒔 à 𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 ∶
𝒓 𝒓
𝟏
̅ )𝟐 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
𝑺𝟐𝒙 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ )𝟐
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

̅ )𝟐
𝑳’é𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕­𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒆 𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆: 𝑺𝒙 = √∑ 𝒇𝒊 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
𝒊=𝟏

 𝑷𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é𝒔 ∶

 𝑺𝟐𝒙 ≥ 𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝑺𝒙 ≥ 𝟎

 𝑳’é𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕­𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎é 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒕é 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆.

 𝑷𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒍’é𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕­𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒆𝒕𝒊𝒕, 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒓𝒆𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑é𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂

𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆. 𝑷𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒊𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅, 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒔é𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆

𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆.
𝒓

 𝑻𝒉é𝒐𝒓è𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑲ö𝒏𝒊𝒈­𝑯𝒖𝒚𝒈𝒆𝒏𝒔 ∶ 𝑺𝟐𝒙 = ̅̅̅̅ ̅𝟐 ̅𝟐 ̅𝟐 ̅𝟐

𝑿𝟐 − 𝑿 = 𝑸 − 𝑿 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊 𝒙𝟐𝒊 − 𝑿
𝒊=𝟏
 𝑺𝟐𝒂𝒙+𝒃 = 𝒂𝟐 𝑺𝟐𝒙
 𝑺𝒂𝒙+𝒃 = |𝒂|𝑺𝒙
𝒓
𝟏 𝒏
 𝑽𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅’é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒂𝒈𝒆 ∶ 𝑺𝟐 = ̅ )𝟐 =
∑ 𝒏𝒊 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 𝑺𝟐
𝒏−𝟏 𝒏−𝟏 𝒙
𝒊=𝟏
𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏 é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏 𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒖 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍’𝒐𝒏 𝒔’𝒊𝒏𝒕é𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒂𝒖𝒙

𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕é𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒗𝒊𝒂 𝒍’é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏 (𝒊𝒏𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆), 𝒐𝒏 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒕ô𝒕 𝑺𝟐 𝒒𝒖𝒊

𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏 𝒎𝒆𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒆𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒕𝒉é𝒐𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏(𝑽(𝑿) = 𝝈𝟐 ).

𝑫è𝒔 𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒛 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆, 𝑺𝟐 ≈ 𝑺𝟐𝒙

75 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
 𝑺𝒊 𝑺𝟐𝒙 = 𝑺𝒙 = 𝟎 , 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆: ∀𝒊, 𝒙𝒊 = 𝑿 ̅
𝒓 𝒓
𝟏 𝟏
 𝑰𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é ∶ ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ )𝟐 = ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒂)𝟐 − (𝑿̅ − 𝒂)𝟐
𝒏 𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏
𝓯 • 𝑽𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓é𝒆 𝒓é𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒕𝒆 ∶

𝑼𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓é𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒓é𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒏𝒖𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒍’é𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕­𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒆

𝒗𝒂𝒖𝒕 𝟏. 𝑼𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓é𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒓é𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒔′𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒋𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒕é.

̅
𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒓 𝒆𝒕 𝒓é𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝑿, 𝒐𝒏 𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒈𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 ∶ 𝒚𝒊 =
𝑺𝒙

̅ = 𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝑺𝒚 = 𝟏
𝑨𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔, 𝒐𝒏 𝒗é𝒓𝒊𝒇𝒊𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 : 𝒀

𝑺𝒙
𝓰 • 𝑳𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝑪𝑽 = × 𝟏𝟎𝟎
̅
𝑿
 𝑳𝒆 𝑪𝑽 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒆𝒕 𝒅′ 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒓é𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 à 𝒍′ 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆

𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔. 𝑰𝒍 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒃𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒊𝒅é𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒅𝒆𝒈𝒓é 𝒅′ 𝒉𝒐𝒎𝒐𝒈é𝒏é𝒊𝒕é 𝒅′ 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆. 𝑰𝒍 𝒇𝒂𝒖𝒕 𝒒𝒖′ 𝒊𝒍

𝒔𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆 (< 𝟏𝟓% 𝒆𝒏 𝒑𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆).

 𝑳𝒆 𝑪𝑽 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒎è𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏. 𝑶𝒏 𝒍’𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎𝒆 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒏 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆

 𝑳𝒆 𝑪𝑽 𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒕 à 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒆𝒓 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒏𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎é𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆

𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒕é, 𝒐𝒖 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒕𝒓è𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔.

 𝑼𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 é𝒍𝒆𝒗é 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅 à 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒔é𝒆

𝓱 • 𝑰𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝑺𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝜶 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆(𝟎 < 𝜶 < 𝟏).

𝑳’𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒖 𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝜶 𝒐𝒖 𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝟏– 𝜶 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝟏– 𝜶

𝒅’𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔; 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 à 𝒍’𝒆𝒙𝒕é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒆(𝒆𝒏 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝜶)
𝜶
𝒔𝒆 𝒓é𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕: 𝒊𝒍 𝒚 𝒆𝒏 𝒂 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 à “𝒈𝒂𝒖𝒄𝒉𝒆” 𝒒𝒖’à “𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆”, 𝒆𝒏 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 .
𝟐
𝑶𝒏 é𝒄𝒓𝒊𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏: 𝒐ù 𝒙𝜶 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝒐ù 𝒙𝜶⁄𝟐 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝒅′ 𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆
𝟐

𝜶⁄𝟐 ∶ (𝑭(𝒙𝜶⁄𝟐 ) = 𝜶⁄𝟐 ) 𝒆𝒕 𝒙𝟏−𝜶⁄𝟐 𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝒅′ 𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝟏 − 𝜶⁄𝟐 : (𝑭(𝒙𝟏−𝜶⁄𝟐 ) = 𝟏 − 𝜶⁄𝟐 )

𝓲 • 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 ∶

 𝑴𝒐𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 à 𝒂 𝒅’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒔 ∶

𝑺𝒐𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒙𝟏 , 𝒙𝟐 , … , 𝒙𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒂 ∈ ℝ, 𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕

76 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒓
𝟏
à 𝒂 𝒅’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒔 (𝒐ù 𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒔é 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒇)𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 ∶ ∑ 𝒏𝒊 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝒂)𝒔
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏

 𝑴𝒐𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 à 𝒍’𝒐𝒓𝒊𝒈𝒊𝒏𝒆 (𝒐𝒖 𝒏𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓é𝒔) 𝒅’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒌 ∶

𝒓
𝟏
̅ 𝒌 = ∑ 𝒙𝒌𝒊 , 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 ∶ 𝒎
𝒎 ̅
̅𝟏 = 𝑿
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏

 𝑴𝒐𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓é𝒔 𝒅’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒌 ∶

𝒓
𝟏
̅ )𝒌 , 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 ∶ 𝝁
̅ 𝒌 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
𝝁 ̅ 𝟐 = 𝑺𝟐𝒙
̅ 𝟏 = 𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝝁
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏

𝓳 • 𝑴𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝑺𝒖𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒓é𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔 𝑮𝑨 𝒆𝒕 𝑮𝑩 . 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒏𝑨

𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊è𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆 𝑮𝑨 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒏𝑩 𝒅𝒆𝒓𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔

𝒍𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆 𝑮𝑩 , 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝑨 + 𝒏𝑩 = 𝒏.

𝑶𝒏 𝒔𝒖𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒂 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅’𝒂𝒃𝒐𝒓𝒅 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝑮𝑨 𝒑𝒖𝒊𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝑮𝑩 :

𝒙 𝟏 , 𝒙 𝟐 , … , 𝒙 𝒏𝑨 , ⏟
⏟ 𝒙𝒏𝑨+𝟏 , 𝒙𝒏𝑨+𝟐 , … , 𝒙𝒏−𝟏 , 𝒙𝒏
𝑶𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝑮𝑨 𝑶𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝑮𝑩

𝒏𝑨
𝟏
̅𝑨 =
𝑶𝒏 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔: 𝑳𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆: 𝒙 ∑ 𝒙𝒊
𝒏𝑨
𝒊=𝟏

𝒏
𝟏
̅𝑩 =
𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒖 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙𝒊è𝒎𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆 ∶ 𝒙 ∑ 𝒙𝒊 . 𝑳𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆
𝒏𝑩
𝒊=𝒏𝑨 +𝟏

𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅é𝒓é𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔.
𝒏𝑨 𝒏
𝟏 𝟏
̅ = (∑ 𝒙𝒊 + ∑ 𝒙𝒊 ) = (𝒏𝑨 𝒙
𝑬𝒏 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒕: 𝒙 ̅𝑩 )
̅𝑨 + 𝒏𝑩 𝒙
𝒏 𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝒏𝑨 +𝟏

𝑶𝒏 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔: 𝑳𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒓
𝒏𝑨 𝒏
𝟏
𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆 ∶ 𝑺𝟐𝑨 = 𝟏⁄𝒏𝑨 ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒙
̅𝑨 )𝟐 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒖 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙𝒊è𝒎𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆 ∶ 𝑺𝟐𝑩 = ̅𝑩 ) 𝟐
∑ (𝒙𝒊 − 𝒙
𝒏𝑩
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝒏𝑨 +𝟏

𝒏
𝟏
 𝑻𝒉é𝒐𝒓è𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑯𝒖𝒚𝒈𝒆𝒏𝒔 ∶ 𝑳𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆, 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 ∶ 𝑺𝟐𝒙 = ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒙
̅) 𝟐
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏

77 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒔𝒆 𝒅é𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 ∶
𝒏
𝟏 𝒏𝑨 𝑺𝟐𝑨 + 𝒏𝑩 𝑺𝟐𝑩 𝒏𝑨 (𝒙 ̅)𝟐 + 𝒏𝑩 (𝒙
̅𝑨 − 𝒙 ̅) 𝟐
̅𝑩 − 𝒙
𝑺𝟐𝒙 ̅) 𝟐 =
= ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒙 +
𝒏 ⏟ 𝒏 ⏟ 𝒏
𝒊=𝟏
𝑽𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂­𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔 𝑽𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓­𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔

 𝑫é𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶
𝒏 𝒏𝑨 𝒏
𝟏 𝟏
𝑺𝟐𝒙 = ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒙
̅)𝟐 = (∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒙
̅)𝟐 + ∑ (𝒙𝒊 − 𝒙
̅)𝟐 )
𝒏 𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝒏𝑨 +𝟏

𝒏𝑨 𝒏𝑨 𝒏𝑨 𝒏𝑨 𝒏𝑨

𝑶𝒓 ∶ ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒙̅ )𝟐 = ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒙̅ 𝑨 + 𝒙̅ 𝑨 − 𝒙̅ )𝟐 = ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒙̅ 𝑨 )𝟐 + ∑(𝒙̅ 𝑨 − 𝒙̅ )𝟐 + 𝟐 ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒙̅ 𝑨 )(𝒙̅ 𝑨 − 𝒙̅ )

𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 ⏟
𝒊=𝟏
=𝟎

𝒏𝑨 𝒏𝑨 𝒏𝑨 𝒏𝑨 𝒏𝑨

̅)𝟐 = ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒙
∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒙 ̅𝑨 + 𝒙 ̅)𝟐 = ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒙
̅𝑨 − 𝒙 ̅𝑨 )𝟐 + ∑(𝒙 ̅)𝟐 + 𝟐 ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒙
̅𝑨 − 𝒙 ̅𝑨 )(𝒙 ̅)
̅𝑨 − 𝒙
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 ⏟
𝒊=𝟏
=𝟎

𝒏𝑨

̅)𝟐 = 𝒏𝑨 𝑺𝟐𝑨 + 𝒏𝑨 (𝒙
∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒙 ̅) 𝟐
̅𝑨 − 𝒙
𝒊=𝟏

𝑶𝒏 𝒂 é𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒆𝒎𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆 𝑮𝑩 : ∑ (𝒙𝒊 − 𝒙̅ )𝟐 = 𝒏𝑩 𝑺𝟐𝑩 + 𝒏𝑩 (𝒙̅ 𝑩 − 𝒙̅ )𝟐

𝒊=𝒏𝑨 +𝟏

𝒏 𝒏𝑨 𝒏
𝟏 𝟏
𝑬𝒏 𝒓𝒆𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕 à 𝒍’𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 (𝑺𝟐𝒙 = ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒙
̅)𝟐 = (∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒙
̅)𝟐 + ∑ (𝒙𝒊 − 𝒙
̅)𝟐 )),
𝒏 𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝒏𝑨 +𝟏

𝟏
𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 ∶ 𝑺𝟐𝒙 = (𝒏𝑨 𝑺𝟐𝑨 + 𝒏𝑨 (𝒙 ̅)𝟐 + 𝒏𝑩 𝑺𝟐𝑩 + 𝒏𝑩 (𝒙
̅𝑨 − 𝒙 ̅) 𝟐 )
̅𝑩 − 𝒙
𝒏
𝒏𝑨 𝑺𝟐𝑨 + 𝒏𝑩 𝑺𝟐𝑩 𝒏𝑨 (𝒙 ̅)𝟐 + 𝒏𝑩 (𝒙
̅𝑨 − 𝒙 ̅𝑩 − 𝒙̅) 𝟐
= +
𝒏 𝒏

78 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
Exercice 1 :
ÉNONCÉ
𝒏
𝟏
𝑴𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒕)𝟐 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒎𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒊 𝒕 = 𝒙
̅
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏

Corrigé
𝒏 𝒏 ′ 𝒏
𝟏 𝒅𝝋(𝒕) 𝟏 𝟏
𝝋(𝒕) = ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒕)𝟐 ⟹ = 𝝋′ (𝒕) = [∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒕)𝟐 ] = ∑[(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒕)𝟐 ]′
𝒏 𝒅𝒕 𝒏 𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝒏 𝒏 𝒏
𝒅𝝋(𝒕) 𝟏 𝟐 𝒅𝟐 𝝋(𝒕) 𝟐
= 𝝋′ (𝒕) = ∑ 𝟐(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒕)′ (𝒙𝒊 − 𝒕) = − ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒕) ⟹ = 𝝋 ′′ (𝒕)
= − ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒕)′
𝒅𝒕 𝒏 𝒏 𝒅𝒕𝟐 𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝒏
𝒅𝟐 𝝋(𝒕) 𝟐
𝟐
= 𝝋′′ (𝒕) = − ∑ −𝟏 = 𝟐
𝒅𝒕 𝒏
𝒊=𝟏

𝒏
𝒏 𝟐
′ (𝒕
𝟏 𝟐 𝝋 𝟎) = 𝟎 − ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒕) = 𝟎
𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒕𝒆, (𝒕𝟎 𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒎𝒊𝒔𝒆 ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝒕) ) ⟺ { ′′ ⟺{ 𝒏
𝒏 𝝋 (𝒕𝟎 ) ≥ 𝟎 𝒊=𝟏
𝒊=𝟏
𝟐 ≥ 𝟎 , é𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆
𝒏 𝒏

̅ − 𝒏𝒕𝟎 = 𝟎 ⟺ 𝒕𝟎 = 𝒙
⟺ ∑ 𝒙𝒊 − ∑ 𝒕𝟎 = 𝟎 ⟺ 𝒏𝒙 ̅
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

Exercice 2 :
ÉNONCÉ
𝒏

𝑴𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝑳𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒈(𝒕) = ∑|𝒙𝒊 − 𝒕| 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒎𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒊 𝒕 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒙𝟏 , 𝒙𝟐 , … , 𝒙𝒏 .

𝒊=𝟏

1)
a) 𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒏 𝒑𝒂𝒊𝒓 𝒔𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒍’𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝒙𝟏 = −𝟓, 𝒙𝟐 = −𝟐, 𝒙𝟑 = 𝟎, 𝒙𝟒 = 𝟏, 𝒙𝟓 = 𝟔, 𝒙𝟔 = 𝟗
𝑨𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒈(𝒕), 𝒗é𝒓𝒊𝒇𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒕𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆
𝒍′ 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒆[𝟎, 𝟏] 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒗𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆.
b) 𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒏 𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒂𝒊𝒓 𝒔𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒍’𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝒙𝟏 = −𝟓, 𝒙𝟐 = −𝟐, 𝒙𝟑 = 𝟎, 𝒙𝟒 = 𝟏, 𝒙𝟓 = 𝟔
𝑨𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒈(𝒕), 𝒗é𝒓𝒊𝒇𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆
𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝑴𝒆 = 𝟎
2) 𝑮é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒓 𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒓é𝒔𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒈𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒏 𝒅𝒆
𝒍’é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏.

79 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
Corrigé
1)
a) 𝒈(𝒕) = ∑𝟔𝒊=𝟏|𝒙𝒊 − 𝒕| = |−𝟓 − 𝒕| + |−𝟐 − 𝒕| + |𝟎 − 𝒕| + |𝟏 − 𝒕| + |𝟔 − 𝒕| + |𝟗 − 𝒕|

𝒈(𝒕) = |𝒕 + 𝟓| + |𝒕 + 𝟐| + |𝒕| + |𝒕 − 𝟏| + |𝒕 − 𝟔| + |𝒕 − 𝟗|

𝒕 −∞ −𝟓 −𝟐 𝟎 𝟏 𝟔 𝟗 +∞

|𝒕 + 𝟓| −𝒕 − 𝟓 𝒕+𝟓 𝒕+𝟓 𝒕+𝟓 𝒕+𝟓 𝒕+𝟓 𝒕+𝟓

|𝒕 + 𝟐| −𝒕 − 𝟐 −𝒕 − 𝟐 𝒕+𝟐 𝒕+𝟐 𝒕+𝟐 𝒕+𝟐 𝒕+𝟐

|𝒕| −𝒕 −𝒕 −𝒕 𝒕 𝒕 𝒕 𝒕

|𝒕 − 𝟏| 𝟏−𝒕 𝟏−𝒕 𝟏−𝒕 𝟏−𝒕 𝒕−𝟏 𝒕−𝟏 𝒕−𝟏

|𝒕 − 𝟔| 𝟔−𝒕 𝟔−𝒕 𝟔−𝒕 𝟔−𝒕 𝟔−𝒕 𝒕−𝟔 𝒕−𝟔

|𝒕 − 𝟗| 𝟗−𝒕 𝟗−𝒕 𝟗−𝒕 𝟗−𝒕 𝟗−𝒕 𝒕−𝒂 𝒕−𝟗

𝒈(𝒕) −𝟔𝒕 + 𝟗 −𝟒𝒕 + 𝟏𝟗 −𝟐𝒕 + 𝟐𝟑 𝟐𝟑 𝟐𝒕 + 𝟐𝟏 𝟒𝒕 + 𝟗 𝟔𝒕 − 𝟗

𝑺𝒆𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒈

𝑴𝒆 ∈ [𝟎, 𝟏]

𝑻𝒐𝒖𝒕𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒆[𝟎, 𝟏] 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒗𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆.

𝟔

𝒈(𝒕) = ∑|𝒙𝒊 − 𝒕| 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒎𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒕 ∈ [𝟎, 𝟏] 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆 {𝒙𝟏 , 𝒙𝟐 , 𝒙𝟑 , 𝒙𝟒 , 𝒙𝟓 , 𝒙𝟔 }

𝒊=𝟏

𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝑴𝒆 ∈ [𝒙⌊𝒏⌋ ; 𝒙⌊𝒏⌋+𝟏 ] , 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄, 𝒙⌊𝒏⌋ = 𝒙 𝟔 = 𝒙𝟑 = 𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝒙⌊𝒏⌋+𝟏 = 𝒙 𝟔 = 𝒙𝟒 = 𝟏

𝟐 𝟐 𝟐 ⌊ ⌋ 𝟐 ⌊ ⌋+𝟏
𝟐 𝟐

𝒙⌊𝒏⌋ + 𝒙⌊𝒏⌋+𝟏 𝒙𝟑 + 𝒙𝟒 𝟏
𝟐 𝟐
𝑷𝒂𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏, 𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒅 𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒖 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒆 ∶ 𝑴𝒆 = = =
𝟐 𝟐 𝟐

b) 𝒈(𝒕) = ∑𝟓𝒊=𝟏|𝒙𝒊 − 𝒕| = |−𝟓 − 𝒕| + |−𝟐 − 𝒕| + |𝟎 − 𝒕| + |𝟏 − 𝒕| + |𝟔 − 𝒕|

80 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒈(𝒕) = |𝒕 + 𝟓| + |𝒕 + 𝟐| + |𝒕| + |𝒕 − 𝟏| + |𝒕 − 𝟔|
−∞ −𝟓 −𝟐 𝟎 𝟏 𝟔 +∞
𝒕

|𝒕 + 𝟓| −𝒕 − 𝟓 𝒕+𝟓 𝒕+𝟓 𝒕+𝟓 𝒕+𝟓 𝒕+𝟓

|𝒕 + 𝟐| −𝒕 − 𝟐 −𝒕 − 𝟐 𝒕+𝟐 𝒕+𝟐 𝒕+𝟐 𝒕+𝟐

|𝒕| −𝒕 −𝒕 −𝒕 𝒕 𝒕 𝒕

|𝒕 − 𝟏| 𝟏−𝒕 𝟏−𝒕 𝟏−𝒕 𝟏−𝒕 𝒕−𝟏 𝒕−𝟏

|𝒕 − 𝟔| 𝟔−𝒕 𝟔−𝒕 𝟔−𝒕 𝟔−𝒕 𝟔−𝒕 𝒕−𝟔

𝒈(𝒕) −𝟓𝒕 −𝟑𝒕 + 𝟏𝟎 −𝒕 + 𝟏𝟒 𝒕 + 𝟏𝟒 𝟑𝒕 + 𝟏𝟐 𝟓𝒕

𝑺𝒆𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒈

𝑴𝒆 = 𝟎

𝑳𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒓é𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒖𝒏 𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒎𝒖𝒎 𝒅𝒆 𝒈(𝒕) = ∑|𝒙𝒊 − 𝒕| 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒗𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆

𝒊=𝟏

𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 ∶ 𝑴𝒆 = 𝟎 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆 {𝒙𝟏 , 𝒙𝟐 , 𝒙𝟑 , 𝒙𝟒 , 𝒙𝟓 }

2) 𝑴𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕, 𝒐𝒏 𝒗𝒂 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒓é𝒔𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒖𝒔 à 𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒓𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒆𝒙𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝒓 𝒏

∀𝒕 ∈ [𝒙𝒓 , 𝒙𝒓+𝟏 [ , 𝒈(𝒕) = ∑|𝒙𝒊 − 𝒕| + ∑ |𝒙𝒊 − 𝒕| , 𝒄𝒆𝒄𝒊 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 , 𝒓 ∈ {𝟏, 𝟐, … , 𝒏 − 𝟏}

𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝒓+𝟏

|𝒙𝒊 − 𝒕| = 𝒕 − 𝒙𝒊 , ∀𝟏 ≤ 𝒊 ≤ 𝒓
𝒐𝒓, 𝒙𝒓 ≤ 𝒕 < 𝒙𝒓+𝟏 ⇒ {
|𝒙𝒊 − 𝒕| = 𝒙𝒊 − 𝒕 , ∀𝒓 + 𝟏 ≤ 𝒊 ≤ 𝒏
𝒓 𝒏 𝒓 𝒓 𝒏 𝒏

𝑨𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊, 𝒈(𝒕) = ∑(𝒕 − 𝒙𝒊 ) + ∑ (𝒙𝒊 − 𝒕) = ∑ 𝒕 − ∑ 𝒙𝒊 + ∑ 𝒙𝒊 − ∑ 𝒕

𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝒓+𝟏 ⏟ 𝒊=𝟏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝒓+𝟏 ⏟
𝒊=𝒓+𝟏
𝒓𝒕 (𝒏−𝒓)𝒕

81 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒏 𝒓

∀𝒕 ∈ [𝒙𝒓 , 𝒙𝒓+𝟏 [ ∶ 𝒈(𝒕) = (𝟐𝒓 − 𝒏)𝒕 + [ ∑ 𝒙𝒊 − ∑ 𝒙𝒊 ] = (𝟐𝒓 − 𝒏)𝒕 + 𝒔

⏟𝒊=𝒓+𝟏 𝒊=𝟏
𝒔

𝒈 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒎𝒐𝒓𝒄𝒆𝒂𝒖𝒙, 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆 , 𝟐𝒓 − 𝒏 < 𝟎 ,
𝒏 𝒏
𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒕 , 𝒓 < 𝒆𝒕 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒅 𝟐𝒓 − 𝒏 > 𝟎 𝒄. ­à­ 𝒅. 𝒓 > .
𝟐 𝟐
𝑷𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒑𝒓é𝒄𝒊𝒔é𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕, 𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒈𝒖𝒆 𝟐 𝒄𝒂𝒔 :
𝒏 𝒑
𝒏
 𝒔𝒊 𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒊𝒓 ∶ 𝒏 = 𝟐𝒑 (𝒐𝒖 𝒑 = ) ⇒ ∀𝒕 ∈ [𝒙𝒑 , 𝒙𝒑+𝟏 [ , 𝒈(𝒕) = (𝟐𝒑
⏟ − 𝒏) 𝒕 + [ ∑ 𝒙𝒊 − ∑ 𝒙𝒊 ] = 𝒔
𝟐
𝟎 ⏟𝒊=𝒑+𝟏 𝒊=𝟏
𝒔

𝒈(𝒕)𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒓 [𝒙𝒑 , 𝒙𝒑+𝟏 [ 𝒆𝒕 𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒎𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒆𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒆. 𝑶𝒏 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒂î𝒕 𝒍à,

𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 , 𝑴𝒆 ∈ [𝒙𝒑 , 𝒙𝒑+𝟏 [ 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 ∶ 𝒙𝒑 = 𝒙⌊𝒏⌋ 𝒆𝒕 𝒙𝒑+𝟏 = 𝒙⌊𝒏⌋+𝟏

𝟐 𝟐

𝒙⌊𝒏⌋ + 𝒙⌊𝒏⌋+𝟏
𝟐 𝟐
𝑷𝒂𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏, 𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒅 𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒖 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒆 ∶ 𝑴𝒆 =
𝟐
 𝒔𝒊 𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒂𝒊𝒓 ∶ 𝒏 = 𝟐𝒑 + 𝟏 ⇒ 𝟐𝒓 − 𝒏 ≠ 𝟎

𝑶𝒓 ∀𝒕 ∈ [𝒙𝒓 , 𝒙𝒓+𝟏 [ ∶ 𝒈(𝒕) = (𝟐𝒓 − 𝒏)𝒕 + 𝒔

𝒈 é𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒎𝒐𝒓𝒄𝒆𝒂𝒖𝒙, 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄, 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆 , 𝟐𝒓 − 𝒏 < 𝟎 ,

𝒏 𝟏 𝒏
𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒕 , 𝒓 < (𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝒓 < 𝒑 + ) 𝒆𝒕 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒅 𝟐𝒓 − 𝒏 > 𝟎 𝒄. ­à­ 𝒅. 𝒓 >
𝟐 𝟐 𝟐
𝟏
(𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝒓 > 𝒑 + )
𝟐

𝑨𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊, 𝒈 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒑𝒖𝒊𝒔 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒖𝒏 𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒎𝒖𝒎 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓

𝒕 = 𝒙⌊𝒏⌋+𝟏 = 𝒙 𝟐𝒑+𝟏 = 𝒙𝒑+𝟏 ,

𝟐 ⌊ ⌋+𝟏
𝟐

𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑴𝒆 = 𝒙⌊𝒏⌋+𝟏 = 𝒙 𝟐𝒑+𝟏 = 𝒙𝒑+𝟏

𝟐 ⌊ ⌋+𝟏
𝟐

82 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014

Exercice 3 : (8 points :1+1+1+1+1+1+1+1)

ÉNONCÉ
𝑶𝒏 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒆 𝒅’𝒖𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝑬 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒖é 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔­𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝑨 𝒆𝒕 𝑩 𝒅𝒆 𝒏 𝒆𝒕 𝒎 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒔
𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕 à 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒔𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅’𝒂𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒔. 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒄𝒉𝒊𝒇𝒇𝒓𝒆𝒔

𝒅’𝒂𝒇𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒏𝒐𝒕é𝒆𝒔 𝑿𝟏 , 𝑿𝟐 , … , 𝑿𝒏 𝒆𝒕 𝑿𝒏+𝟏 , 𝑿𝒏+𝟐 , … , 𝑿𝒏+𝒎

1)
a) 𝑹𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍’𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝑴𝑨 , 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒄𝒉𝒊𝒇𝒇𝒓𝒆 𝒅’𝒂𝒇𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒔
𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔­𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝑨, 𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝑿𝟏 , 𝑿𝟐 , … , 𝑿𝒏 .
b) 𝑴ê𝒎𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝑴𝑩 , 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒄𝒉𝒊𝒇𝒇𝒓𝒆 𝒅’𝒂𝒇𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆
𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔­𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝑩 𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝑿𝒏+𝟏 , 𝑿𝒏+𝟐 , … , 𝑿𝒏+𝒎
c) 𝑬𝒏 𝒅é𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒍’𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝑴 𝒅𝒆 𝒍’𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔
𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝑴𝑨 𝒆𝒕 𝑴𝑩 . 𝑰𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓é𝒕𝒆𝒓 𝒄𝒆 𝒓é𝒔𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒕.
d) 𝑬𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝑴 − 𝑴𝑨 𝒆𝒕 𝑴 − 𝑴𝑩 𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍’𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏
𝑴𝑨 − 𝑴𝑩
e) 𝑪𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒆𝒓 𝑴 à 𝑴𝑨 𝒆𝒕 à 𝑴𝑩 𝒔𝒊 𝒍’𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒖𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝑴𝑨 = 𝑴𝑩
2) 𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒅𝒎𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝑴𝑨 = 𝑴𝑩 . 𝑬𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝑽 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆
𝑿 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒕𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔
𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔­𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝑨 𝒆𝒕 𝑩, 𝒏𝒐𝒕é𝒆𝒔 𝑽𝑨 𝒆𝒕 𝑽𝑩
3) 𝑹𝒆𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒓é𝒄é𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒔𝒊 𝒍’𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒃𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒍’𝒉𝒚𝒑𝒐𝒕𝒉è𝒔𝒆 𝒅’é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝑴𝑨
𝒆𝒕 𝑴𝑩
4) 𝑨𝒑𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒖𝒎é𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 : 𝑹𝒆𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒓é𝒔𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝟑) 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒐ù
𝒏 = 𝒎 = 𝟓 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝑿 :
𝑺𝒐𝒖𝒔­𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝑨 𝑿𝟏 = 𝟐 𝑿𝟐 = 𝟔 𝑿𝟑 = 𝟒 𝑿𝟒 = 𝟓 𝑿𝟓 = 𝟑
𝑺𝒐𝒖𝒔­𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝑩 𝑿𝟔 = 𝟏𝟏 𝑿𝟕 = 𝟏𝟗 𝑿𝟖 = 𝟐𝟎 𝑿𝟗 = 𝟏𝟓 𝑿𝟏𝟎 = 𝟐𝟓
Corrigé
1)
𝟏 𝟏
a) 𝑴𝑨 = 𝒏 ∑𝒏𝒊=𝟏 𝑿𝒊 = 𝒏 (𝑿𝟏 + 𝑿𝟐 + ⋯ + 𝑿𝒏 )
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
b) 𝑴𝑩 = (𝒏+𝒎)−(𝒏+𝟏)+𝟏 ∑𝒏+𝒎 𝒏+𝒎
𝒊=𝒏+𝟏 𝑿𝒊 = 𝒎 ∑𝒊=𝒏+𝟏 𝑿𝒊 = 𝒎 (𝑿𝒏+𝟏 + 𝑿𝒏+𝟐 + ⋯ + 𝑿𝒏+𝒎 )

𝟏 𝟏 𝒏 𝑴𝑨 +𝒎𝑴𝑩
c) 𝑴 = 𝒏+𝒎 ∑𝒏+𝒎 𝒏
⏟𝒊=𝟏 𝑿𝒊 + ∑
𝒊=𝟏 𝑿𝒊 = 𝒏+𝒎 [∑
𝒏+𝒎
⏟𝒊=𝒏+𝟏 𝑿𝒊 ] ⇒ 𝑴 = 𝒏+𝒎
𝒏 𝑴𝑨 𝒎𝑴𝑩

83 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝑴 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅é𝒓é𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔

𝒔𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆𝒔𝑴𝑨 𝒆𝒕 𝑴𝑩 𝒂𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕é𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒅𝒔 𝒏 𝒆𝒕 𝒎

d)

𝒏 𝑴𝑨 + 𝒎𝑴𝑩 𝒏 𝑴𝑨 + 𝒎𝑴𝑩 − (𝒏 + 𝒎) 𝑴𝑨 𝒎𝑴𝑩 − 𝒎 𝑴𝑨

∙ 𝑴 − 𝑴𝑨 = − 𝑴𝑨 = =
𝒏+𝒎 𝒏+𝒎 𝒏+𝒎
𝒎
𝑴 − 𝑴𝑨 = − ( ) ( 𝑴𝑨 − 𝑴𝑩 )
𝒏+𝒎

𝒏 𝑴𝑨 + 𝒎𝑴𝑩 𝒏 𝑴𝑨 + 𝒎𝑴𝑩 − (𝒏 + 𝒎) 𝑴𝑩 𝒏𝑴𝑨 − 𝒏 𝑴𝑩

∙ 𝑴 − 𝑴𝑩 = − 𝑴𝑩 = =
𝒏+𝒎 𝒏+𝒎 𝒏+𝒎
𝒏
𝑴 − 𝑴𝑩 = ( ) ( 𝑴𝑨 − 𝑴𝑩 )
𝒏+𝒎

e) Si 𝑴𝑨 = 𝑴𝑩

𝑴 − 𝑴𝑨 = 𝟎 ⇔ 𝑴 = 𝑴𝑨 Et 𝑴 − 𝑴𝑩 = 𝟎 ⇔ 𝑴 = 𝑴𝑩

𝑫′ 𝒐ù 𝑴𝑨 = 𝑴𝑩 ⇒ 𝑴 = 𝑴𝑨 = 𝑴𝑩

2) 𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝑴 = 𝑴𝑨 = 𝑴𝑩

𝒏+𝒎 𝒏 𝒏+𝒎
𝟏 𝟏
𝑽= ∑ (𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴)𝟐 = (𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴)𝟐 + ∑ ⏟
[∑ ⏟ (𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴)𝟐 ]
𝒏+𝒎 𝒏+𝒎 𝟐 𝟐
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 (𝑿𝒊 −𝑴𝑨 ) 𝒊=𝒏+𝟏 (𝑿𝒊 −𝑴𝑩 )

𝒏 𝒏+𝒎
𝟏
𝑽= [∑(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑨 )𝟐 + ∑ (𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐 ]
𝒏+𝒎
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝒏+𝟏

𝒏 𝒏 𝒏+𝒎 𝒏+𝒎
𝟏 𝟏
𝑶𝒓, 𝑽𝑨 = ∑(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑨 )𝟐 ⇒ ∑(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑨 )𝟐 = 𝒏𝑽𝑨 𝒆𝒕 𝑽𝑩 = ∑ (𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐 ⇒ ∑ (𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐 = 𝒎𝑽𝑩
𝒏 𝒎
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝒏+𝟏 𝒊=𝒏+𝟏

𝟏 𝒏𝑽𝑨 + 𝒎𝑽𝑩
𝑫𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝑽 = [𝒏𝑽𝑨 + 𝒎𝑽𝑩 ] ⇒ 𝑽 =
𝒏+𝒎 𝒏+𝒎

𝑺𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒍’𝒉𝒚𝒑𝒐𝒕𝒉è𝒔𝒆 𝒅’é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔­𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝑨 𝒆𝒕 𝑩, 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝑽 𝒔𝒖𝒓

𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒕𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒏’𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅é𝒓é𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔.

𝒏𝑨 ( 𝑴𝑨 − 𝑴)𝟐 + 𝒏𝑩 ( 𝑴𝑩 − 𝑴)𝟐
𝑳𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓­𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒏𝒖𝒍𝒍𝒆 ∶ =𝟎
𝒏
3) 𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝑴𝑨 ≠ 𝑴𝑩
𝒏+𝒎 𝒏 𝒏+𝒎
𝟏 𝟏
𝑽= ∑ (𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴)𝟐 = [∑(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴)𝟐 + ∑ (𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴)𝟐 ]
𝒏+𝒎 𝒏+𝒎
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝒏+𝟏

84 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒏 𝒏+𝒎
𝟏
= [∑[(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑨 ) − (𝑴 − 𝑴𝑨 )]𝟐 + ∑ [(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑩 ) − (𝑴 − 𝑴𝑩 )]𝟐 ]
𝒏+𝒎
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝒏+𝟏

𝑨𝒗𝒆𝒄,
𝒏 𝒏

∙ ∑[(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑨 ) − (𝑴 − 𝑴𝑨 )]𝟐 = ∑[(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑨 )𝟐 + (𝑴 − 𝑴𝑨 )𝟐 − 𝟐(𝑴 − 𝑴𝑨 )(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑨 )]

𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝒏 𝒏 𝒏

= ∑(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑨 )𝟐 + ∑(𝑴 − 𝑴𝑨 )𝟐 − 𝟐(𝑴 − 𝑴𝑨 ) ∑(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑨 )

⏟
𝒊=𝟏 ⏟
𝒊=𝟏 ⏟
𝒊=𝟏
𝒏𝑽𝑨 𝒏(𝑴− 𝑴𝑨 )𝟐 𝟎

∑[(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑨 ) − (𝑴 − 𝑴𝑨 )]𝟐 = 𝒏𝑽𝑨 + 𝒏(𝑴 − 𝑴𝑨 )𝟐

𝒊=𝟏

𝒏+𝒎 𝒏+𝒎

∙ ∑ [(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑩 ) − (𝑴 − 𝑴𝑩 )]𝟐 = ∑ [(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐 + (𝑴 − 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐 − 𝟐(𝑴 − 𝑴𝑩 )(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑩 )]

𝒊=𝒏+𝟏 𝒊=𝒏+𝟏

𝒏+𝒎 𝒏+𝒎 𝒏+𝒎

= ∑ (𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐 + ∑ (𝑴 − 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐 − 𝟐(𝑴 − 𝑴𝑩 ) ∑ (𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑩 )

⏟
𝒊=𝒏+𝟏 ⏟
𝒊=𝒏+𝟏 ⏟
𝒊=𝒏+𝟏
𝒎𝑽𝑩 𝒎(𝑴− 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐 𝟎

𝒏+𝒎

∑ [(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑩 ) − (𝑴 − 𝑴𝑩 )]𝟐 = 𝒎𝑽𝑩 + 𝒎(𝑴 − 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐

𝒊=𝒏+𝟏

𝒏 𝒏+𝒎
𝟏
𝑶𝒓 𝑽 = ∑[(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑨 ) − (𝑴 − 𝑴𝑨 )]𝟐 + ∑ [(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑩 ) − (𝑴 − 𝑴𝑩 )]𝟐
𝒏+𝒎 ⏟
𝒊=𝟏 ⏟
𝒊=𝒏+𝟏
[ 𝒏𝑽𝑨 +𝒏(𝑴− 𝑴𝑨 )𝟐 𝒎𝑽𝑩 +𝒎(𝑴− 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐 ]

𝒏𝑽𝑨 + 𝒎𝑽𝑩 𝒏(𝑴 − 𝑴𝑨 )𝟐 + 𝒎(𝑴 − 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐

𝑷𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒕𝒆 : 𝑽 = +
⏟𝒏+𝒎 ⏟ 𝒏+𝒎
𝑽𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂­𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔 𝑽𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓­𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔

𝑬𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒐𝒏 𝒂 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝑴 − 𝑴𝑨 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝑴 − 𝑴𝑩 𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝑴𝑨 − 𝑴𝑩 , 𝒐𝒏

𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒓𝒂 𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝑽 𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒏, 𝒎, 𝑽𝑨 , 𝑽𝑩 , 𝑴𝑨 𝒆𝒕 𝑴𝑨

𝒎 𝟐
𝒎𝟐
𝑶𝒏 𝒂 ∶ 𝑴 − 𝑴𝑨 = − ( (𝑴 )
) 𝑨 − 𝑴𝑩 ⇒ (𝑴 )
− 𝑴𝑨 = 𝟐
(𝑴𝑨 − 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐
𝒏+𝒎 (𝒏 + 𝒎)

𝒏 𝒏𝟐
𝒆𝒕 𝑴 − 𝑴𝑩 = ( ) (𝑴𝑨 − 𝑴𝑩 ) ⇒ (𝑴 − 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐 = (𝑴𝑨 − 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐
𝒏+𝒎 (𝒏 + 𝒎)𝟐

85 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒏𝑽𝑨 + 𝒎𝑽𝑩 𝒏(𝑴 − 𝑴𝑨 )𝟐 + 𝒎(𝑴 − 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐
𝑨𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊 : 𝑽 = +
𝒏+𝒎 𝒏+𝒎
𝒏𝑽𝑨 + 𝒎𝑽𝑩 𝒏𝒎𝟐 (𝑴𝑨 − 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐 + 𝒎𝒏𝟐 (𝑴𝑨 − 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐 𝒏𝑽𝑨 + 𝒎𝑽𝑩 𝒏𝒎(𝒏 + 𝒎)(𝑴𝑨 − 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐
= + = +
𝒏+𝒎 (𝒏 + 𝒎)𝟑 𝒏+𝒎 (𝒏 + 𝒎)𝟑

𝒏𝑽𝑨 + 𝒎𝑽𝑩 𝒏𝒎(𝑴𝑨 − 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐

𝑫′ 𝒐ù, 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝑽 ∶ 𝑽 = +
𝒏+𝒎 (𝒏 + 𝒎)𝟐

4)

𝑺𝒐𝒖𝒔­𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝑨 𝑿𝒊 = 𝒙𝒊 ; 𝒊 = 𝟏, 𝟐, … , 𝟓 𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑨 (𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑨 )𝟐
𝑬𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝟏 𝑿𝟏 = 𝟐 −𝟐 𝟒
𝑬𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝟐 𝑿𝟐 = 𝟔 𝟐 𝟒
𝑬𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝟑 𝑿𝟑 = 𝟒 𝟎 𝟎
𝑬𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝟒 𝑿𝟒 = 𝟓 𝟏 𝟏
𝑬𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝟓 𝑿𝟓 = 𝟑 −𝟏 𝟏
𝟓 𝟓 𝟓
∑
∑ 𝑿𝒊 = 𝟐𝟎 ∑(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑨 ) = 𝟎 ∑(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑨 )𝟐 = 𝟏𝟎
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏
𝟓 𝟓
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
∙ 𝑴𝑨 = ∑ 𝑿𝒊 = × 𝟐𝟎 ⇒ 𝑴𝑨 = 𝟒 𝒆𝒕 𝑽𝑨 = ∑(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑨 )𝟐 = × 𝟏𝟎 ⇒ 𝑽𝑨 = 𝟐
𝟓 𝟓 𝟓 𝟓
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝑺𝒐𝒖𝒔­𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝑩 𝑿𝒊 = 𝒙𝒊 ; 𝒊 = 𝟔, 𝟕, … , 𝟏𝟎 𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑩 (𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐
𝑬𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝟔 𝑿𝟔 = 𝟏𝟏 −𝟕 𝟒𝟗
𝑬𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝟕 𝑿𝟕 = 𝟏𝟗 𝟏 𝟏
𝑬𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝟖 𝑿𝟖 = 𝟐𝟎 𝟐 𝟒
𝑬𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝟗 𝑿𝟗 = 𝟏𝟓 −𝟑 𝟗
𝑬𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝟏𝟎 𝑿𝟏𝟎 = 𝟐𝟓 𝟕 𝟒𝟗
𝟏𝟎 𝟏𝟎 𝟏𝟎
∑
∑ 𝑿𝒊 = 𝟗𝟎 ∑(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑩 ) = 𝟎 ∑(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐 = 𝟏𝟏𝟐
𝒊=𝟔 𝒊=𝟔 𝒊=𝟔
𝟏𝟎
𝟏 𝟏
∙ 𝑴𝑩 = ∑ 𝑿𝒊 = × 𝟗𝟎 ⇒ 𝑴𝑩 = 𝟏𝟖
𝟓 𝟓
𝒊=𝟔

𝑴𝑨 = 𝟒 𝒏 𝑴𝑨 + 𝒎𝑴𝑩 𝟓 𝑴𝑨 + 𝟓𝑴𝑩 𝑴𝑨 + 𝑴𝑩 𝟒 + 𝟏𝟖
∙{ ⇒𝑴= = = = ⇒ 𝑴 = 𝟏𝟏
𝑴𝑩 = 𝟏𝟖 𝒏+𝒎 𝟓+𝟓 𝟐 𝟐
𝟏𝟎
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏𝟏𝟐
∙ 𝑽𝑩 = ∑(𝑿𝒊 − 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐 = × 𝟏𝟏𝟐 ⇒ 𝑽𝑩 =
𝟓 𝟓 𝟓
𝒊=𝟔

𝟏𝟏𝟐 𝟏𝟏𝟐
𝒏𝑽𝑨 + 𝒎𝑽𝑩 𝒏𝒎(𝑴𝑨 − 𝑴𝑩 )𝟐 (𝟓 × 𝟐) + (𝟓 × 𝟓 ) 𝟓 × 𝟓 × (𝟒 − 𝟏𝟖)𝟐 𝟐 + 𝟓 𝟏𝟒𝟐
∙ 𝑽= + = + +
𝒏+𝒎 (𝒏 + 𝒎)𝟐 𝟓+𝟓 (𝟓 + 𝟓)𝟐 ⏟ 𝟐 𝟒
𝟔𝟏
𝟓

𝑽 = 𝟔𝟏, 𝟐

86 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014

Ecole Nationale d'Administration

Concours d'Entrée au Cycle Supérieur (Économie&Gestion)
Candidats Ingénieurs
Samedi 5 Janvier 2013

Exercice 4 (4 points = 3+1) :

ÉNONCÉ
𝑪𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒐ù 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒚𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝒚𝟐 > 0 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒚 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒖𝒆𝒔 :

𝒚𝒊 𝒏𝒊 (𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔)
𝟗 𝟏
𝒚𝟏 𝟐
𝟏𝟏 𝟏
𝒚𝟐 𝟏
1) 𝑬𝒏 𝒂𝒅𝒎𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒚 𝒗𝒂𝒖𝒕 𝟔, 𝟐
𝒆𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒚 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝟏𝟎, 𝟓𝟔 , 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒚𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝒚𝟐
2) 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒈é𝒐𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 (𝑮)𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒉𝒂𝒓𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 (𝑯)𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒆
𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒚 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒚𝟏 = 𝟑 𝒆𝒕 𝒚𝟐 = 𝟓

Corrigé
1) 𝑺𝒂𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒚 𝒗𝒂𝒖𝒕 𝟔, 𝟐 ; 𝒐𝒏 𝒂
𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 ∶
𝟒
𝟏 𝟗 + 𝟐𝒚𝟏 + 𝟏𝟏 + 𝒚𝟐
̅ = 𝟔, 𝟐 ⇒ ∑ 𝒏𝒊 𝒚𝒊 = 𝟔, 𝟐 ⇒
𝒀 = 𝟔, 𝟐 ⇒ 𝟐𝒚𝟏 + 𝒚𝟐 = 𝟏𝟏 (𝟏)
𝒏 𝟓
𝒊=𝟏

𝟒 𝟒
𝟏 𝟏
𝑷𝒂𝒓 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à ∶ 𝑺𝟐𝒚 ̅)𝟐 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊 𝒚𝟐𝒊 − 𝒚
= ∑ 𝒏𝒊 (𝒚𝒊 − 𝒚 ̅𝟐
𝒏 𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

∑ 𝒏𝒊 𝒚𝟐𝒊 = (𝟗)𝟐 + 𝟐(𝒚𝟏 )𝟐 + (𝟏𝟏)𝟐 + (𝒚𝟐 )𝟐 = 𝟐𝟎𝟐 + 𝟐𝒚𝟐𝟏 + 𝒚𝟐𝟐

𝒊=𝟏

𝟐𝟎𝟐 + 𝟐𝒚𝟐𝟏 + 𝒚𝟐𝟐

𝑷𝒖𝒊𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝑺𝟐𝒚 = 𝟏𝟎, 𝟓𝟔 ⇒ − (𝟔, 𝟐)𝟐 = 𝟏𝟎, 𝟓𝟔 ⇒ 𝟐𝒚𝟐𝟏 + 𝒚𝟐𝟐 = 𝟒𝟑 (𝟐)
𝟓
𝑬𝒏 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒚𝟏 𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒚𝟐 à 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒓 𝒅𝒆(𝟏), 𝒍𝒆 𝒓é𝒔𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒕 (𝟐) 𝒔′ é𝒄𝒓𝒊𝒕: 𝟑𝒚𝟐𝟏 − 𝟐𝟐𝒚𝟏 + 𝟑𝟗 = 𝟎

𝟏𝟑
𝑳𝒂 𝒓é𝒔𝒐𝒍𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 é𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒚𝟏 ∶ 𝒚𝟏 = 𝟑 𝒐𝒖 𝒚𝟏 =
𝟑

87 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝟕
𝑬𝒏 𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 (𝟏), 𝒐𝒏 𝒂 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒚𝟐 : 𝒚𝟐 = 𝟓 𝒐𝒖 𝒚𝟐 =
𝟑
2)

𝒚𝒊 𝒏𝒊 𝒇𝒊 𝒇𝒊 𝒇𝒊 𝐥𝐧 𝒚𝒊 𝒇𝒊 𝒚𝟐𝒊
𝟒
𝒚𝒊 𝒏
𝒏
𝟗 𝟏 𝟎, 𝟐 𝟎. 𝟎𝟐𝟐 𝟎. 𝟒𝟑𝟗 𝟏𝟔. 𝟐 ∙ 𝑴𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝑮é𝒐𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑮 = √∏ 𝒚𝒊 𝒊
𝟑 𝟐 𝟎, 𝟒 𝟎. 𝟏𝟑𝟑 𝟎. 𝟒𝟑𝟗 𝟑. 𝟔
𝒊=𝟏
𝟏𝟏 𝟏 𝟎, 𝟐 𝟎. 𝟎𝟏𝟖 𝟎. 𝟒𝟖 𝟐𝟒. 𝟐
𝟓 𝟏 𝟎, 𝟐 𝟎. 𝟎𝟒 𝟎. 𝟑𝟐𝟐 𝟓
∑ 𝟓 𝟏 𝟎, 𝟐𝟏𝟑 𝟏, 𝟔𝟖 𝟒𝟗

𝟒 𝟒
𝟏
𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝐥𝐧(𝑮) = ∑ 𝒏𝒊 𝐥𝐧(𝒚𝒊 ) = ∑ 𝒇𝒊 𝐥𝐧(𝒚𝒊 ) = 𝟏, 𝟔𝟖 ⇒ 𝑮 = 𝒆𝟏,𝟔𝟖 ⇒ 𝑮 = 𝟓, 𝟑𝟔𝟔
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

∙ 𝑴𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝑸𝒖𝒂𝒅𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑸 = √∑ 𝒇𝒊 𝒚𝟐𝒊 ⇒ 𝑸 = 𝟕

𝒊=𝟏

𝟒
𝟏 𝒇𝒊 𝒏
∙ 𝑴𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝑯𝒂𝒓𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑯 = 𝒏 ⇒ = ∑ = 𝟎, 𝟐𝟏𝟑 ⇒ 𝑯 = 𝟒, 𝟔𝟗𝟓
∑𝟒𝒊=𝟏 𝒊 𝑯 𝒊=𝟏 𝒚𝒊
𝒚𝒊

𝑳𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒂 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒋𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒗é𝒓𝒊𝒇𝒊é𝒆 ∶ 𝑯

⏟ ≤ 𝑮 ̅ ≤𝑸
⏟ ≤ ⏟
𝒀 ⏟
𝟒,𝟔𝟗𝟓 𝟓,𝟑𝟔𝟔 𝟔,𝟐 𝟕

𝓓– 𝟏 • 𝑮é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔 ∶

𝑼𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒖𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 à 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒓é𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔. 𝑬𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒅 𝒖𝒏 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒑 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆

𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒒𝒖’𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒖𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒓.

𝑪𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒏𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒔𝒔𝒆, 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔, à 𝒓𝒆𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔. 𝑶𝒏 𝒅é𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒆

𝒍’𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅’𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔.

𝑬𝒏 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍, 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒏𝒄𝒊𝒑𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒆𝒓 à 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓𝒆𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒖𝒆
𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅′𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒆𝒔 (𝒖𝒏 𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕

𝒆𝒏 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒄𝒓𝒆𝒕 𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒕, 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔, 𝒑𝒆𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒆) 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕è𝒓𝒆 "𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆" 𝒅′𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆

(𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒅′𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒒𝒖ê𝒕𝒆, 𝒊𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒔 𝒈ê𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒓 à 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆

𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒑𝒓é𝒄𝒊𝒔 ; 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒄𝒉𝒐𝒔𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒍′â𝒈𝒆). 𝑫𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒆𝒙𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔

88 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒎𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓é𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊 𝒍𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒖 𝒆𝒕 𝒍′â𝒈𝒆 (𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒖𝒏 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆

𝒅′𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔).

𝓪 • 𝑪𝒉𝒐𝒊𝒙 𝒅𝒖 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑳𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒏 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕 𝒅𝒆

𝒔𝒖𝒃𝒋𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒕é. 𝑬𝒏 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒕 𝒂𝒖𝒄𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒍𝒐𝒊 𝒏𝒊 𝒕𝒉é𝒐𝒓è𝒎𝒆 𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒅é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆

à 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒓. 𝑪𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒐𝒊𝒕 ê𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒏𝒊 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒑 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅 (𝒆𝒏 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍 ≤ 𝟐𝟎)𝒏𝒊 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒑 𝒑𝒆𝒕𝒊𝒕

(𝒆𝒏 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍 ≥ 𝟓), 𝒄𝒂𝒓 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒕 𝒓𝒆𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒕𝒆 𝒅’𝒊𝒏𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏.

𝑶𝒏 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒓è𝒈𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆, 𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒓è𝒈𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑺𝒕𝒖𝒓𝒈𝒆, 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒉𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒊𝒕 𝒖𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆

𝟏𝟎 𝟏𝟎 𝐥𝐧(𝒏)
𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒂𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒅𝒆 ∶ 𝒖 = 𝟏 + 𝐥𝐨𝐠 𝟏𝟎 (𝒏) = 𝟏 + ≅𝒓
𝟑 𝟑 𝐥𝐧(𝟏𝟎)

𝒐ù 𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅′ 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒕 𝒓 𝒍′ 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒓𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒖

𝓫 • 𝑪𝒉𝒐𝒊𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒈𝒖𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑶𝒏 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕 𝒍’é𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒖𝒆 𝑬 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆

𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒑𝒆𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝑿: 𝑬 = 𝒙𝒎𝒂𝒙 − 𝒙𝒎𝒊𝒏

𝑬
𝑶𝒏 𝒄𝒉𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒊𝒕 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒈𝒖𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒉 𝒕𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒉 = ≅ 𝒂 , 𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒓𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕 𝒉, 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒆𝒙𝒄è𝒔 à 𝒍’𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒓
𝒓
𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒂 𝒍’𝒂𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 𝒂 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆

𝓬 • 𝑪𝒉𝒐𝒊𝒙 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒍𝒊𝒎𝒊𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑰𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒉𝒂𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒍𝒊𝒎𝒊𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔

𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒅é𝒄𝒊𝒎𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔.

𝑫𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒉𝒐𝒊𝒙 𝒅𝒖 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒈𝒖𝒊𝒅é 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒃𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒔 𝒆𝒕

𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆. 𝑼𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝟏𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝟐𝟎 𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 ê𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒃𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒄𝒉𝒐𝒔𝒆

𝓓– 𝟐 • 𝑶𝒓𝒈𝒂𝒏𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝑪𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒄𝒓𝒆𝒕, 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆

𝒔𝒚𝒏𝒕𝒉é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅′ 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒖𝒆. 𝑷𝒂𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆, 𝒍𝒆𝒔

𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒈𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 ∶ 𝒍𝒂 𝒓é𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕é𝒆

𝒂𝒖 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏 𝒅′ 𝒖𝒏 𝒉𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒐𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒎𝒆, 𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒎𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕é 𝒂𝒖 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏

𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆. 𝑬𝒏𝒇𝒊𝒏, 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕é𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒏𝒖𝒎é𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒓é𝒔𝒖𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒆𝒔

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒄𝒓𝒆𝒕, 𝒎𝒂𝒊𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍 𝒏é𝒄𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔

𝒂𝒅𝒂𝒑𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔.

𝑶𝒏 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒖𝒏 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒂𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒈𝒖𝒆 à 𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒖𝒊 𝒗𝒖 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒓é𝒄é𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆, 𝒆𝒏

89 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒎𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊è𝒓𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒈é𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕.

𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅′ 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔, 𝒅𝒆 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 (𝒐𝒖 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆𝒔), 𝒅′ 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆

𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 (𝒐𝒖 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆𝒔)𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒇𝒂ç𝒐𝒏 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔

𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒄𝒓𝒆𝒕.

𝑭𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 ∶
𝒏 − 𝑵𝒊−𝟏 = 𝑵↘𝒊−𝟏 − 𝒏𝒊−𝟏 , 𝒔𝒊, 𝒊 ≥ 𝟐

𝟏 − 𝑭𝒊−𝟏 = 𝑭↘𝒊−𝟏 − 𝒇𝒊−𝟏 , 𝒔𝒊 , 𝒊 ≥ 𝟐

𝑭𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 ∶
𝑬𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒔 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔 ∶
𝑬𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒔 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔 ∶
𝒂𝒊
𝒇𝒊
𝑴𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔 (𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔): [𝒆𝒊 , 𝒆𝒊+𝟏[

𝑨𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 ∶ 𝒂𝒊 = 𝒆𝒊+𝟏 − 𝒆𝒊

𝑫𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 : 𝒅𝒊 =
𝑪𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 :

𝒂𝒊
𝟐

𝒏𝒊
𝒏
= 𝒆𝒊 +

𝑵↗𝒊 = 𝑵𝒊 = ∑ 𝒏𝒌
𝑭𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝒇𝒊 =

𝒏, 𝒔𝒊 𝒋 = 𝟏

𝑭↗𝒊 = 𝑭𝒊 = ∑ 𝒇𝒌

𝟏, 𝒔𝒊 𝒊 = 𝟏
𝑬𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 ∶ 𝒏𝒊

𝒌=𝟏

𝒌=𝟏
𝒊

𝒊
𝒆𝒊 + 𝒆𝒊+𝟏
𝟐
𝒄𝒊 =

𝑭↘𝒊 = {
𝑵↘𝒊 = {
[𝒆𝟏 , 𝒆𝟐 [ 𝒂𝟏 𝒄𝟏 𝒏𝟏 𝒇𝟏 𝒅𝟏 𝑵𝟏 𝑵↘𝟏 = 𝒏 𝑭𝟏 𝑭↘𝟏 = 𝟏
[𝒆𝟐 , 𝒆𝟑 [ 𝒂𝟐 𝒄𝟐 𝒏𝟐 𝒇𝟐 𝒅𝟐 𝑵𝟐 𝑵↘𝟐 𝑭𝟐 𝑭↘𝟐
[𝒆𝟑 , 𝒆𝟒 [ 𝒂𝟑 𝒄𝟑 𝒏𝟑 𝒇𝟑 𝒅𝟑 𝑵𝟑 𝑵↘𝟑 𝑭𝟑 𝑭↘𝟑
⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮
[𝒆𝒓 , 𝒆𝒓+𝟏 [ 𝒂𝒓 𝒄𝒓 𝒏𝒓 𝒇𝒓 𝒅𝒓 𝑵𝒓 = 𝒏 𝑵↘𝒓 𝑭𝒓 = 𝟏 𝑭↘𝒓
∑ 𝒏 𝟏
𝒆𝒊 + 𝒆𝒊+𝟏 𝒂𝒊
 𝑨𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 ∶ 𝒂𝒊 = 𝒆𝒊+𝟏 − 𝒆𝒊  𝑪𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 : 𝒄𝒊 = = 𝒆𝒊 +
𝟐 𝟐
𝒇𝒊 𝒏𝒊
 𝑫𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 : 𝒅𝒊 =  𝑫𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒕é 𝒅′𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 : 𝒅′𝒊 =
𝒂𝒊 𝒂𝒊
𝒊

 𝒏𝒊 = 𝑪𝒂𝒓𝒅( 𝑿 ∈ [𝒆𝒊 , 𝒆𝒊+𝟏 [ )  𝑵↗𝒊 = 𝑵𝒊 = ∑ 𝒏𝒌 = 𝑪𝒂𝒓𝒅(𝑿 < 𝒆𝒊+𝟏 ) = 𝑪𝒂𝒓𝒅(𝑿 ≤ 𝒆𝒊 )

𝒌=𝟏

 𝑵↘𝒊 = 𝑪𝒂𝒓𝒅(𝑿 ≥ 𝒆𝒊 ) = 𝒏 − 𝑪𝒂𝒓𝒅(𝑿 < 𝒆𝒊 ) = 𝒏 − 𝑪𝒂𝒓𝒅(𝑿 ≤ 𝒆𝒊−𝟏 ) = 𝒏 − 𝑵𝒊−𝟏 = 𝑵↘𝒊−𝟏 − 𝒏𝒊−𝟏

𝒊
𝒏𝒊 𝑵𝒊
 𝒇𝒊 = 𝑷(𝑿 ∈ [𝒆𝒊 , 𝒆𝒊+𝟏 [) =  𝑭↗𝒊 = 𝑭𝒊 = ∑ 𝒇𝒌 = 𝑷(𝑿 < 𝒆𝒊 ) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝒆𝒊 ) =
𝒏 𝒏
𝒌=𝟏

 𝑷(𝒂 < 𝑿 ≤ 𝒃) = 𝑷(𝒂 < 𝑿 < 𝒃) = 𝑷(𝒂 ≤ 𝑿 ≤ 𝒃) = 𝑷(𝒂 ≤ 𝑿 < 𝒃) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝒃) − 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝒂) = 𝑭(𝒃) − 𝑭(𝒂)

𝑵↘𝒊
 𝑭↘𝒊 = 𝑷(𝑿 ≥ 𝒆𝒊 ) = 𝟏 − 𝑷(𝑿 < 𝒆𝒊−𝟏 ) = 𝟏 − 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝒆𝒊−𝟏 ) = 𝟏 − 𝑭𝒊−𝟏 = 𝑭↘𝒊−𝟏 − 𝒇𝒊−𝟏 =
𝒏

𝓓– 𝟑 • 𝑹𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒖𝒔𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒂ç𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒆𝒏

𝒃â𝒕𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍′𝒉𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒐𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆.

𝓪 • 𝑳′𝒉𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒐𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒎𝒆 ∶ 𝑳𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 (𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑. 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔)

𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒖𝒆 𝒔’𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒉𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒐𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒎𝒆.

90 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝑳𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕é𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒖𝒏 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒈𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕

𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 à 𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 (𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑. 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆).

 𝒔𝒊 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒊𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔, 𝒍𝒂 𝒉𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒖 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒈𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕

𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 à 𝒍’𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 (𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑. 𝑭𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆).

 𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒅’𝒂𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔, 𝒊𝒍 𝒇𝒂𝒖𝒕 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄é𝒅𝒆𝒓 à 𝒖𝒏 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍 𝒅𝒆𝒔

𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒆 é𝒍é𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒄𝒉𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒊 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔

𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒈𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔, 𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒅 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍’𝒂𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆

𝒂𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆. 𝑺𝒊 𝒍’𝒐𝒏 𝒅é𝒔𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒏𝒊 𝒍’𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒊, 𝒂𝒊 𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 𝒆𝒕

𝒏𝒊
𝒂𝟎 𝒍’𝒂𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆, 𝒍’𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒊𝒈é 𝒏𝒄𝒊 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒏𝒄𝒊 = 𝒅′𝒊 × 𝒂𝟎 = × 𝒂𝟎
𝒂𝒊

𝒇𝒊
𝑶𝒖 𝒆𝒏 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔, 𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒊𝒈é𝒆 𝒇𝒄𝒊 = 𝒅𝒊 × 𝒂𝟎 = × 𝒂𝟎
𝒂𝒊
𝒓 𝒓

 𝑹𝒆𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ ∑ 𝒏𝒄𝒊 ≠ 𝒏 𝒆𝒕 ∑ 𝒇𝒄𝒊 ≠ 𝟏

𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

 𝑶𝒏 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒍𝒚𝒈𝒐𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 (𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑. 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔) 𝒆𝒏 𝒋𝒐𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒅𝒆𝒔

𝒔𝒆𝒈𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄ô𝒕é𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒑é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒈𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒉𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒐𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒎𝒆.

𝑳𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒍𝒚𝒈𝒐𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒆𝒕 𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊 𝒅′ é𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒖𝒆𝒓 𝒗𝒊𝒔𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒅𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆

𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕é 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆.

 𝑬𝒙𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆 ∶

𝑳𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒓é𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒐𝒚é𝒔 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒍𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 ∶
𝑺𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒏 𝑫 𝑵𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅’𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒐𝒚é𝒔 ∶ 𝒏𝒊 𝒂𝒊 𝒄𝒊 𝒇𝒊 𝒇𝒊 𝒇𝒄𝒊 = 𝒅𝒊 × 𝒂𝟎 𝑭↗𝒊 𝑭↘𝒊
[𝒆𝒊 , 𝒆𝒊+𝟏 [ 𝒅𝒊 = (%)
𝒂𝒊 𝒂𝟎 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎
[𝟖𝟎𝟎, 𝟗𝟎𝟎[ 𝟒𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟖𝟓𝟎 𝟎, 𝟐 𝟎, 𝟐% 𝟐𝟎% 𝟎, 𝟐 𝟏
[𝟗𝟎𝟎, 𝟏𝟏𝟎𝟎[ 𝟓𝟎 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟎, 𝟐𝟓 𝟎, 𝟏𝟐𝟓% 𝟏𝟐, 𝟓% 𝟎, 𝟒𝟓 𝟎, 𝟖
[𝟏𝟏𝟎𝟎, 𝟏𝟐𝟎𝟎[ 𝟕𝟔 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟏𝟓𝟎 𝟎, 𝟑𝟖 𝟎, 𝟑𝟖% 𝟑𝟖% 𝟎, 𝟖𝟑 𝟎, 𝟓𝟓
[𝟏𝟐𝟎𝟎, 𝟏𝟒𝟎𝟎[ 𝟏𝟖 𝟑𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟑𝟓𝟎 𝟎, 𝟎𝟗 𝟎, 𝟎𝟑% 𝟑% 𝟎, 𝟗𝟐 𝟎, 𝟏𝟕
[𝟏𝟒𝟎𝟎, 𝟐𝟎𝟎𝟎[ 𝟏𝟔 𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟕𝟓𝟎 𝟎, 𝟎𝟖 𝟎, 𝟎𝟏𝟔% 𝟏, 𝟔% 𝟏 𝟎, 𝟎𝟖
∑ 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝟏
Histogramme
38%
40%
35%
30%
25% 20%
20%
13%
15%
10%
3% 1,6%
5%
0%
[800,900[ [900,1100 [ [1100,1200 [ [1200,1500 [ [1500,2000 [

91 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝓫 • 𝑳𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 ∶ 𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒗 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒃𝒐𝒓𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆, 𝒐𝒏

𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒐𝒄𝒊𝒆 𝒖𝒏 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 (𝒗, 𝑭 (𝒗)). 𝑶𝒏 𝒋𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔é𝒄𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒖𝒏 𝒔𝒆𝒈𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕.

𝑶𝒏 𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒏 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒈𝒆𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒏 𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝒆𝒏 𝟏 𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒆𝒙𝒕𝒓ê𝒎𝒆𝒔.

Courbes cumulatives
𝑪𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝑪𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔
1
0,95
0,9
0,85
0,8
0,75
0,7
0,65
0,6
0,55
0,5
0,45
0,4
0,35
0,3
0,25
0,2
0,15
0,1
0,05
0
𝑫𝟏 𝑸𝟏 𝑴𝒆 𝑸𝟑 𝑫𝟗
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600

𝓓– 𝟒 • 𝑷𝒓𝒊𝒏𝒄𝒊𝒑𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒎è𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 (𝒐𝒖 𝒅𝒆 𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒆) ∶

𝓪 • 𝑪𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑳𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒂𝒚𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆

𝒇𝒊
𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 (𝒅𝒊 = ) . 𝑮𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕, 𝒄’𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒖
𝒂𝒊

𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒈𝒍𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒉𝒂𝒖𝒕 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍’𝒉𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒐𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒎𝒆.

 𝑰𝒍 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒚 𝒂𝒗𝒐𝒊𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒐𝒖 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔, 𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒉𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒊𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒂𝒚𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔

𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒕é. 𝑰𝒍 𝒆𝒙𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒆 ∶

𝑺𝒐𝒊𝒕 [𝒆𝒎 , 𝒆𝒎+𝟏 [ , 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒂𝒚𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆𝒂𝒎 , 𝒖𝒏 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒏𝒎 𝒆𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒇𝒎

𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒐𝒏𝒔 [𝒆𝒎−𝟏 , 𝒆𝒎 [ 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓é𝒄è𝒅𝒆 𝒂𝒚𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒏𝒎−𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒇𝒎−𝟏

𝒆𝒕[𝒆𝒎−𝟏 , 𝒆𝒎 [ 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒖𝒄𝒄è𝒅𝒆 𝒂𝒚𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒏𝒎+𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒇𝒎+𝟏

𝒏𝒎 − 𝒏𝒎−𝟏 𝒇𝒎 − 𝒇𝒎−𝟏
𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊 ∶ 𝑴𝒐 = 𝒆𝒎 + 𝒂𝒎 [ ] = 𝒆𝒎 + 𝒂𝒎 [ ]
(𝒏𝒎 − 𝒏𝒎−𝟏 ) + (𝒏𝒎 − 𝒏𝒎+𝟏 ) (𝒇𝒎 − 𝒇𝒎−𝟏 ) + (𝒇𝒎 − 𝒇𝒎+𝟏 )

𝓫 • 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝑴𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆, 𝒈é𝒐𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆, 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒅𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒉𝒂𝒓𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 ∶

 𝑳𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑳𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏 𝒓é𝒔𝒖𝒎é

𝒏𝒖𝒎é𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅 𝒂𝒖 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒗𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏. 𝑬𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎é𝒆 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂

𝒓 𝒓
𝟏
̅=
𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒕é 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝑿 ∑ 𝒏𝒊 𝒄𝒊 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊 𝒄𝒊
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

92 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
 𝑳𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒈é𝒐𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶

𝟏
𝒓 𝒓 𝒏 𝒓 𝒓 𝒓
𝒏
̅ = √∏ 𝒄𝒊 𝒏𝒊 = [∏ 𝒄𝒊 ] = ∏ 𝒄𝒊
𝑮 𝒏𝒊 𝒇𝒊 ̅ ) = ∑ 𝒇𝒊 𝐥𝐧(𝒄𝒊 )
= 𝐞𝐱𝐩 [∑ 𝒇𝒊 𝐥𝐧(𝒄𝒊 )] , 𝒄𝒂𝒓 𝐥𝐧(𝑮
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝒓 𝒓
̅=
 𝑳𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒅𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑸 √∑ 𝒇𝒊 𝒄𝟐𝒊 ̅𝟐
𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝑸 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊 𝒄𝟐𝒊
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝒓 −𝟏 𝒓
𝒇 𝟏 𝒇𝒊
̅ = [∑ 𝒊 ]
 𝑳𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒉𝒂𝒓𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑯 𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 = ∑
𝒄𝒊 ̅
𝑯 𝒄𝒊
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

̅≤𝑿
̅ ≤𝑮
𝑳𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒂 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒋𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒗é𝒓𝒊𝒇𝒊é𝒆 ∶ 𝑯 ̅
̅≤𝑸

𝓬 • 𝑸𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 ∶

 𝑰𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒐𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 ∶ 𝑶𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆 𝑭(𝒙) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝒙). ∀𝒙 ∈ [𝒂, 𝒃[ ⊂ [𝒙𝒎𝒊𝒏 , 𝒙𝒎𝒂𝒙 ]

𝒙−𝒂
𝒐𝒏 𝒂: 𝑭(𝒙) = 𝑭(𝒂) + [(𝑭(𝒃) − 𝑭(𝒂)) ( )]
𝒃−𝒂
• 𝑬𝒙𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆 ∶
𝑺𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒏 𝑫 𝑵𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅’𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒐𝒚é𝒔 ∶ 𝒏𝒊 𝒂𝒊 𝒄𝒊 𝒇𝒊 𝒇𝒊 𝒇𝒄𝒊 = 𝒅𝒊 × 𝒂𝟎 𝑭↗𝒊 𝑭↘𝒊
[𝒆𝒊 , 𝒆𝒊+𝟏 [ 𝒅𝒊 = (%)
𝒂𝒊 𝒂𝟎 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎
[𝟖𝟎𝟎, 𝟗𝟎𝟎[ 𝟒𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟖𝟓𝟎 𝟎, 𝟐 𝟎, 𝟐% 𝟐𝟎% 𝟎, 𝟐 𝟏
[𝟗𝟎𝟎, 𝟏𝟏𝟎𝟎[ 𝟓𝟎 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟎, 𝟐𝟓 𝟎, 𝟏𝟐𝟓% 𝟏𝟐, 𝟓% 𝟎, 𝟒𝟓 𝟎, 𝟖
[𝟏𝟏𝟎𝟎, 𝟏𝟐𝟎𝟎[ 𝟕𝟔 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟏𝟓𝟎 𝟎, 𝟑𝟖 𝟎, 𝟑𝟖% 𝟑𝟖% 𝟎, 𝟖𝟑 𝟎, 𝟓𝟓
[𝟏𝟐𝟎𝟎, 𝟏𝟒𝟎𝟎[ 𝟏𝟖 𝟑𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟑𝟓𝟎 𝟎, 𝟎𝟗 𝟎, 𝟎𝟑% 𝟑% 𝟎, 𝟗𝟐 𝟎, 𝟏𝟕
[𝟏𝟒𝟎𝟎, 𝟐𝟎𝟎𝟎[ 𝟏𝟔 𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟕𝟓𝟎 𝟎, 𝟎𝟖 𝟎, 𝟎𝟏𝟔% 𝟏, 𝟔% 𝟏 𝟎, 𝟎𝟖
∑ 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝟏
𝑶𝒏 𝒔𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅’𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒐𝒚é𝒔 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒖 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝟏𝟏𝟐𝟎 𝑫 ?

𝑨𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒕 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝟏𝟏𝟐𝟎) = 𝑭(𝟏𝟏𝟐𝟎)

𝑶𝒓 𝟏𝟏𝟐𝟎 ∈ [𝟏𝟏𝟎𝟎
⏟ , 𝟏𝟐𝟎𝟎
⏟ [ , 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝑭(𝟏𝟏𝟎𝟎) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝟏𝟏𝟎𝟎) = 𝟎, 𝟒𝟓 𝒆𝒕 𝑭(𝟏𝟐𝟎𝟎) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝟏𝟐𝟎𝟎) = 𝟎, 𝟖𝟑
𝒂 𝒃

𝑷𝒂𝒓 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒐𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 ∶

𝟏𝟏𝟐𝟎 − 𝟏𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟐𝟎
𝑭(𝟏𝟏𝟐𝟎) = 𝑭(𝟏𝟏𝟎𝟎) + [(𝑭(𝟏𝟐𝟎𝟎) − 𝑭(𝟏𝟏𝟎𝟎)) ( )] = 𝟎, 𝟒𝟓 + [(𝟎, 𝟖𝟑 − 𝟎, 𝟒𝟓) × ( )] = 𝟎, 𝟓𝟒𝟓
𝟏𝟐𝟎𝟎 − 𝟏𝟏𝟐𝟎 𝟖𝟎

 𝑳𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 (𝒐𝒖 𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆)𝑴𝒆 = 𝑸𝟐 ∶

𝟏
𝑳𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝒅′ 𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 . 𝑬𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒍𝒂 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙
𝟐
𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅′ 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 é𝒈𝒂𝒖𝒙: (𝑭(𝑴𝒆 ) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝑴𝒆 ) = 𝑷(𝑿 > 𝑴𝒆 ) = 𝟓𝟎% )

93 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒏 𝒏
• 𝑶𝒏 𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒊 𝒕𝒆𝒍 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝑭𝒊−𝟏 ≤ 𝟎, 𝟓 (𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑. 𝑵𝒊−𝟏 ≤ ) 𝒆𝒕 𝑭𝒊 > 𝟎, 𝟓(𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑. 𝑵𝒊 > )
𝟐 𝟐
𝟎, 𝟓 − 𝑭𝒊−𝟏 𝒏⁄𝟐 − 𝑵𝒊−𝟏
𝑷𝒂𝒓 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒐𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 ∶ 𝑴𝒆 = 𝒆𝒊 + 𝒂𝒊 ( ) = 𝒆𝒊 + 𝒂𝒊 ( )
𝑭𝒊 − 𝑭𝒊−𝟏 𝑵𝒊 − 𝑵𝒊−𝟏

𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒆𝒊 𝒍𝒂 𝒃𝒐𝒓𝒏𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒇é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 à 𝑭𝒊 𝒆𝒕 𝒂𝒊 𝒍’𝒂𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆

𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆.

• 𝑮𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 𝒏’𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍’𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒄𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝒅’𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏

𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔

𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔. 𝑨𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒕 𝒍’𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒄𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔

𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 (𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑. 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔) 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝟎, 𝟓

 𝑳𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 (𝑸𝟏 )𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒊è𝒎𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 (𝑸𝟑 ):

𝑳𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝒅’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝟏⁄𝟒 , 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒊è𝒎𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒖𝒊 𝒅′𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝟑⁄𝟒

𝑶𝒏 𝒗𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝟐𝟓 % 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒇é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒖 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒖 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆:

(𝑭(𝑸𝟏 ) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝑸𝟏 ) = 𝟐𝟓% ) , 𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝟕𝟓 % 𝒍𝒖𝒊 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒔𝒖𝒑é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒔 ∶ (𝑷(𝑿 > 𝑸𝟏 ) = 𝟕𝟓%)

𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒊è𝒎𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆, 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒔′ 𝒊𝒏𝒗𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕 ∶ 𝟕𝟓 % 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒍𝒖𝒊 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕

𝒊𝒏𝒇é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒖 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶ (𝑭(𝑸𝟑 ) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝑸𝟑 ) = 𝟕𝟓% ), 𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝟐𝟓 % 𝒍𝒖𝒊 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒔𝒖𝒑é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒔

: (𝑷(𝑿 > 𝑸𝟑 ) = 𝟐𝟓%)

• 𝑳𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝑸𝟏 ∶ 𝑶𝒏 𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒊 𝒕𝒆𝒍 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝑭𝒊−𝟏 ≤ 𝟎, 𝟐𝟓

(𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑. 𝑵𝒊−𝟏 ≤ 𝒏⁄𝟒) 𝒆𝒕 𝑭𝒊 > 𝟎, 𝟐𝟓(𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑. 𝑵𝒊 > 𝒏⁄𝟒)

𝟎, 𝟐𝟓 − 𝑭𝒊−𝟏 𝒏⁄𝟒 − 𝑵𝒊−𝟏

𝑷𝒂𝒓 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒐𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 ∶ 𝑸𝟏 = 𝒆𝒊 + 𝒂𝒊 ( ) = 𝒆𝒊 + 𝒂𝒊 ( )
𝑭𝒊 − 𝑭𝒊−𝟏 𝑵𝒊 − 𝑵𝒊−𝟏

𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒆𝒊 𝒍𝒂 𝒃𝒐𝒓𝒏𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒇é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 à 𝑭𝒊 𝒆𝒕 𝒂𝒊 𝒍’𝒂𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆

𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆.

• 𝑳𝒆 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒊è𝒎𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝑸𝟑 ∶ 𝑶𝒏 𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒊 𝒕𝒆𝒍 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝑭𝒊−𝟏 ≤ 𝟎, 𝟕𝟓

(𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑. 𝑵𝒊−𝟏 ≤ 𝟑𝒏⁄𝟒) 𝒆𝒕 𝑭𝒊 > 𝟎, 𝟕𝟓(𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑. 𝑵𝒊 > 𝟑𝒏⁄𝟒)

𝟎, 𝟕𝟓 − 𝑭𝒊−𝟏 𝟑𝒏⁄𝟒 − 𝑵𝒊−𝟏

𝑷𝒂𝒓 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒐𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 ∶ 𝑸𝟑 = 𝒆𝒊 + 𝒂𝒊 ( ) = 𝒆𝒊 + 𝒂𝒊 ( )
𝑭𝒊 − 𝑭𝒊−𝟏 𝑵𝒊 − 𝑵𝒊−𝟏

𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒆𝒊 𝒍𝒂 𝒃𝒐𝒓𝒏𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒇é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 à 𝑭𝒊 𝒆𝒕 𝒂𝒊 𝒍’𝒂𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆

𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆.

94 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
• 𝑫é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑸𝟏 : 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝑸𝟏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍’𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒄𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒖

𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝟎, 𝟐𝟓

𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝒍’𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒄𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕

𝒍’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝟎, 𝟕𝟓

• 𝑫é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑸𝟑 : 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒊è𝒎𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝑸𝟑 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍’𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒄𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒖

𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝟎, 𝟕𝟓

𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝒍’𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒄𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕

𝒍’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝟎, 𝟐𝟓

 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆𝒔

𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒅é𝒄𝒊𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅′ 𝒖𝒔𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒕. 𝑰𝒍 𝒆𝒙𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒆 𝟗 𝒅é𝒄𝒊𝒍𝒆𝒔

𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍′ 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝟏𝟎 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒔 𝒅′ é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆

(𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒄𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝟏𝟎 % 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔)(𝑭(𝑫𝟏 ) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝑫𝟏 ) = 𝟏𝟎% 𝒆𝒕 𝑷(𝑿 > 𝑫𝟏 ) = 𝟗𝟎%),

(𝑭(𝑫𝟐 ) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝑫𝟐 ) = 𝟐𝟎% 𝒆𝒕 𝑷(𝑿 > 𝑫𝟐 ) = 𝟖𝟎%) , … , (𝑭(𝑫𝟗 ) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝑫𝟗 ) = 𝟗𝟎% 𝒆𝒕 𝑷(𝑿 > 𝑫𝟗 ) = 𝟏𝟎%)

𝒆𝒕 𝟗𝟗 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒆𝒏 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒔 𝒅′ 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 é𝒈𝒂𝒖𝒙 ∶

(𝑭(𝜶𝟏 ) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝜶𝟏 ) = 𝟏% 𝒆𝒕 𝑷(𝑿 > 𝜶𝟏 ) = 𝟗𝟗%), (𝑭(𝜶𝟐 ) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝜶𝟐 ) = 𝟐% 𝒆𝒕 𝑷(𝑿 > 𝜶𝟐 ) = 𝟗𝟖%) , …,

(𝑭(𝜶𝟗𝟗 ) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝜶𝟗𝟗 ) = 𝟗𝟗% 𝒆𝒕 𝑷(𝑿 > 𝜶𝟗𝟗 ) = 𝟏%)

• 𝑳𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒅é𝒄𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝑫𝟏 ∶ 𝑶𝒏 𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒊 𝒕𝒆𝒍 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝑭𝒊−𝟏 ≤ 𝟎, 𝟏 (𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑. 𝑵𝒊−𝟏 ≤ 𝒏⁄𝟏𝟎)

𝒆𝒕 𝑭𝒊 > 𝟎, 𝟏(𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑. 𝑵𝒊 > 𝒏⁄𝟏𝟎). 𝑷𝒂𝒓 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒐𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 ∶

𝟎, 𝟏 − 𝑭𝒊−𝟏 𝒏⁄𝟏𝟎 − 𝑵𝒊−𝟏

𝑫𝟏 = 𝒆𝒊 + 𝒂𝒊 ( ) = 𝒆𝒊 + 𝒂𝒊 ( ) 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒆𝒊 𝒍𝒂 𝒃𝒐𝒓𝒏𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒇é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆
𝑭𝒊 − 𝑭𝒊−𝟏 𝑵𝒊 − 𝑵𝒊−𝟏

𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 à 𝑭𝒊 𝒆𝒕 𝒂𝒊 𝒍’𝒂𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆.

𝟗𝒏
• 𝑳𝒆 𝒏𝒆𝒖𝒗𝒊è𝒎𝒆 𝒅é𝒄𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝑫𝟗 ∶ 𝑶𝒏 𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒊 𝒕𝒆𝒍 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝑭𝒊−𝟏 ≤ 𝟎, 𝟗 (𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑. 𝑵𝒊−𝟏 ≤ )
𝟏𝟎

𝒆𝒕 𝑭𝒊 > 𝟎, 𝟗(𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑. 𝑵𝒊 > 𝟗𝒏⁄𝟏𝟎)𝑷𝒂𝒓 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒐𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 ∶

𝟎, 𝟗 − 𝑭𝒊−𝟏 𝟗𝒏⁄𝟏𝟎 − 𝑵𝒊−𝟏

𝑫𝟗 = 𝒆𝒊 + 𝒂𝒊 ( ) = 𝒆𝒊 + 𝒂𝒊 ( ) 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒆𝒊 𝒍𝒂 𝒃𝒐𝒓𝒏𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒇é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆
𝑭𝒊 − 𝑭𝒊−𝟏 𝑵𝒊 − 𝑵𝒊−𝟏

𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 à 𝑭𝒊 𝒆𝒕 𝒂𝒊 𝒍’𝒂𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆.

• 𝑫é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑫𝟏 : 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒅é𝒄𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝑫𝟏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍’𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒄𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒖

𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝟎, 𝟏

95 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝒍’𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒄𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕

𝒍’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝟎, 𝟗

• 𝑫é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑫𝟗 : 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒆𝒖𝒗𝒊è𝒎𝒆 𝒅é𝒄𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝑫𝟗 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍’𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒄𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒖

𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝟎, 𝟗

𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝒍’𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒄𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕

𝒍’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝟎, 𝟏

𝓓– 𝟓 • 𝑷𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒎è𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶

𝓪 • 𝑳′ é𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 é𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒆𝒕

𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒑𝒆𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 ∶ 𝑬 = 𝒆𝒎𝒂𝒙 − 𝒆𝒎𝒊𝒏

𝓫 • 𝑳′ é𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒖𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 ∶ É𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒊è𝒎𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆, 𝒊𝒍

𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒖 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒔 𝟓𝟎% 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏, 𝒊𝒍 𝒏’𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒇𝒍𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄é 𝒑𝒂𝒓

𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒆𝒙𝒕𝒓ê𝒎𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑬𝑰𝑸 = 𝑸𝟑 − 𝑸𝟏

𝒓

𝓬 • É𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕 𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒐𝒍𝒖 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 ∶ 𝒆𝑴𝒆 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊 |𝒄𝒊 − 𝑴𝒆 |

𝒊=𝟏

𝒓
̅|
𝓭 • É𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕 𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒐𝒍𝒖 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 ∶ 𝒆𝑿̅ = ∑ 𝒇𝒊 |𝒄𝒊 − 𝑿
𝒊=𝟏

𝓮 • É𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕­𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒆 𝒐𝒖 é𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒅𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏 ∶ 𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒐𝒖 𝒇𝒍𝒖𝒄𝒕𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏,

𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 é𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒓é𝒔𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗é𝒔 à 𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 ∶
𝒓 𝒓
𝟏
̅ )𝟐 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊 (𝒄𝒊 − 𝑿
𝑺𝟐𝒙 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊 (𝒄𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ )𝟐 𝑳’é𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕­𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒆 𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒓
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

̅ )𝟐
𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 ∶ 𝑺𝒙 = √∑ 𝒇𝒊 (𝒄𝒊 − 𝑿
𝒊=𝟏

 𝑷𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é𝒔 ∶

 𝑺𝟐𝒙 ≥ 𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝑺𝒙 ≥ 𝟎

 𝑳’é𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕­𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎é 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒕é 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆.

 𝑷𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒍’é𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕­𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒆𝒕𝒊𝒕, 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒓𝒆𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑é𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂

𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆. 𝑷𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒊𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅, 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒔é𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆

96 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆.
𝒓

 𝑻𝒉é𝒐𝒓è𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑲ö𝒏𝒊𝒈­𝑯𝒖𝒚𝒈𝒆𝒏𝒔 ∶ 𝑺𝟐𝒙 = ̅̅̅̅

𝑿𝟐 − 𝑿 ̅𝟐 − 𝑿
̅𝟐 = 𝑸 ̅ 𝟐 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊 𝒄𝟐𝒊 − 𝑿
̅𝟐
𝒊=𝟏
 𝑺𝟐𝒂𝒙+𝒃 = 𝒂𝟐 𝑺𝟐𝒙
 𝑺𝒂𝒙+𝒃 = |𝒂|𝑺𝒙
𝒓
𝟏 𝒏
 𝑽𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅’é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒂𝒈𝒆 ∶ 𝑺 = 𝟐 ̅ )𝟐 =
∑ 𝒏𝒊 (𝒄𝒊 − 𝑿 𝑺𝟐
𝒏−𝟏 𝒏−𝟏 𝒙
𝒊=𝟏
𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏 é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏 𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒖 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍’𝒐𝒏 𝒔’𝒊𝒏𝒕é𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒂𝒖𝒙

𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕é𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒗𝒊𝒂 𝒍’é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏 (𝒊𝒏𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆), 𝒐𝒏 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒕ô𝒕 𝑺𝟐 𝒒𝒖𝒊

𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏 𝒎𝒆𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒆𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒕𝒉é𝒐𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏(𝑽(𝑿) = 𝝈𝟐 ).

𝑫è𝒔 𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒛 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆, 𝑺𝟐 ≈ 𝑺𝟐𝒙

̅
 𝑺𝒊 𝑺𝟐𝒙 = 𝑺𝒙 = 𝟎 , 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆: ∀𝒊, 𝒙𝒊 = 𝑿
𝒓 𝒓
𝟏 𝟏
̅ )𝟐 = ∑(𝒄𝒊 − 𝒂)𝟐 − (𝑿
 𝑰𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é ∶ ∑(𝒄𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ − 𝒂)𝟐
𝒏 𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏
𝓯 • 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 ∶

 𝑴𝒐𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 à 𝒂 𝒅’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒌 ∶

𝑺𝒐𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒙𝟏 , 𝒙𝟐 , … , 𝒙𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒂 ∈ ℝ, 𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕

𝒓 𝒓
𝟏
à 𝒂 𝒅’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒌 (𝒐ù 𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒔é 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒇)𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 ∶ ∑ 𝒏𝒊 (𝒄𝒊 − 𝒂)𝒌 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊 (𝒄𝒊 − 𝒂)𝒌
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

 𝑴𝒐𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 à 𝒍’𝒐𝒓𝒊𝒈𝒊𝒏𝒆 (𝒐𝒖 𝒏𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓é𝒔) 𝒅’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒌 ∶

𝒓 𝒓
𝟏
̅ 𝒌 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊 𝒄𝒌𝒊 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊 𝒄𝒌𝒊 , 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 ∶ 𝒎
𝒎 ̅
̅𝟏 = 𝑿
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

 𝑴𝒐𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓é𝒔 𝒅’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒌 ∶

𝒓 𝒓
𝟏
̅ )𝒌 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊 (𝒄𝒊 − 𝑿
̅ 𝒌 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊 (𝒄𝒊 − 𝑿
𝝁 ̅ )𝒌 , 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 ∶ 𝝁 ̅ 𝟐 = 𝑺𝟐𝒙
̅ 𝟏 = 𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝝁
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

̅ 𝒆𝒕
𝓰 • 𝑳’𝒊𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝑩𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒂𝒚𝒎é­𝑻𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒃𝒚𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒗 ∶ 𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒕𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝑿

𝟏
̅ − 𝝀𝒔 ≤ 𝑿 ≤ 𝑿
𝒅’é𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕­𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒆 𝑺𝒙 ∶ 𝑷(𝑿 ̅ + 𝝀𝒔 ) ≥ 𝟏 − , 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒕 𝝀 > 𝟏
𝝀𝟐
̅ − 𝟐𝒔 ≤ 𝑿 ≤ 𝑿
𝑷(𝑿 ̅ + 𝟐𝒔) ≥ 𝟑⁄𝟒 𝐞𝐭 𝑷(𝑿
̅ − 𝟑𝒔 ≤ 𝑿 ≤ 𝑿
̅ + 𝟑𝒔) ≥ 𝟖⁄𝟗

𝓓– 𝟔 • 𝑷𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒎è𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒆 ∶ 𝑬𝒏 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍’é𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏, 𝒊𝒍

𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒕é𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒅’é𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏, 𝒎𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒆𝒏 é𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂

97 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆. 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒎è𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕é𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒚𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒍’𝒂𝒑𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕.

𝓪 • 𝑨𝒔𝒚𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒅′𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶

 𝑪𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅’𝒂𝒔𝒚𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑷𝒆𝒂𝒓𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒃𝒂𝒔é 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒆𝒕

̅ − 𝑴𝒆
𝑿
𝒅𝒖 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒆, 𝒆𝒕 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒓𝒅𝒊𝒔é 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍’é𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕­𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒆 ∶ 𝓟𝟏 =
𝑺𝒙

 𝑪𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒀𝒖𝒍𝒆 & 𝑲𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒍 ∶ 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒃𝒂𝒔é 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝟑 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆𝒔

(𝟏𝒆𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆, 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝟑è𝒎𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆), 𝒆𝒕 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒏𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒔é 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆:

𝑸𝟑 + 𝑸𝟏 − 𝟐𝑸𝟐
𝓨𝒌 =
𝑸𝟑 − 𝑸𝟏

 𝑪𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅’𝒂𝒔𝒚𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑭𝒊𝒔𝒉𝒆𝒓 ∶

• 𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓é𝒔 𝒅’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒂𝒊𝒓, 𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔

é𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 é𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒔 𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒏𝒖𝒍𝒔.

𝑳𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒔𝒚𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆.

̅ )𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕
• 𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒚𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 à 𝒈𝒂𝒖𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 (𝒄𝒊 − 𝑿

̅ )𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒔

𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆𝒖𝒙, 𝒎𝒂𝒊𝒔 𝒑𝒆𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒐𝒍𝒖𝒆, 𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔(𝒄𝒊 − 𝑿

𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒎𝒂𝒊𝒔 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅.

𝑼𝒏 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒓 𝒍’𝒂𝒔𝒚𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒂 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕

𝝁
̅𝟑 ̅ )𝟑
∑𝒓𝒊=𝟏 𝒇𝒊 (𝒄𝒊 − 𝑿
𝒅’𝒂𝒔𝒚𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑭𝒊𝒔𝒉𝒆𝒓 ∶ 𝜸𝟏 = = 𝟑
𝑺𝟑𝒙
(√∑𝒓𝒊=𝟏 𝒇𝒊 (𝒄𝒊 − ̅ )𝟐 )
𝑿

𝑫𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒚𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 é𝒕𝒂𝒍é𝒆 à 𝒈𝒂𝒖𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝑫𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒚𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝑫𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒚𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 é𝒕𝒂𝒍é𝒆 à 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆

̅ < 𝑴𝒆 < 𝑴𝒐
𝑿 ̅ = 𝑴𝒆 = 𝑴𝒐
𝑿 ̅ > 𝑴𝒆 > 𝑴𝒐
𝑿 𝑪𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝑴𝒐𝒅𝒆­
𝑴𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆­ 𝑴é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆
̅ − 𝑴𝒆
𝑿 ̅ − 𝑴𝒆
𝑿 ̅ − 𝑴𝒆
𝑿 𝑪𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅’𝒂𝒔𝒚𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒆
𝓟𝟏 = <0 𝓟𝟏 = =𝟎 𝓟𝟏 = >0 𝒅𝒆 𝑷𝒆𝒂𝒓𝒔𝒐𝒏
𝑺𝒙 𝑺𝒙 𝑺𝒙
𝑸𝟑 + 𝑸𝟏 − 𝟐𝑸𝟐 𝑸𝟑 + 𝑸𝟏 − 𝟐𝑸𝟐 𝑸𝟑 + 𝑸𝟏 − 𝟐𝑸𝟐 𝑪𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒀𝒖𝒍𝒆 &
𝓨𝒌 = <0 𝓨𝒌 = =𝟎 𝓨𝒌 = >0
𝑸𝟑 − 𝑸 𝟏 𝑸𝟑 − 𝑸𝟏 𝑸𝟑 − 𝑸𝟏 𝑲𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒍
𝝁
̅𝟑 𝝁
̅𝟑 𝝁
̅𝟑 𝑪𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅’𝒂𝒔𝒚𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒆
𝜸𝟏 = 𝟑 < 0 𝜸𝟏 = 𝟑 = 𝟎 𝜸𝟏 = 𝟑 > 0
𝑺𝒙 𝑺𝒙 𝑺𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝑭𝒊𝒔𝒉𝒆𝒓

98 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝓫 • 𝑷𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒎è𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒅’𝒂𝒑𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 (𝒌𝒖𝒓𝒕𝒐𝒔𝒊𝒔) ∶

𝝁
̅𝟒
𝑳’𝒂𝒑𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒖𝒓é 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅’𝒂𝒑𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝑷𝒆𝒂𝒓𝒔𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝓟𝟐 =
𝑺𝟒𝒙

𝝁
̅𝟒
𝒐𝒖 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅’𝒂𝒑𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝑭𝒊𝒔𝒉𝒆𝒓 ∶ 𝜸𝟐 = 𝓟𝟐 − 𝟑 = −𝟑
𝑺𝟒𝒙
𝑷𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒖𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝑵𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝑫𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝑵𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝑷𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒂𝒑𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝑵𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒂𝒍𝒆

(𝒍𝒆𝒑𝒕𝒐𝒌𝒖𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆) (𝒎é𝒔𝒐𝒌𝒖𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆) (𝒑𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒚𝒌𝒖𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆)

𝝁
̅𝟒 𝝁
̅𝟒 𝝁
̅𝟒
𝜸𝟐 = −𝟑>𝟎 𝜸𝟐 = −𝟑=𝟎 𝜸𝟐 = −𝟑<𝟎
𝑺𝟒𝒙 𝑺𝟒𝒙 𝑺𝟒𝒙

𝓓– 𝟕 • 𝑷𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒎è𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 (𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒊𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é) ∶

𝓪 • 𝑰𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒅𝒖𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶

𝑫𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒓𝒔 𝒐𝒏𝒕 é𝒕é 𝒅é𝒗𝒆𝒍𝒐𝒑𝒑é𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒖𝒔

𝒐𝒖 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒆. 𝑶𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅è𝒓𝒆 𝒒𝒖’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒄𝒊é𝒕é 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆

𝒔𝒊 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔 𝒓𝒆ç𝒐𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒖. 𝑳𝒂 𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒕𝒉é𝒐𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒊𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆

𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒐ù 𝒖𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒆𝒓ç𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒖𝒔, 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔 𝒏’𝒐𝒏𝒕

𝒂𝒖𝒄𝒖𝒏 𝒓𝒆𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒖.

𝓫 • 𝑫é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒅é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒍𝒈é𝒃𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶

 𝑽𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒕𝒔 (𝒏𝒊 𝒄𝒊 )𝟏≤𝒊≤𝒓

(𝑬𝒙𝒑: 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆) 𝒐ù 𝒏𝒊 ∶ 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 ; 𝒄𝒊 ∶ 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆

 𝑽𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝒓
̅ (𝑬𝒙𝒑: 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔)
𝑽𝑮𝑻 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊 𝒄𝒊 = 𝒏𝑿
𝒊=𝟏

 𝑽𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔

𝒏𝒊 𝒄𝒊
(𝑽𝑮𝑹) 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒔 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 ∶ 𝑽𝑮𝑹𝒊 = 𝒒𝒊 = 𝒓 ,
∑𝒊=𝟏 𝒏𝒊 𝒄𝒊

𝒒𝒖′ 𝒐𝒏 𝒍′ 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒏 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆.

(𝑬𝒙𝒑: 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒆𝒏 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒖 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍 )

99 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②
Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
 𝑽𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 ∶
𝒊

𝑪𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝑸𝒊 = ∑ 𝒒𝒌 . 𝑶𝒏 𝒂 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒋𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒔 ∶ 𝟎 ≤ 𝑸𝒊 ≤ 𝑭𝒊 ≤ 𝟏

𝒌=𝟏

(𝑬𝒙𝒑: 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 )

 𝑴é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒍𝒆 ∶ 𝑶𝒏 𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒊 𝒕𝒆𝒍 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝑸𝒊−𝟏 ≤ 𝟎, 𝟓 𝒆𝒕 𝑸𝒊 > 𝟎, 𝟓 . 𝑷𝒂𝒓

𝟎, 𝟓 − 𝑸𝒊−𝟏
𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒐𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕: 𝑴𝒍𝒆 = 𝒆𝒊 + 𝒂𝒊 ( ) 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒆𝒊 𝒍𝒂 𝒃𝒐𝒓𝒏𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒇é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆
𝑸𝒊 − 𝑸𝒊−𝟏

𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 à 𝑸𝒊 𝒆𝒕 𝒂𝒊 𝒍’𝒂𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆.

𝑶𝒏 𝒂 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒋𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒔: 𝑴𝒍𝒆 ≥ 𝑴𝒆

 𝑬𝒙𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆 ∶ 𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏,

𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑é𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝟐𝟓𝟎 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 :

𝑪𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒔 𝒄𝒊 𝒏𝒊 𝑽𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒊 𝑭𝒊 𝑽𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔
𝒏𝒊 𝒄𝒊 𝒏𝒊 𝒄𝒊 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑸𝒊
𝑽𝑮𝑹𝒊 = 𝒒𝒊 =
𝑽𝑮𝑻
[𝟏𝟐𝟎𝟎 ; 𝟏𝟔𝟎𝟎[ 𝟏𝟒𝟎𝟎 𝟐𝟓 𝟑𝟓𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟎, 𝟏 𝟎, 𝟏 𝟎, 𝟎𝟓𝟔 𝟎, 𝟎𝟓𝟔
[𝟏𝟔𝟎𝟎 ; 𝟐𝟎𝟎𝟎[ 𝟏𝟖𝟎𝟎 𝟑𝟐 𝟓𝟕𝟔𝟎𝟎 𝟎, 𝟏𝟐𝟖 𝟎, 𝟐𝟐𝟖 𝟎, 𝟎𝟗𝟐 𝟎, 𝟏𝟒𝟕
[𝟐𝟎𝟎𝟎 ; 𝟐𝟒𝟎𝟎[ 𝟐𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝟓𝟒 𝟏𝟏𝟖𝟖𝟎𝟎 𝟎, 𝟐𝟏𝟔 𝟎, 𝟒𝟒𝟒 𝟎, 𝟏𝟖𝟗 𝟎, 𝟑𝟑𝟔
[𝟐𝟒𝟎𝟎 ; 𝟐𝟖𝟎𝟎[ 𝟐𝟔𝟎𝟎 𝟔𝟎 𝟏𝟓𝟔𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟎, 𝟐𝟒 𝟎, 𝟔𝟖𝟒 𝟎, 𝟐𝟒𝟖 𝟎, 𝟓𝟖𝟒
[𝟐𝟖𝟎𝟎 ; 𝟑𝟐𝟎𝟎[ 𝟑𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟒𝟒 𝟏𝟑𝟐𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟎, 𝟏𝟕𝟔 𝟎, 𝟖𝟔 𝟎, 𝟐𝟏𝟎 𝟎, 𝟕𝟗𝟒
[𝟑𝟐𝟎𝟎 ; 𝟑𝟔𝟎𝟎[ 𝟑𝟒𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟗 𝟔𝟒𝟔𝟎𝟎 𝟎, 𝟎𝟕𝟔 𝟎, 𝟗𝟑𝟔 𝟎, 𝟏𝟎𝟑 𝟎, 𝟖𝟗𝟔
[𝟑𝟔𝟎𝟎 ; 𝟒𝟎𝟎𝟎[ 𝟑𝟖𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟎 𝟑𝟖𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟎, 𝟎𝟒 𝟎, 𝟗𝟕𝟔 𝟎, 𝟎𝟔𝟎 𝟎, 𝟗𝟓𝟕
[𝟒𝟎𝟎𝟎 ; 𝟒𝟔𝟎𝟎[ 𝟒𝟑𝟎𝟎 𝟒 𝟏𝟕𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝟎, 𝟎𝟏𝟔 𝟎, 𝟗𝟗𝟐 𝟎, 𝟎𝟐𝟕 𝟎, 𝟗𝟖𝟒
[𝟒𝟔𝟎𝟎 ; 𝟓𝟒𝟎𝟎[ 𝟓𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟐 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟎, 𝟎𝟎𝟖 𝟏 𝟎, 𝟎𝟏𝟔 𝟏
∑ 𝟐𝟓𝟎 𝑽𝑮𝑻 = 𝟔𝟐𝟗𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝟏 𝟏
• 𝑳𝒂 𝒎𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑽𝑮𝑻 = 𝟔𝟐𝟗𝟐𝟎𝟎

• 𝑷𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒆𝒙𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 ∶ [𝟑𝟔𝟎𝟎 ; 𝟒𝟎𝟎𝟎[

 𝒇𝟕 = 𝟒%. 𝑰𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓é𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝟒% 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝑺𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊é𝒔 (𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒖 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝟏𝟎)

𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝟑𝟔𝟎𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝟒𝟎𝟎𝟎
 𝒒𝟕 = 𝟔%. 𝑰𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓é𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊é𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒖𝒏 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕
𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝟑𝟔𝟎𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝟒𝟎𝟎𝟎 € 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆, 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕, 𝒖𝒏
𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 é𝒈𝒂𝒍 à ∶ 𝟔 %.
 𝑭𝟕 = 𝟗𝟕, 𝟔%. 𝑰𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓é𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝟗𝟕, 𝟔% 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊é𝒔 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒏𝒕
𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝟒𝟎𝟎𝟎
 𝑸𝟕 = 𝟗𝟓, 𝟕%. 𝑰𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓é𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊é𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒖𝒏 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕
𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒇é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓 à 𝟒𝟎𝟎𝟎 € 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆, 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕, 𝒖𝒏 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆
𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à ∶ 𝟖𝟗, 𝟔𝟑 %
𝑭 𝟗𝟕, 𝟔%
 ( 𝟕) = ( ) . 𝑰𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓é𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝟗𝟕, 𝟔% 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊é𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒕
𝑸𝟕 𝟗𝟓, 𝟕%
𝟗𝟓, 𝟕% 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔
𝟎, 𝟓 − 𝑭𝒊−𝟏 𝟎, 𝟓 − 𝟎, 𝟒𝟒𝟒
 𝑴𝒆 = 𝒆𝒊 + 𝒂𝒊 ( ) = 𝟐𝟒𝟎𝟎 + [𝟒𝟎𝟎 × ( )] = 𝟐𝟒𝟗𝟑, 𝟑𝟑𝟑
𝑭𝒊 − 𝑭𝒊−𝟏 𝟎, 𝟔𝟖𝟒 − 𝟎, 𝟒𝟒𝟒
𝑰𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓é𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝟓𝟎% 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊é𝒔 𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝟐𝟒𝟗𝟑, 𝟑𝟑𝟑

𝟎, 𝟓 − 𝑸𝒊−𝟏 𝟎, 𝟓 − 𝟎, 𝟑𝟑𝟔
 𝑴𝒍𝒆 = 𝒆𝒊 + 𝒂𝒊 ( ) = 𝟐𝟒𝟎𝟎 + [𝟒𝟎𝟎 × ( )] = 𝟐𝟔𝟔𝟒, 𝟓𝟏𝟔
𝑸𝒊 − 𝑸𝒊−𝟏 𝟎, 𝟓𝟖𝟒 − 𝟎, 𝟑𝟑𝟔

100 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝑰𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓é𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊é𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒖𝒏 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒇é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓 à 𝟐𝟔𝟔𝟒 € 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒕
𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒊é 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆. É𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒆𝒎𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕, 𝒄𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒈𝒂𝒈𝒏𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒅𝒆
𝟐𝟔𝟔𝟒 € 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒍’𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒊é 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆
𝓬 • 𝑪𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 (𝒐𝒖 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒛) ∶

𝑳𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒛, 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒊𝒔𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂

𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅′𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 (𝒂𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇, 𝒑𝒂𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒆, 𝒓𝒆𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒖, 𝒆𝒕𝒄. ) 𝒂𝒖 𝒔𝒆𝒊𝒏 𝒅′𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏.

𝑷𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒑𝒓é𝒄𝒊𝒔é𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕, 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒛 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒊𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔 (𝑭𝒊 , 𝑸𝒊 ) 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒊 = 𝟏, . . . , 𝒓.

𝑬𝒏 𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒄𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆, 𝒐𝒏 𝒂 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔é𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒖, 𝒆𝒕 𝒆𝒏

𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒖 𝒓𝒆𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒖 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍 𝒓𝒆ç𝒖 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔.

𝑪𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒊𝒔𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒓é𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒖𝒔, 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒔, 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔

𝒂𝒈𝒓𝒊𝒄𝒐𝒍𝒆𝒔 … 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒍’é𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒊𝒆, 𝒗𝒐𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 …

𝑳𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒛 𝒔’𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒄𝒓𝒊𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒖𝒏 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é. 𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒓é𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒍’𝒊𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é, 𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒐𝒊𝒕

𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒆𝒓 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒅’é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒈𝒐𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆 .

𝑫𝒆 𝒇𝒂ç𝒐𝒏 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒆, 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒛 𝒔𝒆 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒅’é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒕𝒆

𝒆𝒕 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒓é𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓é𝒆 𝒂𝒖 𝒔𝒆𝒊𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆.

𝑬𝒏 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒕, 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔, 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 (𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔, 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒊𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒆, 𝒅𝒖 𝒓𝒆𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒖, 𝒆𝒕𝒄. )𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒆𝒖

𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓é𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒔. 𝑰𝒏𝒗𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕, 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒛 𝒔’é𝒍𝒐𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂

𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒅’é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒓é𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓é𝒆 𝒂𝒖 𝒔𝒆𝒊𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂

𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒊𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 (𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔, 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒊𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒆, 𝒅𝒖 𝒓𝒆𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒖)𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔

𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓é𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒖𝒏 𝒑𝒆𝒕𝒊𝒕 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔.

Courbe de Lorenz
𝑸
100% 𝒊
95%
90%
85%
80%
75%
70%
65%
60%
55%
50%
45%
40%
35%
30%
25%
20%
15%
10%
5%
0% 𝑭𝒊
0%
5%

100%
10%
15%
20%
25%
30%
35%
40%
45%
50%
55%
60%
65%
70%
75%
80%
85%
90%
95%

101 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝟑 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔, 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒍𝒊𝒎𝒊𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕é𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒊­𝒅𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔 ∶

Cas numéro 1 Cas numéro 2 Cas numéro 3

C C C

A
A
B

D O D O
D
O

𝑪𝒂𝒔 𝒏𝒖𝒎é𝒓𝒐 𝟏 ∶ 𝑪𝒂𝒔 𝒏𝒖𝒎é𝒓𝒐 𝟐 ∶ 𝑪𝒂𝒔 𝒏𝒖𝒎é𝒓𝒐 𝟑 ∶

É𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝑰𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒎𝒐𝒅é𝒓é𝒆 𝑰𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆
𝑳𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒛 𝒔𝒆 𝑳𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒛 𝑳𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒛
𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒅 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒈𝒍𝒆 𝑬𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝑶𝑪𝑫.
(𝑶𝑪) 𝒅’é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒕𝒆. 𝑶𝑪𝑫 𝒆𝒏 𝟐 𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒄𝒆𝒔. 𝑳𝒂 𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒄𝒆 𝑨 𝒐𝒄𝒄𝒖𝒑𝒆
𝑪𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝑷𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒄𝒆 𝑨 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒈𝒍𝒆 𝑶𝑪𝑫
𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒔è𝒅𝒆 𝒂𝒖𝒈𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒄𝒆 𝑩 𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒖𝒆.
𝒍𝒂 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒄𝒆 𝑩 𝒆𝒕 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝑪’𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒓𝒉é𝒕𝒐𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆
𝒎𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒍’𝒊𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒂𝒖𝒈𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒐ù 𝒖𝒏 𝒔𝒆𝒖𝒍 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖
𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒔è𝒅𝒆 𝟏𝟎𝟎% 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂
𝒎𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔
𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒏
𝓭 • 𝑰𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 (𝒐𝒖 𝑰𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑮𝑰𝑵𝑰) ∶

 𝑫é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝑳𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝑮𝑰𝑵𝑰 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒊𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é

𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒐𝒄𝒊é𝒆 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒛. 𝑰𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒆 ∶

𝑨 𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏

𝑰𝑮 = =
𝑨+𝑩 𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒈𝒍𝒆 𝑶𝑫𝑪

𝑶ù 𝑨 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒛 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒅’é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é

𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝑩 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒄𝒆 𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒖é𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒅’é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂

𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒄𝒆 𝑨. 𝑳𝒆 𝒎𝒆𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒗𝒊𝒔𝒖𝒆𝒍 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒏𝒖𝒎é𝒓𝒐 𝟐 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒄𝒊­𝒂𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕.

𝑳𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝑮𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒛é𝒓𝒐 𝒆𝒕 𝟏. 𝑬𝒏 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒅’é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒕𝒆, 𝒊𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍 à 𝒛é𝒓𝒐

(𝒄𝒂𝒓 𝑨 = 𝟎). 𝑬𝒏 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒅’𝒊𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒊𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍 à 𝟏, 𝒄𝒂𝒓 𝑩 = 𝟎.

𝑷𝒂𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒕, à 𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝑰𝑮 𝒂𝒖𝒈𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒛é𝒓𝒐 à 𝟏, 𝒍’𝒊𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒓é𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏

𝒂𝒖𝒈𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆. 𝑳𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝑮𝑰𝑵𝑰 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒆𝒕 𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊 𝒅𝒆 𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆𝒖𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒔.

𝑺𝒂𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒛 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒄𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒖𝒏 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é 𝒅𝒆 𝟏 × 𝟏, 𝒐𝒏 𝒗𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂

𝟏 𝑨
𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒄𝒆 𝑨 + 𝑩 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒊é 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒄𝒆. 𝑶𝒏 𝒂 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 ∶ 𝑨 + 𝑩 = ⇒ 𝑰𝑮 = = 𝟐𝑨
𝟐 𝟏⁄𝟐

𝟏 𝟏 𝑨 𝟏
𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 ∶ 𝑨 + 𝑩 = ⇒ 𝑨 = − 𝑩 ∶ 𝑰𝑮 = = 𝟐𝑨 = 𝟐 ( − 𝑩) = 𝟏 − 𝟐𝑩
𝟐 𝟐 𝑨+𝑩 𝟐

102 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
 𝑫é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏:

• 𝑴é𝒕𝒉𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑶𝒏 𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒛 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒖𝒏 𝒑𝒂𝒑𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒎𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒊𝒎é𝒕𝒓é

(𝟏𝒎𝒎 = 𝟏%)𝒑𝒖𝒊𝒔 𝒐𝒏 é𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒖𝒆 𝒍’𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝑨 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎é 𝒆𝒏 𝒄𝒎𝟐 . 𝑨𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 ∶ 𝑰𝑮 = 𝟐𝑨

𝒓−𝟏 𝒓−𝟏
𝑭 𝑸𝒊
• 𝑴é𝒕𝒉𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒈𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑰𝑮 = ∑[(𝑭𝒊 𝑸𝒊+𝟏 ) − (𝑭𝒊+𝟏 𝑸𝒊 )] = ∑ | 𝒊 |
𝑭𝒊+𝟏 𝑸𝒊+𝟏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝑬𝒙𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆 ∶

𝑭𝒊 𝑸𝒊 (𝑭𝒊 𝑸𝒊+𝟏 ) − (𝑭𝒊+𝟏 𝑸𝒊 )

𝟎, 𝟏 𝟎, 𝟎𝟓𝟔 (𝑭𝟏 𝑸𝟐 ) − (𝑭𝟐 𝑸𝟏 ) = 𝟎, 𝟏𝟗𝟑𝟐% 𝟎, 𝟏 𝟎, 𝟎𝟓𝟔 𝟎, 𝟐𝟐𝟖 𝟎, 𝟏𝟒𝟕 𝟎, 𝟒𝟒𝟒 𝟎, 𝟑𝟑𝟔
𝑰𝑮 = | |+| |+| |
𝟎, 𝟐𝟐𝟖 𝟎, 𝟏𝟒𝟕 (𝑭𝟐 𝑸𝟑 ) − (𝑭𝟑 𝑸𝟐 ) = 𝟏, 𝟏𝟑𝟒% ⏟𝟎, 𝟐𝟐𝟖 𝟎, 𝟏𝟒𝟕 ⏟𝟎, 𝟒𝟒𝟒 𝟎, 𝟑𝟑𝟔 ⏟𝟎, 𝟔𝟖𝟒 𝟎, 𝟓𝟖𝟒
𝟎, 𝟒𝟒𝟒 𝟎, 𝟑𝟑𝟔 (𝑭𝟑 𝑸𝟒 ) − (𝑭𝟒 𝑸𝟑 ) = 𝟐, 𝟗𝟒𝟕𝟐% 𝟎,𝟏𝟗𝟑𝟐% 𝟏,𝟏𝟑𝟒% 𝟐,𝟗𝟒𝟕𝟐%

𝟎, 𝟔𝟖𝟒 𝟎, 𝟓𝟖𝟒 (𝑭𝟒 𝑸𝟓 ) − (𝑭𝟓 𝑸𝟒 ) = 𝟒, 𝟎𝟖𝟓𝟔%

𝟎, 𝟖𝟔 𝟎, 𝟕𝟗𝟒 (𝑭𝟓 𝑸𝟔 ) − (𝑭𝟔 𝑸𝟓 ) = 𝟐, 𝟕𝟑𝟕𝟔% 𝟎, 𝟔𝟖𝟒 𝟎, 𝟓𝟖𝟒 𝟎, 𝟖𝟔 𝟎, 𝟕𝟗𝟒 𝟎, 𝟗𝟑𝟔 𝟎, 𝟖𝟗𝟔
+| |+| |+| |
(𝑭𝟔 𝑸𝟕 ) − (𝑭𝟕 𝑸𝟔 ) = 𝟐, 𝟏𝟐𝟓𝟔% ⏟𝟎, 𝟖𝟔 𝟎, 𝟕𝟗𝟒 ⏟𝟎, 𝟗𝟑𝟔 𝟎, 𝟖𝟗𝟔 ⏟𝟎, 𝟗𝟕𝟔 𝟎, 𝟗𝟓𝟕
𝟎, 𝟗𝟑𝟔 𝟎, 𝟖𝟗𝟔
𝟒,𝟎𝟖𝟓𝟔% 𝟐,𝟕𝟑𝟕𝟔% 𝟐,𝟏𝟐𝟓𝟔%
𝟎, 𝟗𝟕𝟔 𝟎, 𝟗𝟓𝟕 (𝑭𝟕 𝑸𝟖 ) − (𝑭𝟖 𝑸𝟕 ) = 𝟏, 𝟏𝟎𝟒%
𝟎, 𝟗𝟗𝟐 𝟎, 𝟗𝟖𝟒 (𝑭𝟖 𝑸𝟗 ) − (𝑭𝟗 𝑸𝟖 ) = 𝟎, 𝟖% 𝟎, 𝟗𝟕𝟔 𝟎, 𝟗𝟓𝟕 𝟎, 𝟗𝟗𝟐 𝟎, 𝟗𝟖𝟒
𝟏 𝟏 𝑰𝑮 = 𝟏𝟓, 𝟏𝟐𝟕𝟐% +| |+| | = 𝟏𝟓, 𝟏𝟐𝟕𝟐%
⏟𝟎, 𝟗𝟗𝟐 𝟎, 𝟗𝟖𝟒 ⏟ 𝟏 𝟏
𝟏,𝟏𝟎𝟒% 𝟎,𝟖%

• 𝑴é𝒕𝒉𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒑è𝒛𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑰𝑮 = 𝟏 − [𝒇𝟏 𝑸𝟏 + ∑ 𝒇𝒊 (𝑸𝒊−𝟏 + 𝑸𝒊 )]

𝒊=𝟏

𝑶𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 ∶ 𝑰𝑮 = 𝟏 − [∑ 𝒇𝒊 (𝑸𝒊−𝟏 + 𝑸𝒊 )] ; 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝑸𝟎 = 𝟎

𝒊=𝟏

𝑬𝒙𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆 ∶

𝒇𝒊 𝑸𝒊 𝑸𝒊−𝟏 + 𝑸𝒊 𝒇𝒊 (𝑸𝒊−𝟏 + 𝑸𝒊 )
𝟎, 𝟏 𝟎, 𝟎𝟓𝟔 𝑸𝟎 + 𝑸𝟏 = 𝑸𝟏 = 𝟎, 𝟎𝟓𝟔 𝟎, 𝟓𝟔%
𝟎, 𝟏𝟐𝟖 𝟎, 𝟏𝟒𝟕 𝑸𝟏 + 𝑸𝟐 = 𝟎, 𝟐𝟎𝟑 𝟐, 𝟓𝟗𝟖𝟒%
𝟎, 𝟐𝟏𝟔 𝟎, 𝟑𝟑𝟔 𝑸𝟐 + 𝑸𝟑 = 𝟎, 𝟒𝟖𝟑 𝟏𝟎, 𝟒𝟑𝟐𝟖%
𝟎, 𝟐𝟒 𝟎, 𝟓𝟖𝟒 𝑸𝟑 + 𝑸𝟒 = 𝟎, 𝟗𝟐 𝟐𝟐, 𝟎𝟖%
𝟎, 𝟏𝟕𝟔 𝟎, 𝟕𝟗𝟒 𝑸𝟒 + 𝑸𝟓 = 𝟏, 𝟑𝟕𝟖 𝟐𝟒, 𝟐𝟓𝟐𝟖%
𝟎, 𝟎𝟕𝟔 𝟎, 𝟖𝟗𝟔 𝑸𝟓 + 𝑸𝟔 = 𝟏, 𝟔𝟗 𝟏𝟐, 𝟖𝟒𝟒%
𝟎, 𝟎𝟒 𝟎, 𝟗𝟓𝟕 𝑸𝟔 + 𝑸𝟕 = 𝟏, 𝟖𝟓𝟑 𝟕, 𝟒𝟏𝟐%
𝟎, 𝟎𝟏𝟔 𝟎, 𝟗𝟖𝟒 𝑸𝟕 + 𝑸𝟖 = 𝟏, 𝟗𝟒𝟏 𝟑, 𝟏𝟎𝟓𝟔%
𝟎, 𝟎𝟎𝟖 𝟏 𝑸𝟖 + 𝑸𝟗 = 𝟏, 𝟗𝟖𝟒 𝟏, 𝟓𝟖𝟕𝟐%
∑ 𝟖𝟒, 𝟖𝟕𝟐𝟖%
𝑰𝑮 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎% − 𝟖𝟒, 𝟖𝟕𝟐𝟖% = 𝟏𝟓, 𝟏𝟐𝟕𝟐%
𝒓 𝒓
𝟏
• 𝑴é𝒕𝒉𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆: 𝑰𝑮 = ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊 𝒏𝒋 |𝒄𝒊 − 𝒄𝒋 |
̅
𝟐𝒏(𝒏 − 𝟏)𝑿
𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏

• 𝑴é𝒕𝒉𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒊𝒏𝒕é𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 (𝒈) ∶

𝟏 𝟏

𝑰𝑮 = 𝟏 − 𝟐 ∫ 𝒈(𝒙)𝒅𝒙 = 𝟐 ∫(𝒙 − 𝒈(𝒙))𝒅𝒙

𝟎 𝟎

103 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014

Exercice 5 (4 points = 1+1+1+1) :

ÉNONCÉ
𝑪𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 ∶
𝑪𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝟐𝟎 − 𝟑𝟎 𝟑𝟎 − 𝟒𝟎 𝟒𝟎 − 𝒛 𝒛 − 𝟕𝟎 𝟕𝟎 − 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔
𝑬𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 ∶ 𝒏𝒊 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟒𝟎 𝟏𝟐𝟓 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟖𝟎 𝟓𝟓

1) 𝑺𝒂𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝟓𝟔, 𝟖 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒛

2) 𝑺𝒖𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒖𝒕 𝟔𝟎, 𝟓. 𝑶𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒂 𝒚 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆
𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒃𝒐𝒓𝒏𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒇é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝟏𝟎𝟎 ∶
a) 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒚 𝒆𝒏 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒛 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍é𝒆 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝟏)
b) 𝑬𝒏 𝒅é𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒃𝒐𝒓𝒏𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒑é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒃𝒐𝒓𝒏𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒇é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆
é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝟏𝟎𝟎

Corrigé
1) 𝑫é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒛 ∶
𝒏
𝑳𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒊é 𝒅𝒆 𝒍’𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à = 𝟒𝟎𝟎. 𝑪𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆
𝟐
𝑵𝒊−𝟏 = 𝟑𝟔𝟓 𝒆𝒕 𝑵𝒊 = 𝟓𝟔𝟓, 𝒄𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒔𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒊𝒇𝒊𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒛 𝒆𝒕 𝟕𝟎.
𝑪𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔: [𝒆𝒊 , 𝒆𝒊+𝟏 [ 𝑨𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 ∶ 𝒂𝒊 𝑬𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 ∶ 𝒏𝒊 𝑬𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒔 ↗ ∶ 𝑵𝒊
[𝟐𝟎, 𝟑𝟎[ 𝟏𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟎
[𝟑𝟎, 𝟒𝟎 [ 𝟏𝟎 𝟏𝟒𝟎 𝟐𝟒𝟎
[𝟒𝟎, 𝒛 [ 𝒛 − 𝟒𝟎 𝟏𝟐𝟓 𝟑𝟔𝟓
[𝒛, 𝟕𝟎[ 𝟕𝟎 − 𝒛 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝟓𝟔𝟓
[𝟕𝟎, 𝟏𝟎𝟎 [ 𝟑𝟎 𝟏𝟖𝟎 𝟕𝟒𝟓
[𝟏𝟎𝟎 , 𝒕 [ 𝒕 − 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟓𝟓 𝟖𝟎𝟎
∑ 𝟖𝟎𝟎
𝑶𝒓, 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝟓𝟔, 𝟖 𝒄𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶
𝒏
− 𝑵𝒊−𝟏 𝟒𝟎𝟎 − 𝟑𝟔𝟓 𝟕(𝟕𝟎 − 𝒛)
𝑴𝒆 = 𝒛 + (𝟕𝟎 − 𝒛) ( 𝟐 ) ⇔ 𝟓𝟔, 𝟖 = 𝒛 + (𝟕𝟎 − 𝒛) ( ) ⇔ 𝟓𝟔, 𝟖 = 𝒛 +
𝑵𝒊 − 𝑵𝒊−𝟏 𝟓𝟔𝟓 − 𝟑𝟔𝟓 𝟒𝟎

𝟑𝟑𝒛 𝟒𝟗 𝟖𝟗𝟏 𝟒𝟎 ′
⇔ = 𝟓𝟔, 𝟖 − ⇔𝒛= × 𝒅 𝒐ù ∶ 𝒛 = 𝟓𝟒
𝟒𝟎 𝟒 𝟐𝟎 𝟑𝟑

104 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
2)
a) 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍 𝒅𝒆 𝒚 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒃𝒐𝒓𝒏𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒑é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝟏𝟎𝟎 ∶

𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒊 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒊 𝒏𝒊 ∶

𝑪𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔: [𝒆𝒊 , 𝒆𝒊+𝟏 [ 𝑨𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 ∶ 𝒂𝒊 𝑪𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒊 𝒏𝒊 𝒄𝒊 𝒏 𝒊
[𝟐𝟎, 𝟑𝟎[ 𝟏𝟎 𝟐𝟓 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟐𝟓𝟎𝟎
[𝟑𝟎, 𝟒𝟎 [ 𝟏𝟎 𝟑𝟓 𝟏𝟒𝟎 𝟒𝟗𝟎𝟎
[𝟒𝟎, 𝟓𝟒 [ 𝟏𝟒 𝟒𝟕 𝟏𝟐𝟓 𝟓𝟖𝟕𝟓
[𝟓𝟒, 𝟕𝟎[ 𝟏𝟔 𝟔𝟐 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟐𝟒𝟎𝟎
[𝟕𝟎, 𝟏𝟎𝟎 [ 𝟑𝟎 𝟖𝟓 𝟏𝟖𝟎 𝟏𝟓𝟑𝟎𝟎
[𝟏𝟎𝟎 , 𝒕 [ 𝒕 − 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝒚 𝟓𝟓 𝟓𝟓𝒚
∑ 𝟖𝟎𝟎 𝟒𝟎𝟗𝟕𝟓 + 𝟓𝟓𝒚
𝟔
𝟏
̅ = ∑ 𝒄𝒊 𝒏𝒊
𝑴𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑿
𝒏
𝒊=

𝟏 𝟓𝟓 𝟒𝟎𝟗𝟕𝟓 𝟐𝟗𝟕 𝟖𝟎𝟎 ′

𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄, 𝟔𝟎, 𝟓 = (𝟒𝟎𝟗𝟕𝟓 + 𝟓𝟓𝒚) ⇔ 𝒚 = 𝟔𝟎, 𝟓 − ⇔𝒚= × , 𝒅 𝒐ù: 𝒚 = 𝟏𝟑𝟓
𝟖𝟎𝟎 𝟖𝟎𝟎 𝟖𝟎𝟎 𝟑𝟐 𝟓𝟓
b) 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒃𝒐𝒓𝒏𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒑 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒃𝒐𝒓𝒏𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒇é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆 𝒐𝒖 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝟏𝟎𝟎 ∶

𝑪𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 ∶ [𝟏𝟎𝟎 , 𝒕 [ 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒚 = 𝟏𝟑𝟓

𝟏𝟎𝟎 + 𝒕
𝑷𝒂𝒓 𝒂𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 ∶ = 𝟏𝟑𝟓 ⇒ 𝒕 = 𝟏𝟕𝟎
𝟐

Ecole Nationale d'Administration

Concours d'Entrée au Cycle Supérieur (Économie&Gestion)
Candidats Ingénieurs
Samedi 21 Septembre 2013

Exercice 6 (4 points = 1 + 1 + 2) :
ÉNONCÉ
𝑳𝒂 𝒓é𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕 :

𝑺𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝑵𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊é𝒔

[𝟎­𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎[ 𝟎
[𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎­𝟏𝟒𝟎𝟎[ 𝟏𝟎𝟎
[𝟏𝟒𝟎𝟎­𝟏𝟖𝟎𝟎[ 𝟏𝟓𝟎
[𝟏𝟖𝟎𝟎­𝟐𝟐𝟎𝟎[ 𝟒𝟎
[𝟐𝟐𝟎𝟎­𝟑𝟎𝟎𝟎[ 𝟏𝟎
1) 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏 𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍’é𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕­𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏
2) 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆. 𝑨𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒚𝒔𝒆𝒓

105 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
3) 𝑫é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒓 𝒆𝒕 𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒛

Corrigé
1)

∙ 𝑨𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 ∶ 𝒂𝒊
∙ 𝑵𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊é𝒔 ∶ 𝒏𝒊
∙ 𝑪𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝒄𝒊
𝒏𝒊 𝒄𝒊
∙ 𝑽𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝒒𝒊 =
∑ 𝒏𝒊 𝒄𝒊
𝒏𝒊
∙ 𝑭𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝒇𝒊 =
∑ 𝒏𝒊
∙ 𝑭𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑭𝒊
∙ 𝑽𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑸𝒊

𝑺𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒊 𝒏𝒊 𝒄𝒊 𝒏 𝒊 𝒄𝒊 𝒏𝒊 𝒄𝟐𝒊 𝒒𝒊 𝒇𝒊 𝑭𝒊 𝑸𝒊
[𝟎­𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎[ 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟎 𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝟎 𝟎 𝟎 𝟎 𝟎 𝟎
[𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎­𝟏𝟒𝟎𝟎[ 𝟒𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟐𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟒𝟒𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟎, 𝟐𝟔 𝟎, 𝟑𝟑 𝟎, 𝟑𝟑 𝟎, 𝟐𝟔
[𝟏𝟒𝟎𝟎­𝟏𝟖𝟎𝟎[ 𝟒𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟓𝟎 𝟏𝟔𝟎𝟎 𝟐𝟒𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟑𝟖𝟒𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟎, 𝟓𝟐 𝟎, 𝟓𝟎 𝟎, 𝟖𝟑 𝟎, 𝟕𝟕
[𝟏𝟖𝟎𝟎­𝟐𝟐𝟎𝟎[ 𝟒𝟎𝟎 𝟒𝟎 𝟐𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟖𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟔𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟎, 𝟏𝟕 𝟎, 𝟏𝟑 𝟎, 𝟗𝟕 𝟎, 𝟗𝟒
[𝟐𝟐𝟎𝟎­𝟑𝟎𝟎𝟎[ 𝟖𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟎 𝟐𝟔𝟎𝟎 𝟐𝟔𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟔𝟕𝟔𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟎, 𝟎𝟔 𝟎, 𝟎𝟑 𝟏 𝟏
∑ 𝟑𝟎𝟎 𝟒𝟔𝟔𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟕𝟓𝟓𝟔𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟏 𝟏
𝑵
𝟏 𝟒𝟔𝟔𝟎𝟎𝟎
̅ = ∑ 𝒏𝒊 𝒄𝒊 =
∙ 𝑳𝒆 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏 ∶ 𝑿 ̅ = 𝟏𝟓𝟓𝟑, 𝟑𝟑
⇒ 𝑿
𝒏 𝟑𝟎𝟎
𝒊=𝟏

𝒏
𝟏 𝟕𝟓𝟓𝟔𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎
̅𝟐 =
∙ 𝑺𝟐𝑿 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊 𝒄𝟐𝒊 − 𝑿 − (𝟏𝟓𝟓𝟑, 𝟑𝟑)𝟐 ⇒ 𝑺𝟐𝑿 = 𝟏𝟎𝟓𝟖𝟑𝟐, 𝟓𝟖 ⇒ 𝑺𝑿 = 𝟑𝟐𝟓, 𝟑𝟐
𝒏 𝟑𝟎𝟎
𝒊=𝟏

2)

∙ 𝑸𝟐 ≤ 𝟎, 𝟓 𝒆𝒕 𝑸𝟑 > 𝟎, 𝟓 , 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝑸𝟐 = 𝟎, 𝟐𝟔 𝒆𝒕 𝑸𝟑 = 𝟎, 𝟕𝟕

𝟎, 𝟓 − 𝑸𝟐
𝑴𝒍𝒆 = 𝒆𝟑 + 𝒂𝟑 ( ) 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒆𝟑 = 𝟏𝟒𝟎𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝒂𝟑 = 𝟒𝟎𝟎
𝑸𝟑 − 𝑸𝟐

𝟎, 𝟓 − 𝟎, 𝟐𝟔 𝟎, 𝟐𝟒
𝑴𝒍𝒆 = 𝟏𝟒𝟎𝟎 + [( ) × 𝟒𝟎𝟎] = 𝟏𝟒𝟎𝟎 + [( ) × 𝟒𝟎𝟎] = 𝟏𝟒𝟎𝟎 + 𝟏𝟖𝟖 ⇒ 𝑴𝒍𝒆 = 𝟏𝟓𝟖𝟖
𝟎, 𝟕𝟕 − 𝟎, 𝟐𝟔 𝟎, 𝟓𝟏

𝑳𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝟓𝟎% 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒗𝒆𝒓𝒔é𝒆 𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊é𝒔 𝒈𝒂𝒈𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕

𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝟏𝟓𝟖𝟖

∙ 𝑭𝟐 ≤ 𝟎, 𝟓 𝒆𝒕 𝑭𝟑 > 𝟎, 𝟓 , 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝑭𝟐 = 𝟎, 𝟑𝟑 𝒆𝒕 𝑭𝟑 = 𝟎, 𝟖𝟑

𝟎, 𝟓 − 𝑭𝟐
𝑴𝒆 = 𝒆𝟑 + 𝒂𝟑 ( ) 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒆𝟑 = 𝟏𝟒𝟎𝟎, (𝑭(𝟏𝟒𝟎𝟎) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝟏𝟒𝟎𝟎) = 𝑭𝟐 = 𝟎, 𝟐𝟔)𝒆𝒕 𝒂𝟑 = 𝟒𝟎𝟎
𝑭𝟑 − 𝑭𝟐

𝟎, 𝟓 − 𝟎, 𝟑𝟑 𝟎, 𝟏𝟕
𝑴𝒆 = 𝟏𝟒𝟎𝟎 + [( ) × 𝟒𝟎𝟎] = 𝟏𝟒𝟎𝟎 + [( ) × 𝟒𝟎𝟎] = 𝟏𝟒𝟎𝟎 + 𝟏𝟑𝟔 ⇒ 𝑴𝒆 = 𝟏𝟓𝟑𝟔
𝟎, 𝟖𝟑 − 𝟎, 𝟑𝟑 𝟎, 𝟓

106 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝑳𝒆 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏 𝒔𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒊𝒇𝒊𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝟓𝟎% 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊é𝒔 𝒈𝒂𝒈𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝟏𝟓𝟑𝟔

𝑨𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊, 𝟓𝟎% 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊é𝒔 𝒈𝒂𝒈𝒏𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝟓𝟎% 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒔𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒍𝒆 (𝑴𝒍𝒆 ≥ 𝑴𝒆 )

3) 𝑳𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒛, 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒆𝒓 𝒊𝒍 𝒇𝒂𝒖𝒕 𝒎𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒏 𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒄𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆

𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆 (𝑭𝒊 ) 𝒆𝒕 𝒆𝒏 𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔(𝑸𝒊 ).

𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒔𝒒𝒖’𝒐𝒏 𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆, 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒅’𝒊𝒏𝒕é𝒓ê𝒕 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊è𝒓𝒆

𝒃𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒛. 𝑨𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒍’𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆,

𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒊𝒍 𝒚 𝒂 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔 (𝒐𝒖 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆)

𝑸𝒊 Courbe de Lorenz
100%

90%

80%

70%

60%

50%

40%

30%

20%

10%

0% 𝑭𝒊
10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%
0%

Exercice 7 (4 points =0,5+0,5+0,5+2+0,5) :

ÉNONCÉ
𝑳𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒇𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒏𝒊𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒓é𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒅’â𝒈𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒈𝒓𝒊𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔
𝒆𝒙𝒆𝒓ç𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒂𝒈𝒓𝒊𝒄𝒐𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒓é𝒈𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆.
𝑴𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝟐𝟓 𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒆 𝟐𝟓 à 𝟐𝟗 𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝑫𝒆 𝟑𝟎 à 𝟑𝟗 𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝑫𝒆 𝟒𝟎 à 𝟒𝟗 𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝑫𝒆 𝟓𝟎 à 𝟓𝟗 𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝑨𝒖 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒔 𝟔𝟎 𝒂𝒏𝒔
𝟓𝟖𝟎 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝟐𝟏𝟔𝟐 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝟖𝟎𝟔𝟑 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝟗𝟓𝟔𝟗 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝟏𝟎𝟔𝟔𝟎 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝟏𝟓𝟗𝟏𝟑 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔

1) 𝑫é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 é𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒊é𝒆, 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖, 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕è𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é.

2) É𝒍𝒂𝒃𝒐𝒓𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆 ∶ 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆, 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔,
𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆. 𝑶𝒏 𝒓𝒆𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒂 𝟐𝟎 𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝟕𝟎 𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒆 â𝒈𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒎𝒂𝒍𝒆
𝒆𝒕 𝒎𝒂𝒙𝒊𝒎𝒂𝒍𝒆.

107 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
3) 𝑸𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒈𝒓𝒊𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒐𝒏𝒕 ∶ 𝒂𝒖 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒔 𝟒𝟎 𝒂𝒏𝒔 ?
𝑴𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝟑𝟎 𝒂𝒏𝒔 ? 𝑬𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝟐𝟓 𝒆𝒕 𝟔𝟎 𝒂𝒏𝒔 ?
4) 𝑻𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒖𝒊𝒔
𝒅é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 (𝑴𝒆)𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝑸𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝑸𝟑 . 𝑫𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒆
𝒆𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅é𝒄𝒊𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝑫𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝑫𝟗 . 𝑷𝒍𝒂𝒄𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆.
5) 𝑸𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒈𝒓𝒊𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝟑𝟓 𝒆𝒕 𝟔𝟓 𝒂𝒏𝒔 (𝒅é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏
𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆) ?
Corrigé
1)
∙ 𝑷𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒂𝒈𝒓𝒊𝒄𝒐𝒍𝒆𝒔
∙ 𝑰𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖 ∶ 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏
∙ 𝑪𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕è𝒓𝒆 ∶ â𝒈𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍’𝒂𝒈𝒓𝒊𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓
∙ 𝑴𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é ∶ 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅’â𝒈𝒆
2)
𝑪𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝑨𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝑬𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝑭𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝑭𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝑭𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔
𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔
[𝟐𝟎, 𝟐𝟓[ 𝟓 𝟓𝟖𝟎 𝟏, 𝟐% 𝟏, 𝟐% 𝟏𝟎𝟎%
[𝟐𝟓, 𝟑𝟎[ 𝟓 𝟐𝟏𝟔𝟐 𝟒, 𝟔% 𝟓, 𝟖% 𝟗𝟖, 𝟖%
[𝟑𝟎, 𝟒𝟎[ 𝟏𝟎 𝟖𝟎𝟔𝟑 𝟏𝟕, 𝟐% 𝟐𝟑, 𝟎% 𝟗𝟒, 𝟐%
[𝟒𝟎, 𝟓𝟎[ 𝟏𝟎 𝟗𝟓𝟔𝟗 𝟐𝟎, 𝟒% 𝟒𝟑, 𝟒% 𝟕𝟕%
[𝟓𝟎, 𝟔𝟎[ 𝟏𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟔𝟔𝟎 𝟐𝟐, 𝟕% 𝟔𝟔, 𝟏% 𝟓𝟔, 𝟔%
[𝟔𝟎, 𝟕𝟎[ 𝟏𝟎 𝟏𝟓𝟗𝟏𝟑 𝟑𝟑, 𝟗% 𝟏𝟎𝟎% 𝟑𝟑, 𝟗%
∑ 𝟒𝟔𝟗𝟒𝟕 𝟏𝟎𝟎%
3)
∙ 𝑷(𝑿 ≥ 𝟒𝟎) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎% − 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝟒𝟎) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎% − 𝟐𝟑, 𝟎% = 𝟕𝟕%
𝟕𝟕% 𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒖 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒔 𝟒𝟎 𝒂𝒏𝒔
∙ 𝑷(𝑿 < 𝟑𝟎) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝟑𝟎) = 𝟓, 𝟖%
𝟓, 𝟖% 𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝟑𝟎 𝒂𝒏𝒔
∙ 𝑷(𝑿 < 𝟔𝟎) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝟔𝟎) = 𝟔𝟔, 𝟏%
𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝟔𝟎 𝒂𝒏𝒔 ∶ 𝟔𝟔, 𝟏%
∙ 𝑷(𝑿 < 𝟐𝟓) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝟐𝟓) = 𝟏, 𝟐%
𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝟐𝟓 𝒂𝒏𝒔 ∶ 𝟏, 𝟐%
∙ 𝑷(𝟐𝟓 ≤ 𝑿 ≤ 𝟔𝟎) = 𝑭(𝟔𝟎) − 𝑭(𝟐𝟓) = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝟔𝟎) − 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝟐𝟓) = 𝟔𝟔, 𝟏% – 𝟏, 𝟐% = 𝟔𝟒, 𝟗%
𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝟐𝟓 𝒆𝒕 𝟔𝟎 𝒂𝒏𝒔 ∶ 𝟔𝟒, 𝟗%
4)
∙ 𝑭𝟒 ≤ 𝟓𝟎% 𝒆𝒕 𝑭𝟓 > 𝟓𝟎% , 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝑭𝟒 = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝟓𝟎) = 𝟒𝟑, 𝟒% 𝒆𝒕 𝑭𝟓 = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝟔𝟎) = 𝟔𝟔, 𝟏%

⇒ 𝑴𝒆 ∈ [𝟓𝟎, 𝟔𝟎[

𝟓𝟎% − 𝑭𝟒
𝑴𝒆 = 𝒆𝟓 + 𝒂𝟓 ( ) 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒆𝟓 = 𝟓𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝒂𝟓 = 𝟏𝟎
𝑭𝟓 − 𝑭𝟒

𝟓𝟎% − 𝟒𝟑, 𝟒%
𝑴𝒆 = 𝟓𝟎 + (𝟏𝟎 × ( )) ⇒ 𝑴𝒆 = 𝟓𝟐, 𝟗 𝒂𝒏𝒔 ≈ 𝟓𝟑 𝒂𝒏𝒔
𝟔𝟔, 𝟏% − 𝟒𝟑, 𝟒%
∙ 𝑭𝟑 ≤ 𝟐𝟓% 𝒆𝒕 𝑭𝟒 > 𝟐𝟓% , 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝑭𝟑 = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝟒𝟎) = 𝟐𝟑% 𝒆𝒕 𝑭𝟒 = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝟓𝟎) = 𝟒𝟑, 𝟒%

⇒ 𝑸𝟏 ∈ [𝟒𝟎, 𝟓𝟎[

𝟐𝟓% − 𝑭𝟑
𝑸𝟏 = 𝒆𝟒 + 𝒂𝟒 ( ) 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒆𝟒 = 𝟒𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝒂𝟒 = 𝟏𝟎
𝑭𝟒 − 𝑭𝟑

108 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝟐𝟓% − 𝟐𝟑%
𝑸𝟏 = 𝟒𝟎 + (𝟏𝟎 × ( )) ⇒ 𝑸𝟏 = 𝟒𝟎, 𝟗𝟖 𝒂𝒏𝒔 ≈ 𝟒𝟏 𝒂𝒏𝒔
𝟒𝟑, 𝟒% − 𝟐𝟑%
∙ 𝑭𝟓 ≤ 𝟕𝟓% 𝒆𝒕 𝑭𝟔 > 𝟕𝟓% , 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝑭𝟓 = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝟔𝟎) = 𝟔𝟔, 𝟏% 𝒆𝒕 𝑭𝟔 = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝟕𝟎) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎%

⇒ 𝑸𝟑 ∈ [𝟔𝟎, 𝟕𝟎[

𝟕𝟓% − 𝑭𝟓
𝑸𝟑 = 𝒆𝟒 + 𝒂𝟒 ( ) 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒆𝟔 = 𝟔𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝒂𝟔 = 𝟏𝟎
𝑭𝟔 − 𝑭𝟓

𝟕𝟓% − 𝟔𝟔, 𝟏%
𝑸𝟑 = 𝟔𝟎 + (𝟏𝟎 × ( )) ⇒ 𝑸𝟑 = 𝟔𝟐, 𝟔𝟑 𝒂𝒏𝒔 ≈ 𝟔𝟑 𝒂𝒏𝒔
𝟏𝟎𝟎% − 𝟔𝟔, 𝟏%
∙ 𝑫é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑫𝟏 : 𝒍𝒆 𝟏𝒆𝒓 𝒅é𝒄𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝑫𝟏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍’𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒄𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔

𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝟎, 𝟏 𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝒍’𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒄𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒖

𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝟎, 𝟗.

𝑫𝟏 = 𝟑𝟐, 𝟓 𝒂𝒏𝒔

∙ 𝑫é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑫𝟗 : 𝒍𝒆 𝟗è𝒎𝒆 𝒅é𝒄𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝑫𝟗 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍’𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒄𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔

𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝟎, 𝟗 𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝒍’𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒄𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒖

𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝟎, 𝟏

𝑫𝟗 = 𝟔𝟕, 𝟓 𝒂𝒏𝒔

𝑪𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔

Courbes cumulatives
𝑪𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒖𝒎𝒖𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔
100%

90%

𝟖𝟐%
80%

70%

60%

50%

40%

30%

20%

𝟏𝟐%
10%

0%
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75

𝑫𝟏 𝑸𝟏 𝑴𝒆 𝑸𝟑 𝑫𝟗

5) 𝑮𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒅é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶

∙ 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝟔𝟓 𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝟖𝟐% 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝟔𝟓) = 𝑭(𝟔𝟓) = 𝟖𝟐%

∙ 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝟑𝟓 𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝟏𝟐% 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝟑𝟓) = 𝑭(𝟑𝟓) = 𝟏𝟐%

109 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
∙ 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝟑𝟓 𝒆𝒕 𝟔𝟒 𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝟔𝟎% 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏:

𝑷(𝟑𝟓 ≤ 𝑿 ≤ 𝟔𝟓) = 𝑭(𝟔𝟑𝟓) − 𝑭(𝟑𝟓) = 𝟔𝟎%

Exercice 8
ÉNONCÉ
𝑳𝒂 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒊è𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒏𝒐𝒏­𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒋𝒐𝒖𝒓, 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒆
𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 ∶
𝟏𝟐𝟐­𝟏𝟏𝟏­𝟏𝟓𝟒­𝟗𝟖­𝟗𝟑­𝟔𝟕­𝟏𝟑𝟒­𝟏𝟔𝟕­𝟏𝟐𝟑­𝟏𝟒𝟐­𝟏𝟑𝟐­𝟏𝟓𝟏­𝟏𝟐𝟕­𝟏𝟏𝟗­𝟏𝟑𝟕­𝟏𝟑𝟎­𝟏𝟐𝟕­𝟏𝟑𝟓­𝟏𝟖𝟕
𝟏𝟔𝟓­𝟏𝟔𝟏­𝟏𝟓𝟏­𝟏𝟒𝟑­𝟏𝟒𝟖­𝟏𝟑𝟐­𝟏𝟐𝟕­𝟗𝟗­𝟏𝟑𝟐­𝟏𝟑𝟗­𝟏𝟎𝟎­𝟏𝟑𝟔­𝟏𝟑𝟐­𝟏𝟐𝟕­𝟏𝟔𝟕­𝟏𝟏𝟖­𝟏𝟏𝟔­𝟖𝟑­𝟕𝟕.
1) 𝑪𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒓 𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒂𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆.
2) 𝑻𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒍 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕é𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒍.
3) 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒅é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒆.
4) 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆, 𝒈é𝒐𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆, 𝒉𝒂𝒓𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆, 𝒆𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒅𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆.
5) É𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒍’𝒂𝒔𝒚𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆.
6) 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏.
Corrigé
1) 𝑹𝒂𝒏𝒈𝒆𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕 ∶ 𝟔𝟕­𝟕𝟕­𝟖𝟑­𝟗𝟑­𝟗𝟖­𝟗𝟗­𝟏𝟎𝟎­𝟏𝟏𝟏­𝟏𝟏𝟔­𝟏𝟏𝟖­𝟏𝟏𝟗­
𝟏𝟐𝟐­𝟏𝟐𝟑­𝟏𝟐𝟕­𝟏𝟐𝟕­𝟏𝟐𝟕­𝟏𝟐𝟕­𝟏𝟑𝟎­𝟏𝟑𝟐𝟏𝟑𝟐­𝟏𝟑𝟐­𝟏𝟑𝟐­𝟏𝟑𝟒­𝟏𝟑𝟓­𝟏𝟑𝟔­𝟏𝟑𝟕­𝟏𝟑𝟗­𝟏𝟒𝟐­𝟏𝟒𝟑­𝟏𝟒𝟖­𝟏𝟓𝟏­𝟏𝟓𝟏­𝟏𝟓𝟒­𝟏𝟔𝟏­𝟏𝟔𝟓­𝟏𝟔𝟕­

𝟏𝟔𝟕­𝟏𝟖𝟕

𝑼𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒓è𝒈𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑺𝒕𝒖𝒓𝒈𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒅é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝟏𝟎 𝟏𝟎
𝒖=𝟏+ 𝒍𝒐𝒈𝟏𝟎 (𝒏) = 𝟏 + 𝒍𝒐𝒈𝟏𝟎 (𝟑𝟖) ≅ 𝟔, 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒂 ∶ 𝒓 = 𝟔
𝟑 𝟑
𝑫’𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕 𝒍’é𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑬 = 𝒙𝒎𝒂𝒙 − 𝒙𝒎𝒊𝒏 = 𝟏𝟕𝟖 − 𝟔𝟕 = 𝟏𝟐𝟎

𝑬 𝟏𝟐𝟎
𝑷𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒍’𝒂𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒂 ∶ 𝒉 = = = 𝟐𝟎 ⇒ 𝒂 = 𝟐𝟎( 𝒍’𝒂𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 )
𝒓 𝟔
𝑫’𝒐ù 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒆 𝒅’𝒖𝒏 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶
̅ )𝟑

̅ )𝟒
[𝒆𝒊 , 𝒆𝒊+𝟏 [

𝒇𝒊 𝐥𝐧(𝒄𝒊 )

𝒇𝒊 (𝒄𝒊 − 𝑿

𝒇𝒊 (𝒄𝒊 − 𝑿
𝒄𝒊 − 𝑿
̅
𝒇 𝒊 𝒄𝒊

𝒇𝒊 𝒄𝟐𝒊
𝒏𝒊
𝒂𝒊

𝑭𝒊
𝒇𝒊
𝒄𝒊

𝒇𝒊
𝒄𝒊

[𝟔𝟕, 𝟖𝟕[ 𝟐𝟎 𝟕𝟕 𝟑 𝟕, 𝟖𝟗% 𝟕, 𝟖𝟗% 𝟔, 𝟎𝟕𝟓𝟑 𝟒𝟔𝟕, 𝟕𝟗𝟖𝟏 𝟏𝟎, 𝟐𝟒𝟔𝟖. 𝟏𝟎−𝟒 𝟑𝟒, 𝟐𝟕𝟐𝟔. 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 −𝟓𝟒, 𝟐𝟏 −𝟏𝟐𝟓𝟔𝟗 , 𝟕𝟗 𝟏𝟎𝟗𝟒𝟔, 𝟎𝟓
[𝟖𝟕, 𝟏𝟎𝟕[ 𝟐𝟎 𝟗𝟕 𝟒 𝟏𝟎, 𝟓𝟑% 𝟏𝟖, 𝟒𝟐% 𝟏𝟎, 𝟐𝟏𝟒𝟏 𝟗𝟗𝟎, 𝟕𝟔𝟕𝟕 𝟏𝟎, 𝟖𝟓𝟓𝟕. 𝟏𝟎−𝟒 𝟒𝟖, 𝟏𝟕𝟏𝟕. 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 −𝟑𝟒, 𝟐𝟏 −𝟒𝟐𝟏𝟔, 𝟎𝟕 𝟏𝟒𝟒𝟐𝟑𝟑, 𝟗𝟐
[𝟏𝟎𝟕, 𝟏𝟐𝟕[ 𝟐𝟎 𝟏𝟏𝟕 𝟔 𝟏𝟓, 𝟕𝟗% 𝟑𝟒, 𝟐𝟏% 𝟏𝟖, 𝟒𝟕𝟒𝟑 𝟐𝟏𝟔𝟏, 𝟒𝟗𝟑𝟏 𝟏𝟑, 𝟒𝟗𝟓𝟕. 𝟏𝟎−𝟒 𝟕𝟓, 𝟏𝟗𝟒𝟕. 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 −𝟏𝟒, 𝟐𝟏 −𝟒𝟓𝟑, 𝟏𝟐 𝟔𝟒𝟑𝟗, 𝟎𝟔
[𝟏𝟐𝟕, 𝟏𝟒𝟕[ 𝟐𝟎 𝟏𝟑𝟕 𝟏𝟔 𝟒𝟐, 𝟏𝟏% 𝟕𝟔, 𝟑𝟐% 𝟓𝟕, 𝟔𝟗𝟎𝟕 𝟕𝟗𝟎𝟑, 𝟔𝟐𝟓𝟗 𝟑𝟎, 𝟕𝟑𝟕𝟐. 𝟏𝟎−𝟒 𝟐𝟎𝟕, 𝟏𝟖𝟎𝟒. 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 𝟓, 𝟕𝟗 𝟖𝟏, 𝟕𝟐 𝟒𝟕𝟑, 𝟎𝟗
[𝟏𝟒𝟕, 𝟏𝟔𝟕[ 𝟐𝟎 𝟏𝟓𝟕 𝟔 𝟏𝟓, 𝟕𝟗% 𝟗𝟐, 𝟏𝟏% 𝟐𝟒, 𝟕𝟗𝟎𝟑 𝟑𝟖𝟗𝟐, 𝟎𝟕𝟕𝟏 𝟏𝟎, 𝟎𝟓𝟕𝟑. 𝟏𝟎−𝟒 𝟕𝟗, 𝟖𝟑𝟖𝟏. 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 𝟐𝟓, 𝟕𝟗 𝟐𝟕𝟎𝟖, 𝟑𝟖 𝟔𝟗𝟖𝟒𝟕, 𝟔𝟗
[𝟏𝟔𝟕, 𝟏𝟖𝟕[ 𝟐𝟎 𝟏𝟕𝟕 𝟑 𝟕, 𝟖𝟗% 𝟏𝟎𝟎% 𝟏𝟑, 𝟗𝟔𝟓𝟑 𝟐𝟒𝟕𝟏, 𝟖𝟓𝟖𝟏 𝟒, 𝟒𝟓𝟕𝟔. 𝟏𝟎−𝟒 𝟒𝟎, 𝟖𝟑𝟗𝟖. 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 𝟒𝟓, 𝟕𝟗 𝟕𝟓𝟕𝟒, 𝟖𝟓 𝟑𝟒𝟔𝟖𝟒𝟖, 𝟑𝟑
∑ 𝟑𝟖 𝟏𝟎𝟎% 𝟏𝟑𝟏, 𝟐𝟏 𝟏𝟕𝟖𝟖𝟕, 𝟔𝟐 𝟕𝟗, 𝟖𝟓𝟎𝟑𝟎. 𝟏𝟎−𝟒 𝟒𝟖𝟓, 𝟒𝟗𝟕𝟑. 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 −𝟔𝟖𝟕𝟒, 𝟎𝟑 𝟓𝟕𝟖𝟕𝟖𝟖, 𝟏𝟒
2)

110 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
Histogramme Diagramme intégral
100%
42,11%
90%
40% 80%
35% 70%
30% 60%
25% 50%
20% 15,79% 15,79% 40%
15% 10,53% 30%
7,89% 7,89% 20%
10%
5% 10%
[67,87[ [87,107[ [107,127[ [127,147[ [147,167[ [167,187[ 0%
47 57 67 77 87 97 107 117 127 137 147 157 167 177 187 197 207

∙ 𝑭𝟑 ≤ 𝟓𝟎% 𝒆𝒕 𝑭𝟒 > 𝟓𝟎% , 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝑭𝟑 = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝟏𝟐𝟕) = 𝟑𝟒, 𝟐𝟏% 𝒆𝒕 𝑭𝟒 = 𝑷(𝑿 ≤ 𝟏𝟒𝟕) = 𝟕𝟔, 𝟑𝟐%

⇒ 𝑴𝒆 ∈ [𝟏𝟐𝟕, 𝟏𝟒𝟕[

𝟓𝟎% − 𝑭𝟑
𝑴𝒆 = 𝒆𝟒 + 𝒂𝟒 ( ) 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒆𝟒 = 𝟏𝟐𝟕 𝒆𝒕 𝒂𝟒 = 𝟐𝟎
𝑭𝟒 − 𝑭𝟑

𝟓𝟎% − 𝟑𝟒, 𝟐𝟏%

𝑴𝒆 = 𝟏𝟐𝟕 + (𝟐𝟎 × ( )) ⇒ 𝑴𝒆 = 𝟏𝟑𝟒, 𝟓
𝟕𝟔, 𝟑𝟐% − 𝟑𝟒, 𝟐𝟏%
∙ [𝒆𝒎 , 𝒆𝒎+𝟏 [ = [𝟏𝟐𝟕, 𝟏𝟒𝟕[ é𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒅′ 𝒂𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆𝒂𝒎 = 𝟐𝟎 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒔é𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒍’𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇

𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 é𝒍𝒆𝒗é 𝒏𝒎 = 𝟏𝟔, [𝒆𝒎−𝟏 , 𝒆𝒎 [ = [𝟏𝟎𝟕, 𝟏𝟐𝟕[ 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓é𝒄è𝒅𝒆 𝒅′ 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒏𝒎−𝟏 = 𝟔,

[𝒆𝒎−𝟏 , 𝒆𝒎 [ = [𝟏𝟒𝟕, 𝟏𝟔𝟕[ 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒖𝒄𝒄è𝒅𝒆 𝒅′ 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒏𝒎+𝟏 = 𝟔

𝒏𝒎 − 𝒏𝒎−𝟏 𝟏𝟔 − 𝟔
𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊 ∶ 𝑴𝒐 = 𝒆𝒎 + 𝒂𝒎 [ ] = 𝟏𝟐𝟕 + (𝟐𝟎 × ( ))
(𝒏𝒎 − 𝒏𝒎−𝟏 ) + (𝒏𝒎 − 𝒏𝒎+𝟏 ) (𝟏𝟔 − 𝟔) + (𝟏𝟔 − 𝟔)

⇒ 𝑴𝒐 = 𝟏𝟑𝟕

4)
𝟔
̅=∑
∙ 𝑴𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑿 ̅ = 𝟏𝟑𝟏, 𝟐𝟏
𝒇𝒊 𝒄𝒊 ⇒ 𝑿
𝒊=𝟏

𝟏
𝟑𝟖 𝟔 𝟔 𝟑𝟖 𝟔 𝟔
̅ = √∏
∙ 𝑴𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒈é𝒐𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑮 𝒄𝒊 𝒏𝒊 = [∏ 𝒄𝒊 𝒏𝒊 ] =∏ 𝒄𝒊 𝒇𝒊 = 𝐞𝐱𝐩 [∑ 𝒇𝒊 𝐥𝐧(𝒄𝒊 )],
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝟔
̅) = ∑
𝒄𝒂𝒓 𝐥𝐧(𝑮 ̅ = 𝒆𝟒𝟖𝟓,𝟒𝟗𝟕𝟑.𝟏𝟎−𝟐 ⇒ 𝑮
𝒇𝒊 𝐥𝐧(𝒄𝒊 ) = 𝟒𝟖𝟓, 𝟒𝟗𝟕𝟑. 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 ⇒ 𝑮 ̅ = 𝟏𝟐𝟖, 𝟑𝟖
𝒊=𝟏

𝟔
̅ = √∑
∙ 𝑴𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒅𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑸 ̅ = 𝟏𝟑𝟑, 𝟕𝟒
𝒇𝒊 𝒄𝟐𝒊 = √𝟏𝟕𝟖𝟖𝟕, 𝟔𝟐 ⇒ 𝑸
𝒊=𝟏

𝒓 −𝟏
𝟏 𝟔 𝒇 𝒇 𝟏
𝒊
∙ 𝑴𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒉𝒂𝒓𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ =∑ ̅ = [∑ 𝒊 ]
= 𝟕𝟗, 𝟖𝟓𝟎𝟑𝟎. 𝟏𝟎−𝟒 ⇒ 𝑯 =
̅
𝑯 𝒊=𝟏 𝒄𝒊 𝒄𝒊 𝟕𝟗, 𝟖𝟓𝟎𝟑𝟎. 𝟏𝟎−𝟒
𝒊=𝟏

̅ = 𝟏𝟐𝟓, 𝟐𝟑
⇒ 𝑯

111 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝑳𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒂 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒋𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒗é𝒓𝒊𝒇𝒊é𝒆 ∶ ̅ ≤ 𝑮
𝑯
⏟ ̅ ≤ 𝑿
⏟ ̅ ≤ 𝑸
⏟ ̅
⏟
𝟏𝟐𝟓,𝟐𝟑 𝟏𝟐𝟖,𝟑𝟖 𝟏𝟑𝟏,𝟐𝟏 𝟏𝟑𝟑,𝟕𝟒

5)

 É𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍’𝒂𝒔𝒚𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒆 ∶

𝝁
̅𝟑 ̅ )𝟑
∑𝟔𝒊=𝟏 𝒇𝒊 (𝒄𝒊 − 𝑿
𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒚𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑭𝒊𝒔𝒉𝒆𝒓 ∶ 𝜸𝟏 = 𝟑 = 𝟑
𝑺𝒙
(√∑𝟔𝒊=𝟏 𝒇𝒊 (𝒄𝒊 ̅ )𝟐 )
−𝑿

𝟔 𝟔

𝒐𝒓 , 𝑺𝟐𝒙 ̅ )𝟐
= ∑ 𝒇𝒊 (𝒄𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ 𝟐 = 𝟏𝟕𝟖𝟖𝟕, 𝟔𝟐 − 𝟏𝟑𝟏, 𝟐𝟏𝟐 = 𝟔𝟕𝟏, 𝟓𝟔 ⇒ 𝑺𝒙 = 𝟐𝟓, 𝟗𝟏
= ∑ 𝒇𝒊 𝒄𝟐𝒊 − 𝑿
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

−𝟔𝟖𝟕𝟒, 𝟎𝟑
𝜸𝟏 = = −𝟎, 𝟑𝟗𝟓 < 𝟎 . 𝑬𝒏 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒚𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 é𝒕𝒂𝒍é𝒆 à 𝒈𝒂𝒖𝒄𝒉𝒆
𝟐𝟓, 𝟗𝟏𝟑

 É𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍’𝒂𝒑𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 ∶

𝝁
̅𝟒 ̅ )𝟒
∑𝟔𝒊=𝟏 𝒇𝒊 (𝒄𝒊 − 𝑿 𝟓𝟕𝟖𝟕𝟖𝟖, 𝟏𝟒
𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝑭𝒊𝒔𝒉𝒆𝒓 ∶ 𝜸𝟐 = 𝟒
− 𝟑 = 𝟐 −𝟑= −𝟑
𝑺𝒙 ̅ )𝟐 )
(∑𝟔𝒊=𝟏 𝒇𝒊 (𝒄𝒊 − 𝑿 𝟔𝟕𝟏, 𝟓𝟔𝟐

𝜸𝟐 = −𝟏, 𝟕𝟏𝟕 < 0. 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒂𝒑𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝑵𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒂𝒍𝒆 (𝒑𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒚𝒌𝒖𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆)

6)

𝑺𝒙 𝟐𝟓, 𝟗𝟏
𝑪𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝑪𝑽 = × 𝟏𝟎𝟎 = × 𝟏𝟎𝟎 ⇒ 𝑪𝑽 = 𝟏𝟗, 𝟕𝟓%
̅
𝑿 𝟏𝟑𝟏, 𝟐𝟏

112 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014

𝓐– 𝟏 • 𝑻𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝑺𝒐𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕è𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝒀 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅’𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍 𝒏.

𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒍𝒆𝒔 (𝒙𝒊 , 𝒚𝒊 )𝟏≤𝒊≤𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 à 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔.

(𝑶𝒏 𝒅𝒊𝒕 𝒂𝒖𝒔𝒔𝒊 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔. )

𝑰𝒍 𝒔’𝒂𝒈𝒊𝒕 𝒅’𝒖𝒏 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 à 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 (𝒐𝒖 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔 𝒍𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒆𝒔) 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒆 ∶

𝑶𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒐 𝑽𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 𝑽𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒀

𝟏 𝒙𝟏 𝒚𝟏
𝟐 𝒙𝟐 𝒚𝟐
⋮ ⋮ ⋮
𝒊 𝒙𝒊 𝒚𝒊
⋮ ⋮ ⋮
𝒏 𝒙𝒏 𝒚𝒏
𝓐– 𝟐 • 𝑻𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 à 𝒅𝒐𝒖𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓é𝒆 (𝒐𝒖 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒈𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆) ∶

𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒔𝒒𝒖’𝒖𝒏 𝒄𝒆𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅’𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒊𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔, 𝒊𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒓é𝒇é𝒓𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓

𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒖𝒏 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 à 𝒅𝒐𝒖𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓é𝒆. 𝑶𝒏 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 (𝒓) 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 𝒆𝒏

𝒍𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 (𝒔) 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒀 𝒆𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔.

À 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒊è𝒎𝒆 𝒍𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒋è𝒎𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆, 𝒐𝒏 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒆 𝒍’𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒏𝒊,𝒋 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕

à 𝒍’𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒋𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 = 𝒙𝒊 𝒆𝒕 𝒀 = 𝒚𝒋 .

 𝒍’𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒋𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒏𝒊,𝒋 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕 à 𝒍’𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒋𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 = 𝒙𝒊 𝒆𝒕 𝒀 = 𝒚𝒋

 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒋𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒇𝒊,𝒋 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕 à 𝒍’𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒋𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 = 𝒙𝒊 𝒆𝒕 𝒀 = 𝒚𝒋

 𝑨 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒊𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒆𝒔𝒄𝒓𝒊𝒑𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒔

𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝒀 “𝒔𝒆𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒔” (𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒈𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔). 𝑪’𝒆𝒔𝒕 à 𝒅𝒊𝒓𝒆 ∶ 𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒓𝒆𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒓

𝒍’𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒈𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕 à

𝒔 𝒔
𝒏𝒊⦁
 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝑿 = 𝒙𝒊 ∶ 𝒏𝒊⦁ = ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒈𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒇𝒊⦁ = ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋 =
𝒏
𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏

113 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒓 𝒓
𝒏⦁𝒋
 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒀 = 𝒚𝒋 ∶ 𝒏⦁𝒋 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒈𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒇⦁𝒋 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋 =
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝒓 𝒔 𝒔 𝒓 𝒓 𝒔 𝒔 𝒓
′
 𝒍 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍 𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒂: 𝒏 = 𝒏⦁⦁ = ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 = ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 , 𝒐𝒏 𝒂 𝒂𝒖𝒔𝒔𝒊: ∑ ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋 = ∑ ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋 = 𝟏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝑶𝒏 𝒔𝒚𝒏𝒕𝒉é𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒋𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒍𝒆 (𝑿, 𝒀)𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒖𝒏 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 à 𝒅𝒐𝒖𝒃𝒍𝒆

𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓é𝒆 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍é 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒈𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆

𝑫𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏
𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆
(𝑿|𝒀 = 𝒚𝟐 )

𝒀 𝒚𝟏 𝒚𝟐 … 𝒚𝒋 … 𝒚𝒔 𝑫𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏
𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒈𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑿
𝑿
𝒔
𝒏𝟏𝟏 𝒏𝟏𝟐 … 𝒏𝟏𝒋 … 𝒏𝟏𝒔
𝒏𝟏⦁ = ∑ 𝒏𝟏𝒋
𝒋=𝟏
𝒙𝟏 𝒔
𝒇𝟏𝟏 𝒇𝟏𝟐 … 𝒇𝟏𝒋 … 𝒇𝟏𝒔
𝒇𝟏⦁ = ∑ 𝒇𝟏𝒋
𝒋=𝟏
𝒔
𝒏𝟐𝟏 𝒏𝟐𝟐 … 𝒏𝟐𝒋 … 𝒏𝟐𝒔 𝑫𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏
𝒏𝟐⦁ = ∑ 𝒏𝟐𝒋
𝒋=𝟏
𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆
𝒙𝟐 𝒔 (𝒀|𝑿 = 𝒙𝟐 )
𝒇𝟐𝟏 𝒇𝟐𝟐 … 𝒇𝟐𝒋 … 𝒇𝟐𝒔
𝒇𝟐⦁ = ∑ 𝒇𝟐𝒋
𝒋=𝟏
⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮
𝒔
𝒏𝒊𝟏 𝒏𝒊𝟐 … 𝒏𝒊𝒋 … 𝒏𝒊𝒔
𝒏𝒊⦁ = ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋
𝒋=𝟏
𝒙𝒊 𝒔
𝒇𝒊𝟏 𝒇𝒊𝟐 … 𝒇𝒊𝒋 … 𝒇𝒊𝒔
𝒇𝒊⦁ = ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋
𝒋=𝟏
⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮
𝒔
𝒏𝒓𝟏 𝒏𝒓𝟐 … 𝒏𝒓𝒋 … 𝒏𝒓𝒔
𝒏𝒓⦁ = ∑ 𝒏𝒓𝒋
𝒋=𝟏
𝒙𝒓 𝒔
𝒇𝒓𝟏 𝒇𝒓𝟐 … 𝒇𝒓𝒋 … 𝒇𝒓𝒔
𝒇𝒓⦁ = ∑ 𝒇𝒓𝒋
𝒋=𝟏
𝒓 𝒓 𝒔
𝒏⦁𝟏 … 𝒏⦁𝒋 … 𝒏⦁𝒔
𝒓 𝒏⦁𝟐 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝟐 𝒓 𝒓 𝒏 = 𝒏⦁⦁ = ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋
= ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒔 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏
𝒔 𝒓
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏
= ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋
𝑫𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏
𝒓 𝒓 𝒔
𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒈𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒀 𝒇⦁𝟏
𝒓
… 𝒇⦁𝒋 … 𝒇⦁𝒔
𝒓
𝒇⦁𝟐 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝟐 𝒓 𝟏 = ∑ ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋
= ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒔 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏
𝒔 𝒓
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏
= ∑ ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋
𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝓐– 𝟑 • 𝑫𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝑳𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒏𝒄𝒊𝒑𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔

𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒅 𝒍’𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒂 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆.

 𝑨 𝒍𝒂 𝒍𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒆 "i" 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒈𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆, 𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒀 𝒔𝒂𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝑿 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒅 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒙𝒊 ; 𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒏𝒐𝒕é𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏

114 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆(𝒀|𝑿 = 𝒙𝒊 )

𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒇𝒊𝒋
 𝑳𝒂 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 (𝒀|𝑿 = 𝒙𝒊 ) 𝒆𝒔𝒕 ∶ 𝒇𝒋⁄𝒊 = 𝒇𝒊𝒋 = =
𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝒇𝒊⦁

 𝑰𝒍 𝒚 𝒂 𝒓 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 (𝒀|𝑿 = 𝒙𝒊 )

𝑫𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒇𝒋⁄𝒊
𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 (𝒀|𝑿 = 𝒙𝒊 )
𝒚𝟏 𝒏𝒊𝟏 𝒇𝟏⁄𝒊
𝒚𝟐 𝒏𝒊𝟐 𝒇𝟐⁄𝒊
⋮ ⋮ ⋮
𝒚𝒋 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒇𝒋⁄𝒊
⋮ ⋮ ⋮
𝒚𝒔 𝒏𝒊𝒔 𝒇𝒔⁄𝒊
∑ 𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝟏
 𝑨 𝒍𝒂 𝐜𝐨𝐥𝐨𝐧𝐧𝐞 "j" 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒈𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆, 𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝑿 𝒔𝒂𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒀 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒅 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒚𝒋 ; 𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒏𝒐𝒕é𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏

𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆(𝑿|𝒀 = 𝒚𝒋 )

𝒋 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒇𝒊𝒋
 𝑳𝒂 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 (𝑿|𝒀 = 𝒚𝒋 ) 𝒆𝒔𝒕 ∶ 𝒇𝒊⁄𝒋 = 𝒇𝒊 = =
𝒏⦁𝒋 𝒇⦁𝒋

 𝑰𝒍 𝒚 𝒂 𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 (𝑿|𝒀 = 𝒚𝒋 )

𝑫𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒇𝒊⁄𝒋

𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 (𝑿|𝒀 = 𝒚𝒋 )
𝒙𝟏 𝒏𝟏𝒋 𝒇𝟏𝒋
𝒙𝟐 𝒏𝟐𝒋 𝒇𝟐𝒋
⋮ ⋮ ⋮
𝒙𝒊 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒇𝒊𝒋
⋮ ⋮ ⋮
𝒙𝒓 𝒏𝒓𝒋 𝒇𝒓𝒋
∑ 𝒏⦁𝒋 𝟏
𝒏𝒊𝒋
 𝑹𝒆𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒒𝒖𝒆: 𝒇𝒊𝒋 = = 𝒇𝒊⦁ 𝒇𝒋⁄𝒊 = 𝒇⦁𝒋 𝒇𝒊⁄𝒋
𝒏

𝓐– 𝟒 • 𝑰𝒏𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶

𝑳𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕è𝒓𝒆 𝑿 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒖 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕è𝒓𝒆 𝒀, 𝒔𝒊 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔

𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒊𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔. 𝑬𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒈𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆
𝒅𝒆 𝑿. 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒓é𝒄𝒊𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒒𝒖𝒆 :
𝑿 𝒊𝒏𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒀 ⟺ 𝒀 𝒊𝒏𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑿
 𝑺𝒊 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝒀 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔, 𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒗𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 ∶
𝒇𝒊𝒋 𝒏𝒊⦁ × 𝒏⦁𝒋
𝒇𝒊⁄𝒋 = 𝒇𝒊⦁ ⟺ = 𝒇𝒊⦁ ⟺ 𝒇𝒊⦁ × 𝒇⦁𝒋 = 𝒇𝒊𝒋 ⟺ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 =
𝒇⦁𝒋 𝒏
𝓐– 𝟓 • 𝑽𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝓪 • 𝑫𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒈𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶

 𝑴𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔:

115 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒓 𝒓 𝒔 𝒔
𝟏 𝟏
𝑿̅ = ∑ 𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝒙𝒊 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊⦁ 𝒙𝒊 ̅ = ∑ 𝒏⦁𝒋 𝒚𝒋 = ∑ 𝒇⦁𝒋 𝒚𝒋
𝒀
𝒏 𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏

̅, 𝒀
 𝑳𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 (𝑿 ̅ )𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍é 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒗𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 à 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔

 𝑽𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔:
𝒓 𝒓 𝒓
𝟏
̅ )𝟐 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊⦁ (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
 𝑺𝟐𝒙 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊⦁ (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ )𝟐 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊⦁ 𝒙𝟐𝒊 − 𝑿
̅𝟐
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝒔 𝒔 𝒔
𝟏
̅ )𝟐 = ∑ 𝒇⦁𝒋 (𝒚𝒋 − 𝒀
 𝑺𝟐𝒚 = ∑ 𝒏⦁𝒋 (𝒚𝒋 − 𝒀 ̅ )𝟐 = ∑ 𝒇⦁𝒋 𝒚𝟐𝒋 − 𝒀
̅𝟐
𝒏
𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏

𝓫 • 𝑫𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶

 𝑴𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔:

 𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 (𝑿|𝒀 = 𝒚𝒋 ) 𝒆𝒕 𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆 ∶

𝒓 𝒓
𝟏
̅𝒋 =
𝑿 ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒙𝒊 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊⁄𝒋 𝒙𝒊
𝒏⦁𝒋
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

 𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 (𝒀|𝑿 = 𝒙𝒊 ) 𝒆𝒕 𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆 ∶

𝒔 𝒔
𝟏
̅𝒊 =
𝒀 ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒚𝒋 = ∑ 𝒇𝒋⁄𝒊 𝒚𝒋
𝒏𝒊⦁
𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏

 𝑽𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔:

 𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 (𝑿|𝒀 = 𝒚𝒋 ) 𝒆𝒕 𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆 ∶

𝒓 𝒓
𝟏
𝑺𝟐𝒋 = 𝑽𝒋 (𝑿|𝒀 = 𝒚𝒋 ) = 𝑽𝒋 (𝑿) = ̅ 𝒋 )𝟐 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊⁄𝒋 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ 𝒋 )𝟐
𝒏⦁𝒋
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

 𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 (𝒀|𝑿 = 𝒙𝒊 ) 𝒆𝒕 𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆 ∶

𝒔 𝒔
𝟏
𝑺𝟐𝒊 = 𝑽𝒊 (𝒀|𝑿 = 𝒙𝒊 ) = 𝑽𝒊 (𝒀) = ̅ 𝒊 )𝟐 = ∑ 𝒇𝒋⁄𝒊 (𝒚𝒋 − 𝒀
∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 (𝒚𝒋 − 𝒀 ̅ 𝒊 )𝟐
𝒏𝒊⦁
𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏

𝓬 • 𝑹𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕é𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒈𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶

 𝑹𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝑳𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒈𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔, 𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅é𝒓é𝒆𝒔

𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒈𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒖𝒙 :

116 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝑳𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 « 𝒔 » 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝑿
𝒔 𝒔
𝟏
̅=
𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑿 ̅ 𝒋 = ∑ 𝒇⦁𝒋 𝑿
∑ 𝒏⦁𝒋 𝑿 ̅𝒋
𝒏
𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏

⦁ 𝑷𝒓𝒆𝒖𝒗𝒆 ∶
𝒓 𝒓 𝒔 𝒔 𝒓 𝒔 𝒔
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
̅= ∑ 𝒏
𝑿 ̅ 𝒋 = ∑ 𝒇⦁𝒋 𝑿
⏟𝒊⦁ 𝒙𝒊 = ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒙𝒊 = ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒙𝒊 = ∑ 𝒏⦁𝒋 𝑿 ̅𝒋
𝒏 𝒏 𝒏 𝒏
∑𝒔𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒏𝒊𝒋 ⏟
𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏
̅𝒋
𝒏⦁𝒋 𝑿

𝑳𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒀 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 « 𝒓 » 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒀
𝒓 𝒓
𝟏
̅ = ∑ 𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝒀
𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝒀 ̅ 𝒊 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊⦁ 𝒀
̅𝒊
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

⦁ 𝑷𝒓𝒆𝒖𝒗𝒆 ∶
𝒔 𝒔 𝒓 𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒓
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
̅= ∑ 𝒏
𝒀 ⏟ ⦁𝒋 𝒚𝒋 =
̅ 𝒊 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊⦁ 𝒀
∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒚𝒋 = ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒚𝒋 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝒀 ̅𝒊
𝒏 𝒏 𝒏 𝒏
𝒋=𝟏 ∑𝒊=𝟏 𝒏𝒊𝒋
𝒓 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 ⏟
𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏
̅𝒊
𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝒀

 𝑹𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 ∶

 𝑳𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒈𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 « 𝒔 » 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔

̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 « 𝒔 » 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑺𝟐𝒙 = (𝑽𝒋 (𝑿)) + 𝑺𝟐𝑿̅𝒋

𝒔 𝒔 𝒔 𝒔 𝒔
𝟏 𝟏
̅ )𝟐 = ∑ 𝒇⦁𝒋 𝑽𝒋 (𝑿) + ∑ 𝒇⦁𝒋 (𝑿
̅𝒋 − 𝑿
𝑺𝟐𝒙 = ∑ 𝒏⦁𝒋 𝑽𝒋 (𝑿) + ∑ 𝒏⦁𝒋 (𝑿 ̅ )𝟐 = ∑ 𝒇⦁𝒋 𝑽𝒋 (𝑿) + 𝑺𝟐𝑿̅
̅𝒋 − 𝑿
𝒏 𝒏 𝒋
𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏

⦁ 𝑷𝒓𝒆𝒖𝒗𝒆 ∶
𝒓 𝒓
𝟏 𝟏
̅ )𝟐 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊⦁ [(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
𝑺𝟐𝒙 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊⦁ (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ 𝒋 ) − (𝑿 ̅ 𝒋 )]𝟐
̅ −𝑿
𝒏 𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝒓
𝟏
̅ 𝒋 )𝟐 − 𝟐(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
= ∑ 𝒏𝒊⦁ [(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ 𝒋 )(𝑿
̅−𝑿
̅ 𝒋 ) + (𝑿 ̅ 𝒋 )𝟐 ]
̅−𝑿
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏

𝒓 𝒓 𝒓
𝟏 𝟐 𝟏
= ∑ 𝒏 ̅ 𝒋 )𝟐 − ∑ 𝒏
⏟𝒊⦁ (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ 𝒋 )(𝑿
⏟𝒊⦁ (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅−𝑿
̅ 𝒋) + ∑ 𝒏 ̅ 𝒋 )𝟐
̅−𝑿
⏟𝒊⦁ (𝑿
𝒏 ∑𝒔
𝒏 ∑𝒔
𝒏 ∑𝒔
𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒏𝒊𝒋

𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒔
𝟏 𝟐 𝟏
̅ 𝒋 )𝟐 − ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
= ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ 𝒋 )(𝑿
̅−𝑿
̅ 𝒋 ) + ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 (𝑿 ̅ 𝒋 )𝟐
̅−𝑿
𝒏 𝒏 𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏

117 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒔 𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒔 𝒓
𝟏 𝟐 𝟐 𝟏 𝟐
𝟐
𝑺𝒙 = ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿̅ 𝒋 ) − ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
̅ 𝒋 )(𝑿
̅−𝑿̅ 𝒋 ) + ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 (𝑿 ̅−𝑿 ̅ 𝒋)
𝒏 𝒏 𝒏
⏟ 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 ⏟ 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 ⏟ 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏
𝓐 𝓑 𝓒

𝒔 𝒓 𝒔 𝒓
𝟐 𝟐
̅ 𝒋 )(𝑿
⦁𝓑 = ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅−𝑿
̅ 𝒋 ) = ∑ [(𝑿
̅−𝑿
̅ 𝒋 ) (∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
̅ 𝒋 ))]
𝒏 𝒏
𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝒔 𝒓 𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒓
𝟐 𝟐
= ∑ [(𝑿̅−𝑿
̅ 𝒋 ) (∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒙𝒊 − ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝑿
̅ 𝒋 )] = ∑ (𝑿 ̅−𝑿
̅ 𝒋 ) ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
̅ 𝒋 ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋
𝒏 𝒏
𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 ⏟
𝒊=𝟏
[ ( 𝒏⦁𝒋 )]

𝒔 𝒓
𝟐
= ∑ (𝑿 ̅−𝑿
̅ 𝒋 ) ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒙𝒊 − 𝒏⦁𝒋 𝑿
̅𝒋 ⟹ 𝓑 = 𝟎
𝒏
𝒋=𝟏 ⏟
𝒊=𝟏
⏟
( 𝒏⦁𝒋𝑿̅ 𝒋 )
⏟ [ 𝟎 ]
𝟎

𝒔 𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒔
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
̅ 𝒋 )𝟐 = ∑ (∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
⦁𝓐 = ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ 𝒋 )𝟐 ) ⟹ 𝓐 = ∑ 𝒏⦁𝒋 𝑽𝒋 (𝑿)
𝒏 𝒏 𝒏
𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 ⏟𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏
[ 𝒏⦁𝒋 𝑽𝒋 (𝑿) ]

𝒔 𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒔 𝒓
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
̅ 𝒋 )𝟐 = ∑ [(∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 (𝑿
̅−𝑿
⦁𝓒 = ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 (𝑿 ̅ 𝒋 )𝟐 )] = ∑(𝑿
̅−𝑿 ̅ 𝒋 )𝟐 (∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 )
̅−𝑿
𝒏 𝒏 𝒏
𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 ⏟𝒊=𝟏
[ 𝒏⦁𝒋 ]
𝒔 𝒔
𝟏 𝟏
̅ 𝒋 )𝟐 = ∑ 𝒏⦁𝒋 (𝑿
̅−𝑿
𝓒 = ∑ 𝒏⦁𝒋 (𝑿 ̅ )𝟐
̅𝒋 − 𝑿
𝒏 𝒏
𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏

𝒔 𝒔
𝟏 𝟏 𝟐
𝑬𝒏 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒕 ∶ 𝑺𝟐𝒙 ̅𝒋 − 𝑿
= ∑ 𝒏⦁𝒋 𝑽𝒋 (𝑿) + ∑ 𝒏⦁𝒋 (𝑿 ̅)
𝒏 𝒏
𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏

 𝑳𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒈𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒀 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 « 𝒓 » 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔

𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 « 𝒓 » 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑺𝟐𝒚 = ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅

(𝑽𝒊 (𝒀)) + 𝑺𝟐𝒀̅𝒊
𝒓 𝒓 𝒓 𝒓 𝒓
𝟏 𝟏
̅𝒊 − 𝒀
𝑺𝟐𝒚 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝑽𝒊 (𝒀) + ∑ 𝒏𝒊⦁ (𝒀 ̅ )𝟐 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊⦁ 𝑽𝒊 (𝒀) + ∑ 𝒇𝒊⦁ (𝒀 ̅ )𝟐 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊⦁ 𝑽𝒊 (𝒀) + 𝑺𝟐𝒀̅
̅𝒊 − 𝒀
𝒏 𝒏 𝒊
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝓐– 𝟔 • 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 ∶

𝓪 • 𝑴𝒐𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 à 𝒍’𝒐𝒓𝒊𝒈𝒊𝒏𝒆 (𝒐𝒖 𝒏𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓é𝒔) 𝒅’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒌 𝒆𝒕 𝒍 ∶

118 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒔
𝟏
̅ 𝒌,𝒍 = ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒙𝒊 𝒚𝒋 = ∑ ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋 𝒙𝒌𝒊 𝒚𝒍𝒋
𝒎 𝒌 𝒍
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏

𝒎
̅ 𝟎,𝟎 = 𝟏

𝒎 ̅
̅ 𝟏,𝟎 = 𝑿

𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒓
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
̅ 𝟏,𝟎
⦁ 𝑷𝒓𝒆𝒖𝒗𝒆 ∶ 𝒎 ̅ = ∑ 𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝒙𝒊 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊⦁ 𝒙𝒊
= ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒙𝟏𝒊 𝒚𝟎𝒋 = ∑ 𝒙𝒊 (∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 ) = 𝑿
𝒏 𝒏 𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 ⏟𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏
𝒏𝒊⦁

𝒎 ̅
̅ 𝟎,𝟏 = 𝒀

𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒔 𝒔 𝒔
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
̅ 𝟎,𝟏
⦁ 𝑷𝒓𝒆𝒖𝒗𝒆 ∶ 𝒎 ̅ = ∑ 𝒏⦁𝒋 𝒚𝒋 = ∑ 𝒇⦁𝒋 𝒚𝒋
= ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒙𝟎𝒊 𝒚𝟏𝒋 = ∑ 𝒚𝒋 (∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 ) = 𝒀
𝒏 𝒏 𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 ⏟𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏
𝒏⦁𝒋

𝓫 • 𝑴𝒐𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓é𝒔 𝒅’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒌 𝒆𝒕 𝒍 ∶

𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒔
𝟏
𝝁
̅ 𝒌,𝒍 = ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ )𝒍 = ∑ ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
̅ )𝒌 (𝒚𝒋 − 𝒀 ̅ )𝒍
̅ )𝒌 (𝒚𝒋 − 𝒀
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏

𝝁
̅ 𝟎,𝟎 = 𝟏

𝝁
̅ 𝟏,𝟎 = 𝟎

𝝁
̅ 𝟎,𝟏 = 𝟎
𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒔
𝟏
𝝁
̅ 𝟏,𝟏 = 𝑺𝒙,𝒚 ̅ )(𝒚𝒋 − 𝒀
= ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ ) = ∑ ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
̅ )(𝒚𝒋 − 𝒀
̅ ) = ∑ ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋 𝒙𝒊 𝒚𝒋 − 𝑿
̅𝒀̅
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏

𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒔

⦁ 𝑷𝒓𝒆𝒖𝒗𝒆 ∶ 𝝁
̅ 𝟏,𝟏 ̅ )(𝒚𝒋 − 𝒀
= ∑ ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ ) = ∑ ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋 (𝒙𝒊 𝒚𝒋 − 𝑿
̅ 𝒚𝒋 − 𝒀
̅ 𝒙𝒊 + 𝑿
̅𝒀̅)
𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏

𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒔
̅ ∑ ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋 𝒚𝒋 − 𝒀
= ∑ ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋 𝒙𝒊 𝒚𝒋 − 𝑿 ̅ ∑ ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋 𝒙𝒊 + 𝑿
̅𝒀̅ ∑ ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋
𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 ⏟
𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 ⏟
𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 ⏟
𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏
̅
𝒀 ̅
𝑿 𝟏

𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒔
̅𝒀
= ∑ ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋 𝒙𝒊 𝒚𝒋 − 𝑿 ̅−𝑿
̅𝒀̅+𝑿
̅𝒀̅ = ∑ ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋 𝒙𝒊 𝒚𝒋 − 𝑿
̅𝒀̅
𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏

𝓐– 𝟕 • 𝑪𝒐𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆, 𝑪𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶

𝓪 • 𝑪𝒐𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 ∶

119 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝑳𝒂 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 « 𝒉𝒐𝒎𝒐𝒈è𝒏𝒆 » à 𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒔 à 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏,

𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒄’𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒃𝒊𝒅𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆. 𝑪’𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆

𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒕𝒆 𝒏𝒖𝒎é𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓é𝒆𝒔

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒔𝒊𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒏é𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕. 𝑳𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝒀 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒓é𝒆𝒍 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊 𝒑𝒂𝒓 ∶

𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒔
𝟏
𝑺𝒙,𝒚 = 𝝁
̅ 𝟏,𝟏 ̅ )(𝒚𝒋 − 𝒀
= ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ ) = ∑ ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
̅ )(𝒚𝒋 − 𝒀
̅ ) = ∑ ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋 𝒙𝒊 𝒚𝒋 − 𝑿
̅𝒀̅
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ − 𝑿
= (𝑿𝒀) ̅𝒀̅

 𝑷𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é𝒔 ∶

 𝑺𝒙,𝒚 = 𝑺𝒚,𝒙  𝑺𝒙,𝒙 = 𝑺𝟐𝒙 𝒆𝒕 𝑺𝒚,𝒚 = 𝑺𝟐𝒚  𝑰𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝑪𝒂𝒖𝒄𝒉𝒚­𝑺𝒄𝒉𝒘𝒂𝒓𝒛 ∶ 𝑺𝟐𝒙,𝒚 ≤ 𝑺𝟐𝒙 𝑺𝟐𝒚

 𝑺𝟐𝒙+𝒚 = 𝑺𝟐𝒙 + 𝑺𝟐𝒚 + 𝟐𝑺𝒙,𝒚  𝑺𝟐𝒙−𝒚 = 𝑺𝟐𝒙 + 𝑺𝟐𝒚 − 𝟐𝑺𝒙,𝒚  𝑺𝟐𝜶𝒙+𝜷𝒚 = 𝜶𝟐 𝑺𝟐𝒙 + 𝜷𝟐 𝑺𝟐𝒚 + 𝟐𝜶𝜷𝑺𝒙,𝒚

 𝑳𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔, 𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒖 𝒏𝒖𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑺𝒙,𝒚 ∈ ℝ

 𝑳𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒀

 𝑹𝒆𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒒𝒖𝒆: 𝑫𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆, 𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒓 à 𝒍′ é𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕­𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒂𝒗𝒐𝒊𝒓 𝒖𝒏

𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓é𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 ; 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒖𝒊 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆, 𝒊𝒍 𝒇𝒂𝒖𝒅𝒓𝒂 𝒑𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒓 𝒂𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆

𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆.

𝓫 • 𝑳𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 ∶

𝑰𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎é𝒆𝒔

𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓é𝒆𝒔. 𝑬𝒏 𝒄𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒔, 𝒄𝒆 𝒏′ 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒖𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 « 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒏𝒔è𝒒𝒖𝒆 ».

𝑪′𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒐𝒏 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 (𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕

𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍é 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝑷𝒆𝒂𝒓𝒔𝒐𝒏, 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒓𝒂𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝑩𝒓𝒂𝒗𝒂𝒊𝒔­𝑷𝒆𝒂𝒓𝒔𝒐𝒏), 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒂

𝒄𝒐𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒔 é𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒔­𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒆𝒔. 𝑪𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕é𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆, 𝒅𝒆 𝒇𝒂ç𝒐𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒏𝒔è𝒒𝒖𝒆,

𝒍𝒂 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓é𝒆𝒔.

𝑬𝒏 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒓, 𝒊𝒍 𝒏𝒆 𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔.

𝑺𝒙,𝒚
𝑺𝒂 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 ∶ 𝑪𝒐𝒓𝒓(𝒙, 𝒙) = 𝒓𝒙,𝒚 =
𝑺𝒙 𝑺𝒚

 𝑷𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é𝒔 ∶

𝒙−𝑿 ̅ 𝒚−𝒀 ̅
 𝒓𝒙,𝒚 = 𝑺(𝒙−𝑿̅ 𝒚−𝒀̅) = 𝑪𝒐𝒗 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ( ; )
𝑺𝒙
;
𝑺𝒚 𝑺𝒙 𝑺𝒚

120 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
 𝒓𝒙,𝒚 = 𝒓𝒚,𝒙

 𝑬𝒏 𝒔’𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒖𝒚𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒍’𝒊𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝑪𝒂𝒖𝒄𝒉𝒚­𝑺𝒄𝒉𝒘𝒂𝒓𝒛, 𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 ∶ −𝟏 ≤ 𝒓𝒙,𝒚 ≤ 𝟏

 𝒓𝒙,𝒙 = 𝟏

𝟏 , 𝒔𝒊 𝒂 > 0
 𝒓𝒙,𝒂𝒙+𝒃 = {
−𝟏 , 𝒔𝒊 𝒂 < 0

 𝑳𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆/𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓é𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶

 𝑳𝒆 𝒔𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏. 𝑨𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊, 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆

𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 à 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒔 (𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆

𝒎é𝒏𝒂𝒈𝒆𝒔, 𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒓 𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒓𝒆𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒖𝒔, 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝑿, 𝒆𝒕 𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒆𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔, 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒀).

𝑨𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆, 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔

𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 à 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒆𝒏 𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒔 𝒐𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒔é𝒔 (𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒋𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆

𝒎é𝒏𝒂𝒈𝒆𝒔, 𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒓 𝒎𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔, 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝑿, 𝒆𝒕 à 𝒍′é𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒈𝒏𝒆, 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒀).

𝒓𝒙,𝒚 > 𝟎 ⇒ 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒙 𝒆𝒕 𝒚 𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 à 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒔

𝒓𝒙,𝒚 < 𝟎 ⇒ 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒙 𝒆𝒕 𝒚 𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 à 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒆𝒏 𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒔 𝒐𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒔é𝒔

 𝑳𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒐𝒍𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏. 𝑷𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓

𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒐𝒍𝒖𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝟏, 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒆 ; 𝒂𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆, 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝟎 𝒆𝒕

𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆. 𝑨𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊, 𝒖𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝟎, 𝟗 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒕𝒓è𝒔 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒆 ; 𝒖𝒏

𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝟎, 𝟓 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 ; 𝒖𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝟎, 𝟏 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏

𝒕𝒓è𝒔 𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆.

|𝒓𝒙,𝒚 | ≅ 𝟏 ⇒ 𝒍𝒂 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒙 𝒆𝒕 𝒚 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒆

|𝒓𝒙,𝒚 | ≅ 𝟎 ⇒ 𝒍𝒂 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒙 𝒆𝒕 𝒚 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆

|𝒓𝒙,𝒚 | ≅ 𝟎, 𝟓 ⇒ 𝒍𝒂 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒙 𝒆𝒕 𝒚 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆

 |𝒓𝒙,𝒚 | = 𝟏 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒕 à ∶ 𝒀 = 𝒂𝑿 + 𝒃 𝒆𝒕 𝑿 = 𝒄𝒀 + 𝒅

𝒊𝒍 𝒆𝒙𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒆, 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝒀, 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒖, 𝒖𝒏 𝒕𝒆𝒍 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒏𝒆 𝒔𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒏

𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒓é𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔.

 𝑬𝒏 𝒑𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆, 𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 |𝒓𝒙,𝒚 | > 𝟎, 𝟖 , 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓é𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒆.

 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝒀 𝒊𝒏𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 ⇒ 𝒓𝒙,𝒚 = 𝟎

121 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014

𝓑– 𝟏 • 𝑵𝒖𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔 ∶

𝓪 • 𝑰𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒅𝒖𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶

𝑺𝒐𝒊𝒕 (𝑿, 𝒀) 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 à 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕è𝒓𝒆𝒔. 𝑳′ 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒍𝒂𝒏 (𝑶, 𝒊⃗, 𝒋⃗) 𝒅𝒆

𝒄𝒐𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 (𝒙𝒊 , 𝒚𝒊 )𝟏≤𝒊≤𝒏 𝒔′ 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒖𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 (𝑿, 𝒀)

𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒔𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕, 𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒋𝒐𝒖𝒕𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒉è𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒂

𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒏𝒖𝒂𝒈𝒆.

𝑼𝒏𝒆 𝒇𝒐𝒊𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒖𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒏´𝒆, 𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒚𝒆𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒇 𝒕𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆

𝒅’é𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒚 = 𝒇(𝒙)“𝒑𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒑𝒓è𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆” 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒖 𝒏𝒖𝒂𝒈𝒆.

𝑪’𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒃𝒍è𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍’𝒂𝒋𝒖𝒔𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕.

𝓫 • 𝑹é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍é𝒆𝒔 |𝒓𝒙,𝒚 | ≅ 𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒐𝒏

𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓𝒆𝒓, 𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒐𝒓𝒊, 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒖𝒏𝒆 (𝒏𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒒𝒖′ 𝒊𝒍 𝒔′ 𝒂𝒈𝒊𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝑿)𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒄𝒂𝒖𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆

(𝒊𝒍 𝒔′ 𝒂𝒈𝒊𝒓𝒂 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒅𝒆 𝒀), 𝒊𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒛 𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒍 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕

𝒀, « 𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆 » 𝒆𝒏 𝒖𝒏 𝒄𝒆𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒏 𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒔. 𝑳𝒂 𝒎é𝒕𝒉𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒓

𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒕𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔′𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒓é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒀 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝑿.

𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒐𝒊𝒓 𝒎𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒏 œ𝒖𝒗𝒓𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒓é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏, 𝒊𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒂𝒖 𝒑𝒓é𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒏é𝒄𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒅′ 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕 𝒅𝒆

𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒓 𝒖𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍 𝒐𝒏 𝒗𝒂 𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓 « 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒆𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆 », 𝒅′ 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕

𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒓é𝒄𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒔 (𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒉é𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆)𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒕𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 « 𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒙

𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆 » 𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 « 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒆𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆 ».

𝑺𝒊 𝒍′ 𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒉𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒊𝒕 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒖𝒊 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒂𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒔

(𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒆 𝒇(𝑿) = 𝒂𝑿 + 𝒃), 𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒍𝒆 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 (𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒄𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒆 𝒅′𝒖𝒏𝒆

𝒕𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆). 𝑪′𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒉𝒐𝒊𝒙 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍′𝒐𝒏 𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒎𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂

𝒑𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒄′ 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒖𝒊 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒇𝒆𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒊𝒄𝒊. 𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒖𝒏 𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒔 𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒉é𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 à

𝒍′ 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 « 𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆 », 𝒐𝒏 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒆𝒏 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒊𝒕è𝒓𝒆 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍é 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒆𝒔

𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓 𝒊𝒍 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒆 à 𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒎𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é𝒔, 𝒐𝒖 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒇𝒐𝒊𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒊𝒕è𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑴𝒂𝒚𝒆𝒓.

122 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝓬 • 𝑪𝒓𝒊𝒕è𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑴𝒂𝒚𝒆𝒓 ∶

𝑬𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒖𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒖𝒏 « 𝒂𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 » 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆. 𝑪𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕

« 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 » 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 (𝒙𝒊 , 𝒚𝒊 ). 𝑰𝒍 𝒆𝒙𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒅’𝒂𝒋𝒖𝒔𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒖𝒏 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒊

𝒏’𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏, 𝒅𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒄𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒙𝒊 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 :

𝒚′𝒊 = 𝒂𝒙𝒊 + 𝒃, 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒊 = 𝟏, 𝟐, … , 𝒏

𝒔𝒊 𝜹𝒊 > 𝟎 ⇒ 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 (𝒙𝒊 , 𝒚′𝒊 ) 𝒔𝒆 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆 𝒂𝒖­𝒅𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒖𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆

𝑺𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝜹𝒊 = 𝒚𝒊 − 𝒚′𝒊 ∶ {
𝒔𝒊 𝜹𝒊 < 𝟎 ⇒ 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 (𝒙𝒊 , 𝒚′𝒊 ) 𝒔𝒆 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆 𝒆𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆
𝒏

𝑳𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒊𝒕è𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑴𝒂𝒚𝒆𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒆 à 𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒆𝒓 : ∑ 𝜹𝒊 = 𝟎

𝒊=𝟏

𝑪𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆𝜹𝒊 = 𝒚𝒊 − 𝒚′𝒊 = 𝒚𝒊 − 𝒂𝒙𝒊 − 𝒃 ; (𝒊 = 𝟏, 𝟐, … , 𝒏), 𝒐𝒏 𝒂 ∶

𝒏 𝒏 𝒏 𝒏 𝒏 𝒏
𝟏 𝟏
∑ 𝜹𝒊 = 𝟎 ⟺ ∑(𝒚𝒊 − 𝒂𝒙𝒊 − 𝒃) = 𝟎 ⟺ ∑ 𝒚𝒊 − 𝒏𝒃 − 𝒂 ∑ 𝒙𝒊 = 𝟎 ⟺ ∑ 𝒚𝒊 − 𝒃 − 𝒂 ( ∑ 𝒙𝒊 ) = 𝟎
𝒏 𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

̅ − 𝒃 − 𝒂𝑿
⟺𝒀 ̅ = 𝟎 𝒅′ 𝒐ù 𝒀
̅ = 𝒃 + 𝒂𝑿
̅

𝑳𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒊𝒕è𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑴𝒂𝒚𝒆𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒕 à 𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒆𝒓 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏. 𝑶𝒓 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 é𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂

̅, 𝒀
𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝑮(𝑿 ̅ )𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍é 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒗𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒍’𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗é𝒔,

̅
𝒚′𝒊 − 𝒀
𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊 ∶ 𝒂 =
𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿̅

𝓭 • 𝑴é𝒕𝒉𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑴𝒂𝒚𝒆𝒓 ∶

𝑫𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒍’𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒔 (𝑰 𝒆𝒕 𝑰𝑰)𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒑 𝒆𝒕 𝒒

𝒑 𝒏

𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒕𝒆𝒍𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒑 + 𝒒 = 𝒏 𝒆𝒕 |𝒑 − 𝒒| ≤ 𝟏 ∶ ∑ 𝜹𝒊 = 𝟎 (𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝑰)𝒆𝒕 ∶ ∑ 𝜹𝒊 = 𝟎 (𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝑰𝑰)

𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝒑+𝟏

̅ 𝑰, 𝒀
𝑨𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊 𝒐𝒏 𝒂 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 é𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒊𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒗𝒊𝒕é 𝑮𝑰 (𝑿 ̅ 𝑰 ) 𝒆𝒕 𝑮𝑰𝑰 (𝑿
̅ 𝑰𝑰 , 𝒀
̅ 𝑰𝑰 )

𝒀̅ 𝑰 = 𝒃 + 𝒂𝑿
̅𝑰
𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒓é𝒈𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝑰 𝒆𝒕 𝑰𝑰 ∶ {
̅ 𝑰𝑰 = 𝒃 + 𝒂𝑿
𝒀 ̅ 𝑰𝑰

̅ −𝒀
𝒀 ̅𝑰
̅ 𝑰 = ( 𝑰𝑰
𝒅′ 𝒐ù 𝒍′ é𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒕𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆(𝑮𝑰 , 𝑮𝑰𝑰 ) ∶ 𝒚 − 𝒀 ̅ 𝑰 ) , 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝑮(𝑿
) (𝒙 − 𝑿 ̅, 𝒀
̅ ) ∈ (𝑮𝑰 , 𝑮𝑰𝑰 )
̅ 𝑰𝑰 − 𝑿
𝑿 ̅𝑰

 𝑬𝒙𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆 ∶ 𝑶𝒏 𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒅𝒔 𝒀 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝑿 𝒅𝒆 𝟐𝟎 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔 ∶

𝒙𝒊 𝟏𝟓𝟓 𝟏𝟔𝟐 𝟏𝟓𝟕 𝟏𝟕𝟎 𝟏𝟔𝟒 𝟏𝟔𝟐 𝟏𝟔𝟗 𝟏𝟕𝟎 𝟏𝟕𝟖 𝟏𝟕𝟑 𝟏𝟖𝟎 𝟏𝟕𝟓 𝟏𝟕𝟑 𝟏𝟕𝟓 𝟏𝟕𝟗 𝟏𝟕𝟓 𝟏𝟖𝟎 𝟏𝟖𝟓 𝟏𝟖𝟗 𝟏𝟖𝟕
𝒚𝒊 𝟔𝟎 𝟔𝟏 𝟔𝟒 𝟔𝟕 𝟔𝟖 𝟔𝟗 𝟕𝟎 𝟕𝟎 𝟕𝟐 𝟕𝟑 𝟕𝟓 𝟕𝟔 𝟕𝟖 𝟖𝟎 𝟖𝟓 𝟗𝟎 𝟗𝟔 𝟗𝟔 𝟗𝟖 𝟏𝟎𝟏
𝑶𝒏 𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒍’𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝟐𝟎 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒔 (𝑰 𝒆𝒕 𝑰𝑰) 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒄𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝟏𝟎

123 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝑶𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 : 𝑿̅ = 𝟏𝟕𝟐, 𝟗 ; 𝒀
̅ = 𝟕𝟕, 𝟒𝟓 ; 𝑿
̅ 𝑰 = 𝟏𝟔𝟔 ; 𝑿
̅ 𝑰𝑰 = 𝟏𝟕𝟗, 𝟖 ; 𝒀
̅ 𝑰 = 𝟔𝟕, 𝟒

̅ 𝑰𝑰 = 𝟖𝟕, 𝟓. 𝑷𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝑮(𝟏𝟕𝟐, 𝟗; 𝟕𝟕, 𝟒𝟓) ; 𝑮𝑰 (𝟏𝟔𝟔; 𝟔𝟕, 𝟒) 𝒆𝒕 𝑮𝑰𝑰 (𝟏𝟕𝟗, 𝟖; 𝟖𝟕, 𝟓)
𝒆𝒕 𝒀

𝒍′ é𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒕𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆(𝑮𝑰 , 𝑮𝑰𝑰 ) 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒖𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒕𝒉𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑴𝒂𝒚𝒆𝒓 𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒂 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 ∶

̅ −𝒀
𝒀 ̅𝑰 𝟖𝟕, 𝟓 − 𝟔𝟕, 𝟒
̅ 𝑰 = ( 𝑰𝑰
(𝑮𝑰 , 𝑮𝑰𝑰 ) ∶ 𝒚 − 𝒀 ̅ 𝑰 ) ⟺ 𝒚 − 𝟔𝟕, 𝟒 = (
) (𝒙 − 𝑿 ) (𝒙 − 𝟏𝟔𝟔)
̅ 𝑰𝑰 − 𝑿
𝑿 ̅𝑰 𝟏𝟕𝟗, 𝟖 − 𝟏𝟔𝟔

(𝑮𝑰 , 𝑮𝑰𝑰 ) ∶ 𝒚 = 𝟏, 𝟓𝒙 − 𝟏𝟕𝟒, 𝟒

Méthode de Mayer
100

95

90
𝑮𝑰𝑰 (𝟏𝟕𝟗, 𝟖; 𝟖𝟕, 𝟓)

85

80

75

70

𝑮𝑰(𝟏𝟔𝟔; 𝟔𝟕, 𝟒)
65

60
155

160

165

170

175

180

185

190

𝓑– 𝟐 • 𝑴é𝒕𝒉𝒐𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é𝒔 ∶

𝓪 • 𝑰𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒅𝒖𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶

𝑺𝒊 𝒍′ 𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒂 + 𝒃𝑿 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒙𝒊 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝑿 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗é𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒍′ 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖

« 𝒊 », 𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕(𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 ) 𝑳𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒆𝒕 𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖′ 𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒔é𝒆

𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓, 𝒚𝒊 , 𝒗𝒂𝒖𝒕 𝒚𝒊 − (𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 ) 𝑬𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒆𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒆𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕

𝒚𝒊 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 .

𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒊𝒓 𝒍′ 𝒆𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒍′ 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′ é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏, 𝒊𝒍 𝒇𝒂𝒖𝒕 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒕𝒆

𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔. 𝑪𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆, 𝒊𝒍

𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒏é𝒄𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒂𝒖 𝒑𝒓é𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒆𝒏 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒐𝒍𝒖𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒂𝒖 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é, 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 é𝒗𝒊𝒕𝒆𝒓

𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔 𝒏𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔. 𝑳′ 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é𝒔

é𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒏𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒂𝒖 𝒏𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒔, 𝒄′ 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒐𝒏 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒆𝒏 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍

𝒆𝒕 𝒄′ 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍′𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒊𝒕è𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é𝒔.

𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒎é𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒓𝒆, 𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒂 𝒒𝒖𝒆 [𝒚𝒊 − (𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 )] 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆, 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒖𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒐𝒄𝒊é

124 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔, 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒗𝒆𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝒇𝒊𝒈𝒖𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒕 « 𝒊 » à 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒅′ é𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏

𝒀 = 𝒂 + 𝒃𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝒄’𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒂𝒖𝒔𝒔𝒊 𝒍’𝒆𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍’𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆𝒕 𝒆𝒏 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏

𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒑𝒓é𝒅𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒚𝒊 à 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒙𝒊

𝑳𝒆𝒔 « 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 »[𝒚𝒊 − (𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 )] 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕 ê𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒐𝒖 𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔.

𝓫 • 𝑫é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒓é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 ∶

𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒅é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒂 𝒆𝒕 𝒃 𝒐𝒏 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒏𝒄𝒊𝒑𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒆𝒔

𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒆 à 𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒎𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔

« 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 »[𝒚𝒊 − (𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 )]:

𝒏 𝒏

𝐦𝐢𝐧 ∑ 𝓜(𝒂, 𝒃) = 𝐦𝐢𝐧 ∑(𝒚𝒊 − 𝒂 − 𝒃𝒙𝒊 )𝟐

𝒂,𝒃 𝒂,𝒃
𝒊=𝟏 ⏟
𝒊=𝟏
𝓜(𝒂,𝒃)

• 𝑪𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒏é𝒄𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 ∶
𝒏 𝒏 𝒏
−𝟐 ∑ (𝒚𝒊 − 𝒂 − 𝒃𝒙𝒊 ) = 𝟎 ∑ 𝒚𝒊 − 𝒏𝒂 − 𝒃 ∑ 𝒙𝒊 = 𝟎
𝝏𝓜(𝒂, 𝒃)⁄𝝏𝒂 = 𝟎 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏
{ ⟺{ 𝒏 ⟺{ 𝒏 𝒏 𝒏
𝝏𝓜(𝒂, 𝒃)⁄𝝏𝒃 = 𝟎
−𝟐 ∑ (𝒚𝒊 − 𝒂 − 𝒃𝒙𝒊 )𝒙𝒊 = 𝟎 ∑ 𝒙 𝒊 𝒚𝒊 − 𝒂 ∑ 𝒙𝒊 − 𝒃 ∑ 𝒙𝟐𝒊 = 𝟎
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

̅ − 𝒏𝒂 − 𝒏𝒃𝑿
𝒏𝒀 ̅=𝟎 ̅ − 𝒃𝑿
𝒂=𝒀 ̅
𝒏 𝒏 𝒏 𝒏
⟺{ ̅ ⟺{ ̅ ̅ )𝑿
̅ + 𝒃 ∑ 𝒙𝟐𝒊 = ∑ 𝒙𝒊 𝒚𝒊
𝒏𝒂𝑿 + 𝒃 ∑ 𝒙𝟐𝒊 = ∑ 𝒙 𝒊 𝒚𝒊 𝒏(𝒀 − 𝒃𝑿
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

̅ − 𝒃𝑿
𝒂=𝒀 ̅ ̅ − 𝒃𝑿
𝒂=𝒀 ̅
𝒏 𝒏 𝒏 𝒏
⟺{ ̅𝟐 = ∑ ̅𝒀̅ ⟺{ ̅ 𝟐) = ∑ ̅𝒀̅
𝒃∑ 𝒙𝟐𝒊 − 𝒏𝒃𝑿 𝒙𝒊 𝒚𝒊 − 𝒏𝑿 𝒃 (∑ 𝒙𝟐𝒊 − 𝒏𝑿 𝒙𝒊 𝒚𝒊 − 𝒏𝑿
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

̅ − 𝒃𝑿
𝒂=𝒀 ̅
⟺{
𝒏 ̅𝒀
∑𝒊=𝟏 𝒙𝒊 𝒚𝒊 − 𝒏𝑿 ̅ ∑𝒏𝒊=𝟏(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
̅ )(𝒚𝒊 − 𝒀
̅)
𝒃= 𝒏 𝟐 =
∑𝒊=𝟏 𝒙𝒊 − 𝒏𝑿 ̅𝟐 ̅ )𝟐
∑𝒏𝒊=𝟏(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿

• 𝑪𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒖𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 ∶

𝟐 𝟐
𝝏(−𝟐 ∑𝒏𝒊=𝟏(𝒚𝒊 − 𝒂 − 𝒃𝒙𝒊 )) 𝒏
𝝏 𝓜⁄𝝏𝒂 (𝒂, 𝒃) = = −𝟐 ∑ −𝟏 = 𝟐𝒏
𝝏𝒂 𝒊=𝟏

𝝏(−𝟐 ∑𝒏𝒊=𝟏(𝒚𝒊 − 𝒂 − 𝒃𝒙𝒊 )𝒙𝒊 ) 𝒏 𝒏

𝝏𝟐 𝓜⁄𝝏𝒃𝟐 (𝒂, 𝒃) = = −𝟐 ∑ −𝒙𝟐𝒊 = 𝟐 ∑ 𝒙𝟐𝒊
𝝏𝒃 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝝏𝟐 𝓜 𝝏(−𝟐 ∑𝒏𝒊=𝟏(𝒚𝒊 − 𝒂 − 𝒃𝒙𝒊 )) 𝒏 𝒏

𝝏𝟐 𝓜⁄𝝏𝒃𝝏𝒂 (𝒂, 𝒃) = (𝒂, 𝒃) = = −𝟐 ∑ −𝒙𝒊 = 𝟐 ∑ 𝒙𝒊
𝝏𝒂𝝏𝒃 𝝏𝒃 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

125 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒏
𝝏𝟐 𝓜 𝝏𝟐 𝓜 𝟐𝒏 𝟐∑ 𝒙𝒊
𝟐
(𝒂, 𝒃) (𝒂, 𝒃) 𝒊=𝟏
|𝑯(𝓜(𝒂, 𝒃))| = || 𝝏𝒂 𝝏𝒃𝝏𝒂 || = | 𝒏 |
| 𝒏 |
𝝏𝟐 𝓜 𝝏𝟐 𝓜
(𝒂, 𝒃) (𝒂, 𝒃) 𝟐 ∑ 𝒙𝒊 𝟐∑ 𝒙𝟐𝒊
𝝏𝒂𝝏𝒃 𝝏𝒃𝟐 𝒊=𝟏
𝒊=𝟏

𝒏 𝒏 𝟐 𝒏 𝒏
𝟏
|𝑯(𝓜(𝒂, 𝒃))| = 𝟒𝒏 ∑ 𝒙𝟐𝒊 − 𝟒 (∑ 𝒙𝒊 ) = 𝟒𝒏 ∑ ̅ )𝟐 = 𝟒𝒏𝟐 ( ∑ 𝒙𝟐𝒊 − 𝑿
𝒙𝟐𝒊 − 𝟒(𝒏𝑿 ̅ 𝟐)
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒏 𝒊=𝟏

𝟏 𝒏
𝑺𝟐𝒙 = ̅ 𝟐 é𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 (𝒙𝟏 , … , 𝒙𝒏 )
∑ 𝒙𝟐𝒊 − 𝑿
𝒏 𝒊=𝟏
𝟏 𝒏
𝑺𝟐𝒚 = ̅ 𝟐 é𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 (𝒚𝟏 , … , 𝒚𝒏 )
∑ 𝒚𝟐𝒊 − 𝒀
𝒏 𝒊=𝟏
𝟏 𝒏 𝟏 𝒏
𝑺𝒙,𝒚 = ̅ )(𝒚𝒊 − 𝒀
∑ (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ ) = ∑ 𝒙 𝒊 𝒚𝒊 − 𝑿
̅𝒀̅ é𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆
𝒏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒏 𝒊=𝟏

|𝑯(𝓜(𝒂, 𝒃))| = 𝟒𝒏𝟐 𝑺𝟐𝒙 > 𝟎 ⇒ (𝒂, 𝒃) 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏 𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒎𝒖𝒎 𝒍𝒐𝒄𝒂𝒍

𝒂=𝒀̅ − 𝒃𝑿̅
{ ̅𝒀
∑𝒏𝒊=𝟏 𝒙𝒊 𝒚𝒊 − 𝒏𝑿 ̅ 𝒏 ̅ )(𝒚𝒊 − 𝒀
∑𝒊=𝟏(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ ) 𝑺𝒙,𝒚
𝒃= = = 𝟐
∑𝒏𝒊=𝟏 𝒙𝟐𝒊 − 𝒏𝑿̅𝟐 ̅ )𝟐
∑𝒏𝒊=𝟏(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 𝑺𝒙

𝑺𝒙,𝒚 𝑺 𝑺 𝒚−𝒀 ̅ 𝒙−𝑿 ̅

̅−
𝑳𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 ∶ 𝒚 = 𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙 = 𝒀 ̅ + 𝒙,𝒚 𝒙 𝒐𝒖 𝒚 − 𝒀
𝑿 ̅ = 𝒙,𝒚 (𝒙 − 𝑿
̅ )𝒐𝒖 = 𝒓 𝒙,𝒚 ( )
𝑺𝟐𝒙 𝑺𝟐𝒙 𝑺𝟐𝒙 𝑺𝒙 𝑺𝒚

𝓬 • 𝑹𝒆𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 ∶

̅ 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝑿 𝒏𝒆 𝒋𝒐𝒖𝒆
 𝑫𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒐ù 𝑺𝒙,𝒚 = 𝟎 𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒊­𝒅𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒖𝒔 ∶ 𝒀 = 𝒀

𝒂𝒖𝒄𝒖𝒏 𝒓ô𝒍𝒆, 𝒊𝒍 𝒏’𝒚 𝒂 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒀 𝒆𝒕 𝑿.

𝑪’𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒒𝒖𝒐𝒊 𝒏𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝒀 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒏𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍é𝒆𝒔 𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝑺𝒙,𝒚 = 𝟎.

 𝑳𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒚 𝒆𝒏 𝒙 𝒏’𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒙

𝒆𝒏 𝒚.

̅, 𝒀
 𝑳𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 (𝑿 ̅ ) 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏: 𝒀
̅ = 𝒂 + 𝒃𝑿
̅

 𝑳𝒆𝒔 « 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 »[𝒚𝒊 − (𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 )] 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒒𝒖é𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒚𝒊 𝒑𝒂𝒓

𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏
𝒏
𝟏
 ∑[𝒚𝒊 − (𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 )] = 𝟎
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏

 ∑ 𝒙𝒊 [𝒚𝒊 − (𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 )] = 𝟎
𝒊=𝟏

126 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝑺𝒚
 𝒃 = 𝒓𝒙,𝒚 ; 𝒃 𝒆𝒕 𝒓𝒙,𝒚 𝒂𝒖𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒋𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒔𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒆
𝑺𝒙

 𝑻𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒖 𝒏𝒖𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒈𝒏é𝒔 ⟺ |𝒓𝒙,𝒚 | = 𝟏

 𝑻𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒖 𝒏𝒖𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒈𝒏é𝒔 ⟺ |𝒓𝒙,𝒚 | ≅ 𝟏

𝓭 • 𝑹é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒀 ∶

𝑫𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒑𝒓é𝒄è𝒅𝒆 𝒐𝒏 𝒂 𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓𝒄𝒉é à 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒓 𝒀 𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 ∶ (𝒀 = 𝒂 + 𝒃𝑿),

𝒓é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒀 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝑿 . 𝑵𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒂𝒖𝒔𝒔𝒊 𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒖

𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒆 ∶ (𝑿 = 𝒂′ + 𝒃′ 𝒀) , 𝒓é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒀 . 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒓é𝒔𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒔 𝒑𝒓é𝒄é𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒔𝒆

̅ − 𝒃′ 𝒀
𝒂′ = 𝑿 ̅
𝒏 ̅ ̅ 𝒏
𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒕é𝒔 ∶ { ′ ∑𝒊=𝟏 𝒙𝒊 𝒚𝒊 − 𝒏𝑿𝒀 ∑𝒊=𝟏(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ )(𝒚𝒊 − 𝒀
̅ ) 𝑺𝒙,𝒚
𝒃 = 𝒏 = = 𝟐
∑𝒊=𝟏 𝒚𝟐𝒊 − 𝒏𝒀̅𝟐 ̅ )𝟐
∑𝒏𝒊=𝟏(𝒚𝒊 − 𝒀 𝑺𝒚

𝑺𝒙,𝒚 𝑺 𝑺
̅−
𝑳𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕: 𝒙 = 𝒂′ + 𝒃′ 𝒚 = 𝑿 ̅ + 𝒙,𝒚 𝒚 𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝒙 − 𝑿
𝒀 ̅ = 𝒙,𝒚 (𝒚 − 𝒀
̅)
𝑺𝒚𝟐 𝟐
𝑺𝒚 𝑺𝟐𝒚

 𝒃𝒃′ = 𝒓𝟐𝒙,𝒚

𝑺𝒙 𝑺𝒚
 𝒓𝒙,𝒚 = 𝒃 = 𝒃′
𝑺𝒚 𝑺𝒙

𝒃𝒃′
 𝒓(𝒂+𝒃𝒙,𝒂′ +𝒃′ 𝒚) = 𝒓
|𝒃𝒃′ | 𝒙,𝒚

 𝑫𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 ∶ 𝑪𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔

𝒒𝒖’𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒅é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍’𝒂𝒋𝒖𝒔𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 : 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝑫 𝒅𝒆 𝒀 𝒆𝒏 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝑫′ 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 𝒆𝒏 𝒀

 𝑫 𝒆𝒕 𝑫′ 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒖𝒆𝒔 ⟹ 𝒊𝒍 𝒆𝒙𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒙𝒂𝒄𝒕𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒙 𝒆𝒕 𝒚

𝑳′𝒊𝒏𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒙 𝒆𝒕 𝒚
𝒐𝒖
′
𝑳 𝒂𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒓é𝒄𝒊𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒙 𝒆𝒕 𝒚
 𝑫 ⊥ 𝑫′ ⟹
𝒐𝒖
𝒏
∑ ̅ )(𝒚𝒊 − 𝒀
(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ ) = 𝟎 (𝒄. ­à­𝒅. 𝑺𝒙,𝒚 = 𝟎)
{ 𝒊=𝟏

 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝑫 𝒆𝒕 𝑫′ 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒏𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔. 𝑪′ 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍.

𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔 𝒃 𝒆𝒕 𝒃′ 𝒅𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒔𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒖𝒊 𝒅𝒆
𝒏 ′ ′
∑ (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ ) ⟹ { 𝒔 𝒊𝒍 𝒆𝒙𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒙𝒂𝒄𝒕𝒆 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒃𝒃 =′ 𝟏
̅ )(𝒚𝒊 − 𝒀
𝒊=𝟏 𝒔𝒊 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕è𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔, 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒃𝒃 = 𝟎

𝓮 • 𝑨𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒅’𝒂𝒋𝒖𝒔𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 ∶

127 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝑳𝒂 𝒎é𝒕𝒉𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é𝒔 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 « 𝒎𝒆𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆 » 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆

𝒀 𝒆𝒕 𝑿. 𝑪𝒆𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕, 𝒊𝒍 𝒔𝒆 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒖𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒏𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒊𝒔

𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒃𝒐𝒍𝒆. 𝑫𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔, 𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒀 𝒆𝒕 𝑿 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 ê𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒆 𝒀 ≅ 𝒂 + 𝒃𝑿𝟐 . 𝑵𝒐𝒖𝒔

𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒗𝒐𝒊𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒃𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒂 𝒆𝒕 𝒃 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔.

𝑵𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒕𝒉𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒖𝒏 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒈𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔.

𝑳’𝒊𝒅é𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆: 𝒏𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒔 é𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒖𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒔é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 (𝑼, 𝑽).

𝑼 𝒆𝒕 𝑽 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆: 𝑼 = 𝑿𝟐 𝒆𝒕 𝑽 = 𝒀𝟐 . 𝑪𝒆𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒊𝒇𝒊𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍’𝒐𝒏 𝒂

𝒖𝒊 = 𝒙𝟐𝒊 𝒆𝒕 𝒗𝒊 = 𝒚𝟐𝒊 . 𝑷𝒖𝒊𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒀 ≅ 𝒂 + 𝒃𝑿𝟐 , 𝒊𝒍 𝒆𝒏 𝒅é𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒍𝒆 𝑽 ≅ 𝒂 + 𝒃𝑼 .

𝑵𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒏𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒆𝒏é𝒔 à 𝒖𝒏 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑽 𝒆𝒏 𝑼. 𝑵𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒐𝒏𝒔

𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒂 𝒆𝒕 𝒃 à 𝒍’𝒂𝒊𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒕𝒉𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é𝒔.

𝓯 • 𝑪𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒈𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒖𝒔𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶

É𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝑪𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒈𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 É𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆

𝒀 = 𝜶𝑿𝒏 𝑼 = 𝐥𝐧 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝑽 = 𝐥𝐧 𝒀 𝑽 = 𝒏𝑼 + 𝐥𝐧 𝜶
𝒀 = 𝒂 + 𝒃𝑿𝒏 𝑼 = 𝑿𝒏 𝒆𝒕 𝑽 = 𝒀 𝑽 = 𝒂 + 𝒃𝑼
𝒀 = 𝜶𝒆𝜷𝑿 𝑼 = 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝑽 = 𝐥𝐧 𝒀 𝑽 = 𝜷𝑼 + 𝐥𝐧 𝜶
𝒀 = 𝒂 + 𝒃 𝐥𝐧 𝑿 𝑼 = 𝐥𝐧 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝑽 = 𝒀 𝑽 = 𝒂 + 𝒃𝑼
𝒃 𝟏 𝑽 = 𝒂 + 𝒃𝑼
𝒀 =𝒂+ 𝑼 = 𝒆𝒕 𝑽 = 𝒀
𝑿 𝑿
𝓰 • 𝑨𝒋𝒖𝒔𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶

 𝑺𝒊 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒇, 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒈𝒏é𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒈 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆

𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆.

 𝑺𝒊 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒇, 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒈𝒏é𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒈 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆

𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆.

 𝑺𝒊 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒏𝒖𝒍 𝒐𝒖 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒛é𝒓𝒐, 𝒊𝒍 𝒏’𝒚 𝒂 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆

𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆. 𝑶𝒏 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒄𝒆𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒗𝒐𝒊𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒏­𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒖𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆

𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒖𝒍.

𝓱 • 𝑬𝒙𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆 ∶

𝑶𝒏 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝟗 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒓𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍’𝒂𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝟏𝟗𝟖𝟐 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅’𝒐𝒇𝒇𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅’𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒐𝒊

(𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒓𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒐𝒊𝒔 𝒅𝒖𝒓𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 à 𝒑𝒍𝒆𝒊𝒏 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔) 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅’𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒐𝒊 (𝒅é𝒑𝒐𝒔é𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓

𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒐𝒊, 𝒊𝒎𝒎é𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔, à 𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒅’𝒖𝒏 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒐𝒊

128 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒅𝒖𝒓𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 à 𝒑𝒍𝒆𝒊𝒏 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔). 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎é𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝒎𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒓𝒔.
𝑶𝒇𝒇𝒓𝒆𝒔 : 𝑿 𝟔𝟏 𝟔𝟔, 𝟕 𝟕𝟓, 𝟖 𝟕𝟖, 𝟔 𝟖𝟐, 𝟖 𝟖𝟕, 𝟐 𝟕𝟔, 𝟐 𝟖𝟎, 𝟏 𝟕𝟒, 𝟓
𝑫𝒆𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒔 : 𝒀 𝟐𝟎𝟑𝟒 𝟐𝟎𝟎𝟑, 𝟖 𝟏𝟗𝟔𝟒, 𝟓 𝟏𝟗𝟐𝟖, 𝟐 𝟏𝟖𝟖𝟓, 𝟑 𝟏𝟖𝟔𝟕, 𝟏 𝟏𝟗𝟑𝟔, 𝟐 𝟏𝟖𝟗𝟎, 𝟑 𝟏𝟗𝟔𝟏, 𝟐

2037 Offres et demandes d'emploi (janvier-sept 1982)

2027
2017
2007
1997
1987
1977
1967
1957
[𝒚𝟑 − (𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝟑) > 𝟎]
1947
1937
1927
1917
1907 y = -6,803x + 2457
1897 [𝒚𝟖 − (𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝟖) < 𝟎] r = −0, 9731
1887
1877
1867
61 66 71 76 81 86

𝓑– 𝟑 • 𝑨𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒚𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 ∶

𝓪 • 𝑺𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é𝒔 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 ∶

𝒏
̅ )𝟐 = 𝒏𝑺𝟐𝒚
𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é𝒔 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é : 𝑺𝑪𝑻 = ∑(𝒚𝒊 − 𝒀
𝒊=𝟏

𝑬𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒀.

𝒏
𝑺𝑪𝑻 𝟏
𝑳𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 ê𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 : 𝑽𝑻 = ̅ )𝟐
= 𝑺𝟐𝒚 = ∑(𝒚𝒊 − 𝒀
𝒏 𝒏
𝒊=𝟏

𝓫 • 𝑺𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é𝒔 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒒𝒖é𝒔 𝒐𝒖 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒓é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏:

𝒏
𝟐
̅)
𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é𝒔 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒒𝒖é𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é : 𝑺𝑪𝑬 = ∑((𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 ) − 𝒀
𝒊=𝟏

𝑬𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒀 𝒅𝒖𝒆 à 𝒔𝒂 𝒓é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝑿

𝒏
𝑺𝑪𝑬 𝟏
𝑳𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒒𝒖é𝒆 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 ê𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 : 𝑽𝑬 = ̅ )𝟐
= ∑((𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 ) − 𝒀
𝒏 𝒏
𝒊=𝟏

𝓬 • 𝑺𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒓é𝒔𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔 (𝒐𝒖 𝒓é𝒔𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆) ∶

𝒏

𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é𝒔 𝒓é𝒔𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é : 𝑺𝑪𝑹 = ∑[𝒚𝒊 − (𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 )]𝟐
𝒊=𝟏

𝑬𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒀 𝒏𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒒𝒖é𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒅è𝒍𝒆.

129 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒏
𝑺𝑪𝑹 𝟏
𝑳𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒓é𝒔𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 ê𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 : 𝑽𝑹 = = ∑[𝒚𝒊 − (𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 )]𝟐
𝒏 𝒏
𝒊=𝟏

𝓭 • 𝑳’é𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅’𝒂𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒚𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 ∶

𝑺𝑪𝑻 = 𝑺𝑪𝑬 + 𝑺𝑪𝑹 𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝑽𝑻 = 𝑽𝑬 + 𝑽𝑹

 𝑷𝒓𝒆𝒖𝒗𝒆 ∶
𝒏 𝒏
̅ − (𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 ))]𝟐
̅ )𝟐 = ∑[(𝒚𝒊 − (𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 )) − (𝒀
𝑺𝑪𝑻 = ∑(𝒚𝒊 − 𝒀
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝒏 𝒏 𝒏
𝟐 𝟐
̅ ) − 𝟐 ∑(𝒚𝒊 − (𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 ))(𝒀
= ∑(𝒚𝒊 − (𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 )) + ∑((𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 ) − 𝒀 ̅ − (𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 ))
⏟
𝒊=𝟏 ⏟
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏
𝑺𝑪𝑹 𝑺𝑪𝑬

𝒏
̅ − (𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 ))
𝑺𝑪𝑻 = 𝑺𝑪𝑹 + 𝑺𝑪𝑬 − 𝟐 ∑(𝒚𝒊 − (𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 ))(𝒀
𝒊=𝟏

𝒏 𝒏

𝑶𝒓 ∑ (𝒚𝒊 − ( 𝒂 ̅−( 𝒂
⏟ + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 )) (𝒀 ̅ − 𝒃𝑿
⏟ + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 )) = ∑(𝒚𝒊 − (𝒀 ̅ + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 ))(𝒀
̅ − (𝒀
̅ − 𝒃𝑿
̅ + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 ))
𝒊=𝟏 ̅ −𝒃𝑿
𝒀 ̅ ̅ −𝒃𝑿
𝒀 ̅ 𝒊=𝟏

𝒏 𝒏 𝒏
̅ ) − 𝒃(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
= ∑((𝒚𝒊 − 𝒀 ̅ ))(−𝒃(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
̅ )) = −𝒃 ∑(𝒚𝒊 − 𝒀
̅ )(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
̅ ) + 𝒃 ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
̅ )𝟐 𝟐

𝒊=𝟏 ⏟
𝒊=𝟏 ⏟
𝒊=𝟏
𝒏𝑺𝒙,𝒚 𝒏𝑺𝟐
𝒙

𝑺𝒙,𝒚
= 𝒏𝒃[𝒃𝑺𝟐𝒙 − 𝑺𝒙,𝒚 ] = 𝒏𝒃 [( 𝟐 ) 𝑺𝟐𝒙 − 𝑺𝒙,𝒚 ]
⏟ 𝑺𝒙
𝟎

𝒏
̅ − (𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 )) = 𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝑺𝑪𝑻 = 𝑺𝑪𝑬 + 𝑺𝑪𝑹
𝑫′ 𝒐ù ∑(𝒚𝒊 − (𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 ))(𝒀
𝒊=𝟏

𝓮 • 𝑫é𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆/𝑪𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒅é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶

𝑳𝒂 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒀 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒒𝒖é𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒅è𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒋𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕

𝑺𝑪𝑬 𝑽𝑬 𝑺𝑪𝑹 𝑽𝑹
𝒅𝒆 𝒅é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝒓𝟐𝒙,𝒚 = = =𝟏− =𝟏− ∈ [𝟎, 𝟏]
𝑺𝑪𝑻 𝑽𝑻 𝑺𝑪𝑻 𝑽𝑻
 𝑷𝒓𝒆𝒖𝒗𝒆 ∶
𝒏 𝒏 𝒏
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
̅ )𝟐 = ∑((𝒀
𝑽𝑬 = ∑((𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 ) − 𝒀 ̅ − 𝒃𝑿 ̅ )𝟐 = ∑(𝒀
̅ + 𝒃𝒙𝒊 ) − 𝒀 ̅ + 𝒃(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
̅) − 𝒀
̅ )𝟐
𝒏 𝒏 𝒏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

130 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒏 𝒏 𝟐
𝟏 𝟏 𝑺 𝑺𝟐 𝑺𝟐 𝑺𝟐
= ∑(𝒃(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ ))𝟐 = 𝒃𝟐 ( ∑(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
̅ )𝟐 ) = ( 𝒙,𝒚 ) 𝑺𝟐𝒙 = ( 𝒙,𝒚 ) 𝑺𝟐𝒙 = 𝒙,𝒚 = ( 𝒙,𝒚 ) 𝑺𝟐𝒚
𝒏 𝒏 𝑺𝟐𝒙 𝑺𝟒𝒙 𝑺𝟐𝒙 𝑺𝟐𝒚 𝑺𝟐𝒙
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝑺𝑪𝑬
𝑽𝑬 𝑺𝑪𝑬 𝑺𝑪𝑻 − 𝑺𝑪𝑹 𝑺𝑪𝑹
𝑽𝑬 = 𝒓𝟐𝒙,𝒚 𝑺𝟐𝒚 = 𝒓𝟐𝒙,𝒚 𝑽𝑻 ⟺ 𝒓𝟐𝒙,𝒚 = = 𝒏 = = 𝟏−
𝑽𝑻 𝑺𝑪𝑻 𝑺𝑪𝑻 𝑺𝑪𝑻 𝑺𝑪𝑻
𝒏

 𝑺𝑪𝑹 = 𝑺𝑪𝑻(𝟏 − 𝒓𝟐𝒙,𝒚 )

 𝑽𝑹 = 𝑽𝑻(𝟏 − 𝒓𝟐𝒙,𝒚 )

 𝑺𝑪𝑬 = 𝒏𝒃𝟐 𝑺𝟐𝒙 = 𝒏𝒃𝑺𝒙,𝒚

 𝑽𝑬 = 𝒃𝟐 𝑺𝟐𝒙 = 𝒃𝑺𝒙,𝒚

 𝑷𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒓𝟐𝒙,𝒚 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝟏, 𝒎𝒆𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍’𝒂𝒋𝒖𝒔𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕, 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝑿

𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒗𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒑𝒓é𝒄𝒊𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒀.

 𝑷𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒓𝟐𝒙,𝒚 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝟎, 𝒎𝒂𝒖𝒗𝒂𝒊𝒔 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍’𝒂𝒋𝒖𝒔𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕, 𝑿 𝒏’𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒅’𝒊𝒏𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔

𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒀.

𝑨𝒖 𝒎𝒆𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝑨𝒖 𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒔

𝑺𝑪𝑹 = 𝟎 𝑺𝑪𝑬 = 𝟎
𝑺𝑪𝑻 = 𝑺𝑪𝑬 𝑺𝑪𝑻 = 𝑺𝑪𝑹
𝒓𝟐𝒙,𝒚 = 𝟏 𝒓𝟐𝒙,𝒚 = 𝟎
𝑳𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒅è𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒕, 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒅è𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒎𝒂𝒖𝒗𝒂𝒊𝒔, 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒆𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆
𝒓é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒖 𝒏𝒖𝒂𝒈𝒆. 𝒑𝒓é𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒀 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒔𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆.

𝓑– 𝟒 • 𝑹𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶

𝑫𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒏 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝒀 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒊é𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒏­𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆, 𝒐𝒖 𝒔𝒊 𝒍’𝒖𝒏𝒆

é𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆, 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒓 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 ?

𝓪 • 𝑫é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶

𝑫𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒏 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒊𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒔𝒆 𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒂𝒖 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆, 𝒆𝒏 𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒔𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 (𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒖 𝐥𝐧 … ) 𝒔𝒊 𝒏𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒏 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕 𝒖𝒏 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 :

𝟏 𝒓 ̅𝒊 − 𝒀
̅ )𝟐
∑𝒊=𝟏 𝒏𝒊⦁ (𝒀
 𝒅𝒆 𝒀 𝒆𝒏 𝑿 ∶ 𝜼𝟐𝒀/𝑿 = 𝒏
𝑺𝟐𝒚

𝟏 𝒔 ̅ )𝟐
̅𝒋 − 𝑿
∑𝒋=𝟏 𝒏⦁𝒋 (𝑿
 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 𝒆𝒏 𝒀 ∶ 𝜼𝟐𝑿/𝒀 = 𝒏
𝑺𝟐𝒙

𝓫 • 𝑷𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é𝒔 ∶

131 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
 𝜼𝟐𝒀/𝑿 ≠ 𝜼𝟐𝑿/𝒀

 𝟎 ≤ 𝒓𝟐𝒙,𝒚 ≤ 𝜼𝟐𝒀/𝑿 ≤ 𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝟎 ≤ 𝒓𝟐𝒙,𝒚 ≤ 𝜼𝟐𝑿/𝒀 ≤ 𝟏

 𝜼𝟐𝒀/𝑿 = 𝟎 ⟹ 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔

 𝜼𝟐𝒀/𝑿 = 𝟏 ⟹ 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓é𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒃𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏

Ecole Nationale d'Administration

Concours d'Entrée au Cycle Supérieur (Économie&Gestion)
Candidats Économistes et Gestionnaires
Samedi 5 Janvier 2013

Exercice 9 (5 points = 1+2+1+1) :

ÉNONCÉ
𝑵𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 (𝒏 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔)𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔 à

𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝒀 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎é𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒖 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒏𝐨 𝟒 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒕 :

𝑿 𝒀 𝑿𝟐 𝒀𝟐 𝑿𝒀
𝟏𝟔 𝟐𝟎 𝟐𝟓𝟔 𝟒𝟎𝟎 𝟑𝟐𝟎
𝟏𝟖 𝟐𝟒 𝟑𝟐𝟒 𝟓𝟕𝟔 𝟒𝟑𝟐
𝟐𝟑 𝟐𝟖 𝟓𝟐𝟗 𝟕𝟖𝟒 𝟔𝟒𝟒
𝟐𝟒 𝟐𝟐 𝟓𝟕𝟔 𝟒𝟖𝟒 𝟓𝟐𝟖
𝟐𝟖 𝟑𝟐 𝟕𝟖𝟒 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟒 𝟖𝟗𝟔
𝟐𝟗 𝟐𝟖 𝟖𝟒𝟏 𝟕𝟖𝟒 𝟖𝟏𝟐
𝟐𝟔 𝟑𝟐 𝟔𝟕𝟔 𝟏𝟐𝟐𝟒 𝟖𝟑𝟐
𝟑𝟏 𝟑𝟔 𝟗𝟔𝟏 𝟏𝟐𝟗𝟔 𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟔
𝟑𝟐 𝟒𝟏 𝟏𝟎𝟐𝟒 𝟏𝟔𝟖𝟏 𝟏𝟑𝟏𝟐
𝟑𝟒 𝟒𝟏 𝟏𝟏𝟓𝟔 𝟏𝟔𝟖𝟏 𝟏𝟑𝟗𝟒
∑ 𝟐𝟔𝟏 𝟑𝟎𝟒 𝟕𝟏𝟐𝟕 𝟗𝟗𝟑𝟒 𝟖𝟐𝟖𝟔
Questions :
1) 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝒀
2) 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒍’é𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕 𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆
3) 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝑪𝒐𝒗(𝑿, 𝒀)
4) 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒕é 𝑹

Corrigé

1) ̅ = 𝟏 ∑𝒏𝒊=𝟏 𝒙𝒊 = 𝟐𝟔𝟏 = 𝟐𝟔, 𝟏 ∙ 𝒀

∙ 𝑿 ̅ = 𝟏 ∑𝒏𝒊=𝟏 𝒚𝒊 = 𝟑𝟎𝟒 = 𝟑𝟎, 𝟒
𝒏 𝟏𝟎 𝒏 𝟏𝟎
𝟏 𝟏 𝟕𝟏𝟐𝟕
2) ̅ )𝟐 = ∑𝒏𝒊=𝟏 𝒙𝟐𝒊 − 𝑿
∙ 𝑺𝟐𝒙 = 𝒏 ∑𝒏𝒊=𝟏(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅𝟐 = − (𝟐𝟔, 𝟏)𝟐 = 𝟑𝟏, 𝟒𝟗 ⇒ 𝑺𝒙 = √𝟑𝟏, 𝟒𝟗 = 𝟓, 𝟔𝟏𝟏
𝒏 𝟏𝟎

132 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒏 𝒏
𝟏 𝟏 𝟗𝟗𝟑𝟒
∙ 𝑺𝟐𝒚 = ∑(𝒚𝒊 − 𝒀 ̅ )𝟐 = ∑ 𝒚𝟐𝒊 − 𝒀
̅𝟐 = − (𝟑𝟎, 𝟒)𝟐 = 𝟒𝟗, 𝟐𝟒 ⇒ 𝑺𝒚 = √𝟒𝟗, 𝟐𝟒 = 𝟕, 𝟎𝟏𝟕
𝒏 𝒏 𝟏𝟎
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝟏
3) 𝑺𝒙,𝒚 = 𝒏 ∑𝒏𝒊=𝟏(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ ) = 𝟏 ∑𝒏𝒊=𝟏 𝒙𝒊 𝒚𝒊 − 𝑿
̅ )(𝒚𝒊 − 𝒀 ̅𝒀̅ = 𝟖𝟐𝟖𝟔 − (𝟐𝟔, 𝟏 × 𝟑𝟎, 𝟒) = 𝟑𝟓, 𝟏𝟔
𝒏 𝟏𝟎
𝑺𝒙,𝒚 𝟑𝟓,𝟏𝟔
4) 𝒓𝒙,𝒚 = 𝑺 = 𝟓,𝟔𝟏𝟏×𝟕,𝟎𝟏𝟕 = 𝟎, 𝟖𝟗
𝒙 𝑺𝒚

Ecole Nationale d'Administration

Concours d'Entrée au Cycle Supérieur (Économie&Gestion)
Candidats Économistes et Gestionnaires
Jeudi 29 octobre 2015

Exercice 10 (5 points = 2+1+1+0,5+0,5) :

ÉNONCÉ
𝑼𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒗𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒂𝒃𝒓𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅’𝒖𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒕 (𝒙). 𝑬𝒍𝒍𝒆 é𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒊𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒆𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆

𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒕, 𝒂𝒇𝒊𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒅é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒍𝒖𝒊 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒓𝒂 𝒅𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒙𝒊𝒎𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒓

𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆.

𝑫𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒇𝒊𝒈𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒓é𝒔𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒔 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒒𝒖ê𝒕𝒆 𝒓é𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒔é𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒅é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒓

𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒆𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆 (𝒅)𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒕 𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒑(𝒙)𝒆𝒏 𝑫𝑻.
𝒑(𝒙) 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝟐𝟓𝟎 𝟑𝟎𝟎 𝟑𝟓𝟎 𝟒𝟓𝟎 𝟓𝟎𝟎
𝒅(𝒙) 𝟓𝟓𝟎 𝟒𝟑𝟎 𝟒𝟎𝟎 𝟑𝟏𝟎 𝟐𝟔𝟎 𝟐𝟏𝟎
1) 𝑹𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒖𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔. 𝑫é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒍’é𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆
𝒅𝒆 𝑴𝒂𝒚𝒆𝒓. 𝑷𝒍𝒂𝒄𝒆𝒓 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆.
2) 𝑫é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒍’𝒂𝒋𝒖𝒔𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒅 𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒑(𝒙)𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒆 ∶
𝒅(𝒙) = 𝒂 + 𝒃𝒑(𝒙)𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒕𝒉𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é𝒆𝒔.
𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒅é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏.
3) 𝑶𝒏 𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕 à 𝒅é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒖𝒏 𝒂𝒋𝒖𝒔𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒅(𝒙)𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒑(𝒙)
𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒆 ∶ 𝒅(𝒙) = 𝒃[𝒑(𝒙)]𝒂 .
𝑫é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒂 𝒆𝒕 𝒃 . 𝑶𝒏 𝒓𝒂𝒎è𝒏𝒆𝒓𝒂 à 𝒖𝒏 𝒂𝒋𝒖𝒔𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒏 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝑽 = 𝑳𝒏 (𝒅(𝒙));
𝑩 = 𝑳𝒏 (𝒃)𝒆𝒕 𝑼 = 𝑳𝒏(𝒑(𝒙)).
𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝑼 𝒆𝒕 𝑽 𝒑𝒖𝒊𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆
𝒅é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏. 𝑰𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓é𝒕𝒆𝒓 𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒓𝒏𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕.
4) 𝑳𝒆𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒂𝒋𝒖𝒔𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒋𝒖𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒙
5) 𝑬𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒆𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆, 𝒔𝒊 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒇𝒊𝒙é à 𝟒𝟎𝟎 𝑫𝑻.
Corrigé
1) 𝑶𝒏 𝒔é𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒖𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝟑 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒄𝒖𝒏. 𝑶𝒏 𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕

133 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏 (𝑪𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒗𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆)

𝑮𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆 𝟏 ∶
𝒑(𝒙) 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝟐𝟓𝟎 𝟑𝟎𝟎 𝟐𝟎𝟎 + 𝟐𝟓𝟎 + 𝟑𝟎𝟎
̅𝑰 =
𝑿 = 𝟐𝟓𝟎
𝒅(𝒙) 𝟓𝟓𝟎 𝟒𝟑𝟎 𝟒𝟎𝟎 { 𝟑 ⇒ 𝑮𝟏 = (𝟐𝟓𝟎 ; 𝟒𝟔𝟎)
𝟓𝟓𝟎 + 𝟒𝟑𝟎 + 𝟒𝟎𝟎
̅
𝒀𝑰 = = 𝟒𝟔𝟎
𝟑
𝑮𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆 𝟐 ∶
𝒑(𝒙) 𝟑𝟓𝟎 𝟒𝟓𝟎 𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝟑𝟓𝟎 + 𝟒𝟓𝟎 + 𝟓𝟎𝟎
̅ 𝑰𝑰 =
𝑿 = 𝟒𝟑𝟑, 𝟑𝟑
𝒅(𝒙) 𝟑𝟏𝟎 𝟐𝟔𝟎 𝟐𝟏𝟎 { 𝟑 ⇒ 𝑮𝟐 = (𝟒𝟑𝟑, 𝟑𝟑 ; 𝟐𝟔𝟎)
𝟑𝟏𝟎 + 𝟐𝟔𝟎 + 𝟐𝟏𝟎
̅ 𝑰𝑰 =
𝒀 = 𝟐𝟔𝟎
𝟑
𝑳’é𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑴𝒂𝒚𝒆𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒅𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒓 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝑮𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝑮𝟐 :

̅ 𝑰𝑰 − 𝒀
𝒀 ̅𝑰 −𝟐𝟎𝟎
̅𝑰 = (
(𝑮𝑰 , 𝑮𝑰𝑰 ): 𝒚 − 𝒀 ̅ 𝑰 ) ⟺ 𝒚 = 𝟒𝟔𝟎 +
) (𝒙 − 𝑿 (𝒙 − 𝟐𝟓𝟎) ⟺ 𝒚 = −𝟏, 𝟎𝟗𝟏𝒙 + 𝟕𝟑𝟐, 𝟕𝟑
̅ ̅
𝑿𝑰𝑰 − 𝑿𝑰 𝟏𝟖𝟑, 𝟑𝟑

550 Méthode de Mayer

500
450
400
350
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550

2)

𝑨𝒋𝒖𝒔𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒕𝒉𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é𝒔, 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍’𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔

̅ )(𝒚𝒊 − 𝒀
∑𝟔𝒊=𝟏(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅)
𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒆 ∶ 𝒅(𝒙) = 𝒂 + 𝒃𝒑(𝒙), 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄, 𝒃 = ̅ − 𝒃𝑿
=– 𝟏, 𝟎𝟒𝟑𝟓 𝒆𝒕 𝒂 = 𝒀 ̅ = 𝟕𝟑𝟐, 𝟕𝟑
̅ )𝟐
∑𝟔𝒊=𝟏(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿

̅ )(𝒚𝒊 − 𝒀
∑𝟔𝒊=𝟏(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅)
𝑳𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍 𝒅𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒆: 𝒓𝒙,𝒚 =
̅ )𝟐 ∑𝟔𝒊=𝟏(𝒚𝒊 − 𝒀
√∑𝟔𝒊=𝟏(𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ )𝟐

𝑫𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒓é𝒔𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒕 ∶ 𝒓𝒙,𝒚 = −𝟎, 𝟗𝟕 𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊 𝒙 𝒆𝒕 𝒚 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒖 𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒓𝟐𝒙,𝒚 = 𝟗𝟒%

𝒄′ 𝒆𝒔𝒕­à­𝒅𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝟗𝟒% 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒚 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒒𝒖é𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 ∶ 𝒅(𝒙) = 𝒂 + 𝒃𝒑(𝒙)

600
550
500
450
400
350
300
250
200
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550

134 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
3) 𝒚 = 𝒃𝒙𝒂 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒍𝒏(𝒚) = 𝒍𝒏(𝒃) + 𝒂 𝒍𝒏(𝒙) 𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒆 𝒖 = 𝒍𝒏(𝒙) ; 𝒗 = 𝒍𝒏(𝒚) 𝒆𝒕 𝑩 = 𝒍𝒏(𝒃)
𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒆 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 ∶ 𝒗 = 𝒂 𝒖 + 𝑩
𝒖 = 𝑳𝒏(𝒑(𝒙)) 𝟓, 𝟐𝟗𝟖 𝟓, 𝟓𝟐𝟏 𝟓, 𝟕𝟎𝟒 𝟓, 𝟖𝟓𝟖 𝟔, 𝟏𝟎𝟗 𝟔, 𝟐𝟏𝟓 ̅ = 𝟓, 𝟕𝟖𝟒 ; 𝑽
𝑼 ̅ = 𝟓, 𝟖𝟑𝟓 ; 𝑺𝒖 = 𝟎, 𝟑𝟏𝟖;
𝒗 = 𝑳𝒏 (𝒅(𝒙)) 𝟔, 𝟑𝟏 𝟔, 𝟎𝟔𝟒 𝟓, 𝟗𝟗𝟏 𝟓, 𝟕𝟑𝟕 𝟓, 𝟓𝟔𝟏 𝟓, 𝟑𝟒𝟕 𝑺𝒗 = 𝟎, 𝟑𝟐𝟑
𝟔 𝟔 𝟔 𝟔 𝟔

∑(𝒖𝒊 − 𝑼 ̅ )𝟐 = 𝟎, 𝟔𝟎𝟖 ; ∑(𝒖𝒊 − 𝑼 ̅ )𝟐 ̅ )(𝒗𝒊 − 𝑽

= 𝟎, 𝟔𝟎𝟖 ; ∑ 𝒖𝒊 𝒗𝒊 = 𝟐𝟎𝟏, 𝟖𝟗𝟑 ; ∑(𝒖𝒊 − 𝑼 ̅ ) = ∑ 𝒖𝒊 𝒗𝒊 − 𝒏𝑼
̅𝑽̅ = −𝟎, 𝟔𝟏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏
𝟔 𝟔
̅ )(𝒗𝒊 −
∑𝟔𝒊=𝟏(𝒖𝒊 − 𝑼 ̅)
𝑽
̅ )𝟐 = 𝒏𝑺𝟐𝒖 = 𝟎, 𝟔𝟎𝟖 ; ∑(𝒗𝒊 − 𝑽
∑(𝒖𝒊 − 𝑼 ̅ )𝟐 = 𝒏𝑺𝟐𝒗 = 𝟎, 𝟔𝟐𝟓 ; 𝒂 = =– 𝟏, 𝟎𝟎𝟑𝟐
𝟔
∑𝒊=𝟏(𝒖𝒊 − 𝑼̅ )𝟐
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏
𝑺𝒖,𝒗
̅ − 𝒃𝑼
𝑩=𝑽 ̅ = 𝟏𝟏, 𝟔𝟑𝟕𝟔 ; 𝑩 = 𝒍𝒏(𝒃) ⇒ 𝒃 = 𝒆𝑩 = 𝟏𝟏𝟑𝟐𝟕𝟖, 𝟖𝟎𝟔; 𝒓 = =– 𝟎. 𝟗𝟖𝟗𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝒓𝟐 = 𝟗𝟕. 𝟖%
𝑺𝒖 𝑺𝒗

𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒖𝒓𝒂 ∶ 𝒗 = −𝟏, 𝟎𝟎𝟑𝟐 𝒖 + 𝟏𝟏, 𝟔𝟑𝟕𝟔𝒆𝒕 𝒚 = 𝟏𝟏𝟑𝟐𝟕𝟖, 𝟖𝟎𝟔𝒙−𝟏,𝟎𝟎𝟑𝟐

𝒓𝟐 = 𝟗𝟕. 𝟖% ⇒ 𝟗𝟕, 𝟖% 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒚 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒒𝒖é𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒖𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 ∶

𝒑𝒖𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 ∶ 𝒚 = 𝒃𝒙𝒂

4) 𝑶𝒏 𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒓𝒏𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒅é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒐𝒄𝒊é à 𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆

𝒑𝒖𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 é𝒍𝒆𝒗é 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒖𝒊 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 ∶ 𝒚 = 𝒂𝒙 + 𝒃

𝑷𝒓é𝒗𝒊𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒙 = 𝟒𝟎𝟎 ∶ 𝑰𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒅é 𝒅’𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒖𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆

𝒚 = 𝟏𝟏𝟑𝟐𝟕𝟖, 𝟖𝒙– 𝟏, 𝟎𝟎𝟑𝟐 ⇒ 𝒚 = 𝟏𝟏𝟑𝟐𝟕𝟖, 𝟖𝟎𝟔 × (𝟒𝟎𝟎−𝟏,𝟎𝟎𝟑𝟐 ) = 𝟐𝟕𝟖

Exercice 11 :
ÉNONCÉ
𝑼𝒏𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒄𝒊é𝒕é 𝒗𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒂𝒄𝒉𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒏é𝒆𝒔 à 𝒄𝒆𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒔.

𝑳𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒎𝒂𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒇𝒊𝒙é à 𝟏𝟎 𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒐𝒔. 𝑳𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒑𝒓é𝒗𝒊𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒚 𝒅𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒄𝒉𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒔

𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒖𝒆𝒔, 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒔é, 𝒆𝒏 𝒎𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒅’𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒐𝒔, 𝒙. 𝑼𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒒𝒖ê𝒕𝒆 𝒂𝒖𝒑𝒓è𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔

𝒑𝒐𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒍𝒔 𝒂 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒓é𝒔𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔 ∶

𝒙𝒊 𝟏𝟎 𝟏𝟐, 𝟓 𝟏𝟓 𝟏𝟕, 𝟓 𝟐𝟎 𝟐𝟓
𝒚𝒊 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟖𝟓 𝟔𝟐 𝟒𝟐 𝟐𝟖 𝟏𝟏
1) 𝑹𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒊𝒙 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒖 𝒏𝒖𝒂𝒈𝒆.
𝒚𝒊
2) 𝑶𝒏 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒆 𝒛𝒊 = 𝐥𝐧 ( ) . 𝑫𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒛𝒊 𝒂𝒓𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒖 𝒎𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒊è𝒎𝒆𝒍𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔
𝒙𝒊 −𝟔
𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒉𝒆.
3) 𝑫𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒆 é𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒛 𝒆𝒏 𝒙 ; 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒕
𝒂𝒓𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒔 𝒂𝒖 𝒎𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒊è𝒎𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒉𝒆.
4) 𝑬𝒏 𝒅é𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒉é𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒚 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒆 ∶ 𝒚 = 𝜶(𝒙 − 𝟔)𝒆𝜷𝒙

Corrigé
1)

135 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
Nombre de machines vendues en fonction du prix
proposé
115
100
85
70
55 y = -6,2x + 158
40 R² = 96,5%

25
10
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26

2)

𝒙𝒊 𝟏𝟎 𝟏𝟐, 𝟓 𝟏𝟓 𝟏𝟕, 𝟓 𝟐𝟎 𝟐𝟓
𝒚𝒊 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟖𝟓 𝟔𝟐 𝟒𝟐 𝟐𝟖 𝟏𝟏
𝒚𝒊 𝟑, 𝟐𝟏𝟗 𝟐, 𝟓𝟕𝟏 𝟏, 𝟗𝟑 𝟏, 𝟐𝟗𝟓 𝟎, 𝟔𝟗𝟑 −𝟎, 𝟓𝟒𝟕
𝒛𝒊 = 𝐥𝐧 ( )
𝒙𝒊 − 𝟔
3) 𝑶𝒏 𝒗𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒂𝒋𝒖𝒔𝒕𝒆𝒓 𝒛 𝒆𝒏 𝒙 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒆 : 𝒛 = 𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙 . 𝑬𝒏 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝑴𝑪𝑶 , 𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 ∶

𝒂=𝒁̅ − 𝒃𝑿
̅ = 𝟓, 𝟔𝟒𝟕 𝟔 𝟔 𝒏
𝟏 𝟏
{ 𝑺𝒙,𝒛 ̅ ̅
𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝑿 = ∑ 𝒙𝒊 = 𝟏𝟔, 𝟔𝟔𝟕; 𝒁 = ∑ 𝒛𝒊 = 𝟏, 𝟓𝟐𝟕 ; ∑ 𝒙𝟐𝒊 = 𝟏𝟖𝟏𝟐, 𝟓 ;
𝒃 = 𝟐 = −𝟎, 𝟐𝟒𝟓 𝟔 𝟔
𝑺𝒙 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝒏 𝒏 𝒏
𝟏 𝟏
𝑺𝟐𝒙 ̅ 𝟐 = 𝟐𝟒, 𝟑𝟎𝟔 ; ∑ 𝒙𝒊 𝒛𝒊 = 𝟏𝟐𝟏, 𝟓𝟐𝟓 ; 𝑺𝒙,𝒛 = ∑ 𝒙𝒊 𝒛𝒊 − 𝑿
= ∑ 𝒙𝟐𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅𝒁̅ = −𝟓, 𝟗𝟒𝟑 ⇒ 𝒛 = 𝟓, 𝟔𝟒𝟕 − 𝟎, 𝟐𝟒𝟓𝒙
𝟔 𝟔
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

3,5
3
2,5
2
1,5
z = -0,245x + 5,647
1
R² = 99,34%
0,5
0
-0,5
-1
10 15 20 25

𝒚
𝒛 = 𝐥𝐧 (𝒙−𝟔) 𝒚 𝒚
4) { ⇒ 𝐥𝐧 (𝒙−𝟔) = 𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙 ⇔ = 𝒆(𝒂+𝒃𝒙) ⇔ 𝒚 = (𝒙 − 𝟔)𝒆(𝒂+𝒃𝒙)
𝒙−𝟔
𝒛 = 𝒂 + 𝒃𝒙
𝜷
⏞
⏟𝒂 (𝒙 − 𝟔)𝒆 , 𝒐𝒓 𝒂 = 𝟓, 𝟔𝟒𝟕 𝒆𝒕 𝒃 = −𝟎, 𝟐𝟒𝟓 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝜶 = 𝒆𝟓,𝟔𝟒𝟕 = 𝟐𝟖𝟑, 𝟒𝟒 𝒆𝒕 𝜷 = −𝟎, 𝟐𝟒𝟓
⇔ 𝒚=𝒆 𝒃𝒙

𝜶
𝑪𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒍𝒖𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝒚 = 𝟐𝟖𝟑, 𝟒𝟒(𝒙 − 𝟔)𝒆−𝟎,𝟐𝟒𝟓𝒙

136 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014

𝓐– 𝟏 • 𝑰𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒅𝒖𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶

𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒔𝒒𝒖′ 𝒐𝒏 é𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒊𝒆 𝒔𝒊𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒏é𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔, 𝒊𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓

𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒆 𝒅′ 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒈𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆, 𝒔𝒚𝒏𝒕𝒉è𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒔𝒆𝒍𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒆𝒔

𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖′𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕é𝒆𝒔.

À 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆, 𝒐𝒏 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒇𝒊𝒍, 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒕 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒓é𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒓 𝒖𝒏

𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒇𝒊𝒍𝒔 𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒂î𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔,

𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔𝒒𝒖′𝒊𝒍 𝒆𝒏 𝒆𝒙𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆.

𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏, 𝒍′ 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒌𝒉𝒊­𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙. 𝑻𝒐𝒖𝒕𝒆𝒇𝒐𝒊𝒔, 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆

𝒊𝒍 𝒏′ 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒅′ 𝒖𝒔𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆, 𝒐𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒕 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔

𝒑𝒉𝒊­𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙, 𝑻 𝒅𝒆 𝑻𝒔𝒄𝒉𝒖𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒘 𝒆𝒕 𝑪 𝒅𝒆 𝑪𝒓𝒂𝒎é𝒓, 𝒍𝒊é𝒔 𝒂𝒖 𝒌𝒉𝒊­𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙. 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆𝒓𝒏𝒊𝒆𝒓𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔

𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝟏, 𝒆𝒕 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒅′ 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒆, 𝒄𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒇𝒂𝒄𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓

𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓é𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏.

𝓐– 𝟐 • 𝑫𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗é𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝑻𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒈𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 ∶

𝓪 • 𝑫𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗é𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝑺𝒊 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝒀 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔, 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗é𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒕𝒆

𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 (𝒙𝟏 , 𝒚𝟏 ), … (𝒙𝒊 , 𝒚𝒋 ), … , (𝒙𝒓 , 𝒚𝒔 ) 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒄𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒅

𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔.

𝓫 • 𝑫é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒇𝒊𝒍𝒔 ∶

𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒍𝒊è𝒎𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒇𝒊𝒍­𝒍𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒀 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔

à 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒙𝒍 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 (𝒄′𝒆𝒔𝒕­à­𝒅𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒖 𝒔𝒆𝒊𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔­𝒑𝒐𝒑𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝓒𝒍 𝒅𝒆 𝓒 𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒐𝒄𝒊é𝒆 à

𝒏𝒍𝟏 𝒏𝒍𝒋 𝒏𝒍𝒔
𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é). 𝑰𝒍 𝒔′𝒂𝒈𝒊𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔 ∶ { ,…, ,…, }
𝒏𝒍⦁ 𝒏𝒍⦁ 𝒏𝒍⦁

137 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒏𝟏𝒉 𝒏𝒊𝒉 𝒏𝒓𝒉
𝑶𝒏 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒇𝒂ç𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒈𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒉𝒊è𝒎𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒇𝒊𝒍­𝒄𝒐𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆 ∶ { ,…, ,…, }
𝒏⦁𝒉 𝒏⦁𝒉 𝒏⦁𝒉

𝓬 • 𝑻𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒈𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 ∶

𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗é𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕 ê𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑é𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒆 𝒅’𝒖𝒏 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒈𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆

𝑴𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒀 𝒚𝟏 𝒚𝟐 … 𝒚𝒋 … 𝒚𝒔 𝚺
𝑴𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝑿
𝒔
𝒏𝟏𝟏 𝒏𝟏𝟐 … 𝒏𝟏𝒋 … 𝒏𝟏𝒔
𝒏𝟏⦁ = ∑ 𝒏𝟏𝒋
𝒋=𝟏
𝒙𝟏 𝒔
𝒇𝟏𝟏 𝒇𝟏𝟐 … 𝒇𝟏𝒋 … 𝒇𝟏𝒔
𝒇𝟏⦁ = ∑ 𝒇𝟏𝒋
𝒋=𝟏
𝒔
𝒏𝟐𝟏 𝒏𝟐𝟐 … 𝒏𝟐𝒋 … 𝒏𝟐𝒔
𝒏𝟐⦁ = ∑ 𝒏𝟐𝒋
𝒋=𝟏
𝒙𝟐 𝒔
𝒇𝟐𝟏 𝒇𝟐𝟐 … 𝒇𝟐𝒋 … 𝒇𝟐𝒔
𝒇𝟐⦁ = ∑ 𝒇𝟐𝒋
𝒋=𝟏
⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮
𝒔
𝒏𝒊𝟏 𝒏𝒊𝟐 … 𝒏𝒊𝒋 … 𝒏𝒊𝒔
𝒏𝒊⦁ = ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋
𝒋=𝟏
𝒙𝒊 𝒔
𝒇𝒊𝟏 𝒇𝒊𝟐 … 𝒇𝒊𝒋 … 𝒇𝒊𝒔
𝒇𝒊⦁ = ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋
𝒋=𝟏
⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮
𝒔
𝒏𝒓𝟏 𝒏𝒓𝟐 … 𝒏𝒓𝒋 … 𝒏𝒓𝒔
𝒏𝒓⦁ = ∑ 𝒏𝒓𝒋
𝒋=𝟏
𝒙𝒓 𝒔
𝒇𝒓𝟏 𝒇𝒓𝟐 … 𝒇𝒓𝒋 … 𝒇𝒓𝒔
𝒇𝒓⦁ = ∑ 𝒇𝒓𝒋
𝒋=𝟏
𝒓 𝒔 𝒔 𝒓
𝒏⦁𝟏 𝒏⦁𝟐 … 𝒏⦁𝒋 … 𝒏⦁𝒔
𝒓 𝒓 𝒓 𝒓 𝒏 = 𝒏⦁⦁ = ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 = ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋
= ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝟏 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝟐 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒔 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏
𝚺 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏
𝒓 𝒔 𝒔 𝒓
𝒇⦁𝟏 𝒇⦁𝟐 … 𝒇⦁𝒋 … 𝒇⦁𝒔
𝒓 𝒓 𝒓 𝒓 𝟏 = ∑ ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋 = ∑ ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋
= ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝟏 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝟐 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒋 = ∑ 𝒇𝒊𝒔 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

 𝑹𝒆𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑻𝒐𝒖𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒃𝒊𝒅𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆

𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒈é𝒆𝒔 𝒚 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔

𝓐– 𝟑 • 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝑶𝒏 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒆𝒏𝒗𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒈𝒆𝒓, 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′ é𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆 𝒔𝒊𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒏é𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔,

𝒅′ 𝒂𝒅𝒂𝒑𝒕𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒅𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍 ∶ 𝒐𝒏 𝒅é𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆

𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆 (𝒄𝒐𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆, 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒃𝒂𝒓𝒓𝒆 𝒐𝒖 𝒔𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓)𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒆𝒍𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆. 𝑴𝒂𝒊𝒔, 𝒅𝒆 𝒇𝒂ç𝒐𝒏 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒆, 𝒊𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔

𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒓 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒉𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒕𝒓è𝒔 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔,

𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍′𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒇𝒊𝒍𝒔.

138 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝓪 • 𝑬𝒙𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆 ∶ 𝑶𝒏 𝒔’𝒊𝒏𝒕é𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒆 à 𝒖𝒏𝒆 é𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒙𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔

𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒚𝒆𝒖𝒙.

𝑻𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 ∶ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝑻𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒓é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝒇𝒊𝒋

𝑩𝒍𝒆𝒖 𝑽𝒆𝒓𝒕 𝑴𝒂𝒓𝒓𝒐𝒏 𝑻𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍 𝑩𝒍𝒆𝒖 𝑽𝒆𝒓𝒕 𝑴𝒂𝒓𝒓𝒐𝒏 𝑻𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍

𝑯𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝟏𝟎 𝟓𝟎 𝟐𝟎 𝟖𝟎 𝑯𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝟎, 𝟎𝟓 𝟎, 𝟐𝟓 𝟎, 𝟏 𝟎, 𝟒
𝑭𝒆𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝟐𝟎 𝟔𝟎 𝟒𝟎 𝟏𝟐𝟎 𝑭𝒆𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝟎, 𝟏 𝟎, 𝟑 𝟎, 𝟐 𝟎, 𝟔
𝑻𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍 𝟑𝟎 𝟏𝟏𝟎 𝟔𝟎 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝑻𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍 𝟎, 𝟏𝟓 𝟎, 𝟓𝟓 𝟎, 𝟑 𝟏

30%
30% 25%
20%
20%
10% 10%
10% 5%

0%
Bleu Vert Marron

Homme Femme

𝑻𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒇𝒊𝒍𝒔 𝒍𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝑻𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒇𝒊𝒍𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔

𝑩𝒍𝒆𝒖 𝑽𝒆𝒓𝒕 𝑴𝒂𝒓𝒓𝒐𝒏 𝑻𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍 𝑩𝒍𝒆𝒖 𝑽𝒆𝒓𝒕 𝑴𝒂𝒓𝒓𝒐𝒏 𝑻𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍

𝑯𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝟎, 𝟏𝟑 𝟎, 𝟔𝟑 𝟎, 𝟐𝟓 𝟏 𝑯𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝟎, 𝟑𝟑 𝟎, 𝟒𝟓 𝟎, 𝟑𝟑 𝟎, 𝟒
𝑭𝒆𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝟎, 𝟏𝟕 𝟎, 𝟓 𝟎, 𝟑𝟑 𝟏 𝑭𝒆𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝟎, 𝟔𝟕 𝟎, 𝟓𝟓 𝟎, 𝟔𝟕 𝟎, 𝟔
𝑻𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍 𝟎, 𝟏𝟓 𝟎, 𝟓𝟓 𝟎, 𝟑 𝟏 𝑻𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏

𝓑– 𝟏 • 𝑬𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒕𝒉é𝒐𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒌𝒉𝒊­𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 ∶

𝑶𝒏 𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒓𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒍𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔, 𝒖𝒏 𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔. 𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒎𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒏 é𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒆 𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒏, 𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒖𝒊𝒕 𝒖𝒏 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒅’𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒕𝒉é𝒐𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔

𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒐ù 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒏𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒍𝒊é𝒆𝒔 (𝒊𝒏𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆). 𝑪𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔
𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝒏⦁𝒋
𝒕𝒉é𝒐𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒖𝒊𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 ∶ 𝒏∗𝒊𝒋 =
𝒏𝒊𝒋

𝑶𝒏 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 é𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒊𝒓 𝒍′ é𝒒𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝒏⦁𝒋
 𝒏∗𝒊𝒋 = ⟺ 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒇𝒊𝒍𝒔­𝒍𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒖𝒙 ⟺ 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒇𝒊𝒍𝒔­𝒄𝒐𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒖𝒙
𝒏𝒊𝒋

 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗é𝒔 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒈𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒕𝒉é𝒐𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒏∗𝒊𝒋

139 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
 𝑬𝒏𝒇𝒊𝒏, 𝒍𝒆𝒔 é𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒔 à 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 ∶ 𝒆𝒊𝒋 = 𝒏𝒊𝒋 − 𝒏∗𝒊𝒋

 𝑳𝒂 𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒔𝒆 𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒆 𝒂𝒖 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏 𝒅𝒖 𝒌𝒉𝒊­𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊 𝒑𝒂𝒓 ∶

𝒓 𝒔 𝟐 𝒓 𝒔 𝒓 𝒔𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝒏⦁𝒋 𝟐 𝒓 𝒔
(𝒏𝒊𝒋 − 𝒏∗𝒊𝒋 ) 𝒆𝟐𝒊𝒋 (𝒏𝒊𝒋 − 𝒏 ) 𝒏𝟐𝒊𝒋
𝝌𝟐𝒐𝒃𝒔 = ∑ ∑ = ∑∑ ∗ = ∑∑ 𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝒏⦁𝒋 = 𝒏 [(∑ ∑ ) − 𝟏]
𝒏∗𝒊𝒋 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝒏⦁𝒋
𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏

 𝑳𝒆 𝒌𝒉𝒊­𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 ê𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒔é 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅’𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔.

𝝌𝟐𝒐𝒃𝒔 𝟐
𝑶𝒏 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒉𝒊­𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒑𝒂𝒓 ∶ 𝝓 = 𝑳𝒆 𝝓𝟐 𝒏𝒆 𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒅𝒖 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅’𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔.
𝒏

𝑰𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝝓𝟐 ≤ 𝐦𝐢𝐧(𝒓 − 𝟏, 𝒔 − 𝟏)

𝝓𝟐 𝝌𝟐𝒐𝒃𝒔 ⁄𝒏
 𝑳𝒆 𝑽 𝒅𝒆 𝑪𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒆𝒓 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒓 ∶ 𝑽 = √ =√
𝐦𝐢𝐧(𝒓 − 𝟏, 𝒔 − 𝟏) 𝐦𝐢𝐧(𝒓 − 𝟏, 𝒔 − 𝟏)

𝑳𝒆 𝑽 𝒅𝒆 𝑪𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒆𝒓 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝟏. 𝑰𝒍 𝒏𝒆 𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅 𝒏𝒊 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍’é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒊 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂

𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖. 𝑺𝒊 𝑽 ≅ 𝟎, 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔. 𝑺𝒊 𝑽 = 𝟏, 𝒊𝒍 𝒆𝒙𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆

𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔, 𝒄𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒔𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒊𝒇𝒊𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆

𝒄𝒐𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒈𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒏𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒒𝒖’𝒖𝒏 𝒔𝒆𝒖𝒍 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝟎

(𝒊𝒍 𝒇𝒂𝒖𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒂𝒊𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔).

𝓪 • 𝑬𝒙𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆 ∶
𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝒏⦁𝒋
𝑻𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒕𝒉é𝒐𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝒏∗𝒊𝒋 = ∗
𝑻𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒅𝒆𝒔 é𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒔 à 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 ∶ 𝒆𝒊𝒋 = 𝒏𝒊𝒋 − 𝒏𝒊𝒋
𝒏𝒊𝒋

𝑩𝒍𝒆𝒖 𝑽𝒆𝒓𝒕 𝑴𝒂𝒓𝒓𝒐𝒏 𝑻𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍 𝑩𝒍𝒆𝒖 𝑽𝒆𝒓𝒕 𝑴𝒂𝒓𝒓𝒐𝒏 𝑻𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍

𝑯𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝟏𝟐 𝟒𝟒 𝟐𝟒 𝟖𝟎 𝑯𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 −𝟐 𝟔 −𝟒 𝟎
𝑭𝒆𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝟏𝟖 𝟔𝟔 𝟑𝟔 𝟏𝟐𝟎 𝑭𝒆𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝟐 −𝟔 𝟒 𝟎
𝑻𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍 𝟑𝟎 𝟏𝟏𝟎 𝟔𝟎 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝑻𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍 𝟎 𝟎 𝟎 𝟎
𝒆𝟐𝒊𝒋
𝑻𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒅𝒆𝒔
𝒏∗𝒊𝒋

𝑩𝒍𝒆𝒖 𝑽𝒆𝒓𝒕 𝑴𝒂𝒓𝒓𝒐𝒏 𝑻𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍  𝑳𝒆 𝒌𝒉𝒊­𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗é 𝒗𝒂𝒖𝒕 ∶ 𝝌𝟐𝒐𝒃𝒔 = 𝟑, 𝟎𝟑

𝑯𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝟎, 𝟑𝟑 𝟎, 𝟖𝟐 𝟎, 𝟔𝟕 𝟏, 𝟖𝟐
𝑭𝒆𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝟎, 𝟐𝟐 𝟎, 𝟓𝟓 𝟎, 𝟒𝟒 𝟏, 𝟐𝟏  𝑳𝒆 𝒑𝒉𝒊­𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗é 𝒗𝒂𝒖𝒕 ∶ 𝝓𝟐 = 𝟎, 𝟎𝟏𝟓𝟏𝟓
𝑻𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍 𝟎, 𝟓𝟓 𝟏, 𝟑𝟔 𝟏, 𝟏𝟏 𝟑, 𝟎𝟑
 𝑪𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒂 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒍𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔, 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄, 𝐦𝐢𝐧(𝒓 − 𝟏, 𝒔 − 𝟏) = 𝐦𝐢𝐧(𝟏, 𝟐) = 𝟏

𝝓𝟐
𝑳𝒆 𝑽 𝒅𝒆 𝑪𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒆𝒓 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍 à ∶ 𝑽 = √ = √𝟎, 𝟎𝟏𝟓𝟏𝟓 = 𝟎, 𝟏𝟐𝟑
𝟏

𝑳𝒂 𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒕𝒓è𝒔 𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆.

140 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014

𝓐– 𝟏 • 𝑰𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒅𝒖𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶

𝑺𝒊 𝑿 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 à 𝒓 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔, 𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔

𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝒓 « 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 ». 𝑳𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆, 𝒏𝒐𝒕é𝒆 𝓒𝒊 (𝒊 = 𝟏, … , 𝒓) 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔

𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔 𝒂𝒚𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕é 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒙𝒊 𝒅𝒆 𝑿. 𝑶𝒏 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒓 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆

𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝒀 𝒂𝒖 𝒔𝒆𝒊𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝓒𝒊 . 𝑳𝒂 𝒇𝒂ç𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔

𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊è𝒓𝒆 𝒊𝒅é𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝒀.

𝑬𝒏𝒇𝒊𝒏, 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒊𝒅é𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒑𝒓é𝒄𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒅𝒆

𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏, 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝒅′ 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒆.

𝓐– 𝟐 • 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝑵𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒋𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒊𝒄𝒊 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒂𝒊𝒔, 𝒎𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕, 𝒍′ 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝒆𝒕

𝒍′ 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆.

𝑳𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝑿, 𝒔𝒖𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒔é𝒆 à 𝒓 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒏𝒐𝒕é𝒆𝒔: 𝒙𝟏 , … , 𝒙𝒊 … , 𝒙𝒓

̅ 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝑺𝟐𝒚 . 𝑶𝒏 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒓

𝑳𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒀, 𝒅𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒀

𝒍′ 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗é𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝒓 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒔, 𝒐𝒖 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔­𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔, 𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆

𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕é𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖. 𝑨𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊, 𝒏𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝓒𝒊 𝒍′ 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔

𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′ é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒚𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕é 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒙𝒊 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 ; 𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊 𝒄𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒐𝒏

𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒏 𝒓 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 (𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆

𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒆𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒖𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝑿). 𝑵𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒏𝟏⦁ , … , 𝒏𝒊⦁ … , 𝒏𝒓⦁ 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔
𝒓

𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 (𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒋𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒏 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍 𝒅′𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗é𝒔).
𝒊=𝟏

𝑷𝒂𝒓 𝒆𝒙𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆, 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒙𝒆, 𝒐𝒏 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝓒𝟏 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒉𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝓒𝟐

𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒆𝒎𝒎𝒆𝒔.

141 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒀 𝒚𝟏 𝒚𝟐 … 𝒚𝒋 … 𝒚𝒔
𝑿
𝒔

𝑴𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒙𝟏 𝒏𝟏𝟏 𝒏𝟏𝟐 … 𝒏𝟏𝒋 … 𝒏𝟏𝒔 𝒏𝟏⦁ = ∑ 𝒏𝟏𝒋

𝒋=𝟏
𝒔

𝑴𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒙𝟐 𝒏𝟐𝟏 𝒏𝟐𝟐 … 𝒏𝟐𝒋 … 𝒏𝟐𝒔 𝒏𝟐⦁ = ∑ 𝒏𝟐𝒋

𝒋=𝟏
⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮
𝒔

𝑴𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒙𝒊 𝒏𝒊𝟏 𝒏𝒊𝟐 … 𝒏𝒊𝒋 … 𝒏𝒊𝒔 𝒏𝒊⦁ = ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋

𝒋=𝟏
⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮ ⋮
𝒔

𝑴𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒙𝒓 𝒏𝒓𝟏 𝒏𝒓𝟐 … 𝒏𝒓𝒋 … 𝒏𝒓𝒔 𝒏𝒓⦁ = ∑ 𝒏𝒓𝒋

𝒋=𝟏
𝒓 𝒓 𝒓 𝒓

𝒏⦁𝟏 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝟏 𝒏⦁𝟐 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝟐 … 𝒏⦁𝒋 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 … 𝒏⦁𝒔 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒔 𝒏

𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏
𝑶𝒏 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒀 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝓒𝒊 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂

̅ 𝒊 𝒆𝒕 𝑺𝟐𝒊 ∶
𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏; 𝒏𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒀
𝒔 𝒔 𝒔
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
̅𝒊 =
𝒀 ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒚𝒋 𝒆𝒕 𝑺𝟐𝒊 = ̅ 𝒊 )𝟐 =
∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 (𝒚𝒋 − 𝒀 ̅ 𝟐𝒊
∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒚𝟐𝒋 − 𝒀
𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝒏𝒊⦁
𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏

(𝒀|𝑪𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝓒𝒊) 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒚𝒋 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒚𝟐𝒋

𝒚𝟏 𝒏𝒊𝟏 𝒏𝒊𝟏 𝒚𝟏 𝒏𝒊𝟏 𝒚𝟐𝟏
𝒚𝟐 𝒏𝒊𝟐 𝒏𝒊𝟐 𝒚𝟐 𝒏𝒊𝟐 𝒚𝟐𝟐
⋮ ⋮
𝒚𝒋 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒚𝒋 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒚𝟐𝒋
⋮ ⋮
𝒚𝒔 𝒏𝒊𝒔 𝒏𝒊𝒔 𝒚𝒔 𝒏𝒊𝒔 𝒚𝟐𝒔
𝒔 𝒔
∑ 𝒏𝒊⦁
̅𝒊
∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒚𝒋 = 𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝒀 ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒚𝟐𝒋
𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏

𝓑– 𝟏 • 𝑭𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝑪𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒏é𝒄𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒓 𝒖𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔.

̅ 𝒆𝒕 𝑺𝟐𝒚 𝒅𝒆 𝒀
𝑬𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒔𝒆 𝒅é𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒀

̅ 𝒊 𝒆𝒕 𝑺𝟐𝒊 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒖 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝓒𝒊

𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒀

𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝑿

̅ ) 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 « 𝒓 » 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 (𝒀

𝑳𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒀 , (𝒀 ̅ 𝒊 )𝟏≤𝒊≤𝒓
𝒓
𝟏
̅ = ∑ 𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝒀
:𝒀 ̅𝒊
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏

 𝑳𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒀 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒆 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 « 𝒓 » 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔

142 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒓
𝟏
𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒏𝒐𝒕é 𝑺𝟐𝑹 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝑺𝟐𝒊 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍é𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒓é𝒔𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆; (𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂­𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔, 𝒐𝒖 à 𝒍′𝒊𝒏𝒕é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔. )𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 « 𝒓 » 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔

𝒓
𝟏
̅𝒊 − 𝒀
𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑺𝟐𝑬 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊⦁ (𝒀 ̅ )𝟐 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍é𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒒𝒖é𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒖 𝒍𝒂
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏

𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝓒𝒊 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝑿; (𝒐𝒏 𝒍′𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒂𝒖𝒔𝒔𝒊 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓­𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔, 𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆

𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔)𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝒀 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒒𝒖é𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆

𝒓 𝒓
𝟏 𝟏 ̅̅̅𝟐𝒊 + 𝑺𝟐̅ = 𝑺𝟐 + 𝑺𝟐
̅𝒊 − 𝒀
𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝑿 ∶ 𝑺𝟐𝒚 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝑺𝟐𝒊 + ∑ 𝒏𝒊⦁ (𝒀 ̅ )𝟐 = 𝑺 𝒀𝒊 𝑹 𝑬
𝒏 𝒏
⏟ 𝒊=𝟏 ⏟ 𝒊=𝟏
𝑺𝟐𝑹 𝑺𝟐𝑬

 𝑰𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓é𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶

𝑳𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒒𝒖é𝒆, 𝑺𝟐𝑬 , 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒄𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒀 𝒔𝒊, 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆

̅𝒊 .
𝓒𝒊 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝑿, 𝒀 é𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒂𝒊𝒕 𝒀

𝑫𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒄ô𝒕é, 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒓é𝒔𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝑺𝟐𝑹 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒄𝒆 𝒒𝒖′ 𝒊𝒍 𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒕𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒀,

𝒆𝒏 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆, 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆. 𝑨𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊, 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝑺𝟐𝑬 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 à 𝑺𝟐𝑹 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝒀 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒊é𝒆𝒔.

𝓑– 𝟐 • 𝑹𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶

𝓪 • 𝑰𝒅é𝒆 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒆 ∶ 𝑳𝒆 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒐𝒇𝒇𝒓𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒆 𝒔𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂

𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆. 𝑪𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒔è𝒅𝒆 𝒓 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔. 𝑶𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒓𝒆

é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝒓 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒖 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆

𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝒒𝒖’𝒊𝒍 𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆

𝓫 • 𝑨𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒐𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑳𝒆 𝒕𝒉é𝒐𝒓è𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑯𝒖𝒚𝒈𝒆𝒏𝒔 (𝒑𝟗𝟐)𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒍 𝒑𝒖𝒊𝒔𝒒𝒖’𝒊𝒍 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒆𝒕

𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒖𝒏 é𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂

𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 à 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒕é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔.

𝑳𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒅𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂 𝒆𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒂

𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒖𝒄𝒕𝒖𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅’𝒖𝒏 𝒅é𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒆𝒏 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝒔𝒊 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂­𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔

𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒏𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 é𝒍𝒆𝒗é𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓­𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔, 𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒖𝒏 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒐ù 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔

143 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒏 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒛 𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒖𝒙, 𝒎𝒂𝒊𝒔 𝒐ù 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒄𝒖𝒏 𝒅’𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒂𝒃𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒆𝒏 𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒆𝒊𝒏 𝒖𝒏𝒆

é𝒏𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓­𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆. 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒗𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒎𝒂𝒍

𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒔, 𝒆𝒕 𝒏𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 à 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒓é𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é (𝒑𝒉𝒚𝒔𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆, 𝒃𝒊𝒐𝒍𝒐𝒈𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆, 𝒔𝒐𝒄𝒊𝒂𝒍𝒆, … )𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒆.

À 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒗𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒆, 𝒔𝒊 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓­𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒏𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 é𝒍𝒆𝒗é𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒕é

𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂, 𝒏𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒊é𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕

𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝒉𝒐𝒎𝒐𝒈è𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒔𝒆𝒊𝒏 ∶ 𝒍𝒆 𝒅é𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒆𝒏 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅 à

𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒓é𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒓è𝒕𝒆.

𝑳’𝒊𝒅é𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒕 𝒔𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒅𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂

𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓­𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 (𝒄𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒓𝒆𝒗𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 à

𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒅𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂)

 𝑫é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝑺𝒐𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒀 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝑿 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆

𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆 à « 𝒓 » 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔. 𝑪𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒖𝒓é𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒓 « 𝒏 » 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔, 𝒆𝒕 𝒐𝒏

𝒔𝒖𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒄𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 « 𝒓 » 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒂𝒖 𝒎𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔.

𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒓é𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒔 𝒆𝒏 « 𝒓 » 𝒈𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒖𝒙 « 𝒓 »

𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝑿. 𝑳𝒆 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒀 𝒆𝒏 𝑿, 𝒏𝒐𝒕é 𝜼𝟐𝒀⁄𝑿 , 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆

𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 ∶

𝑽𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓­𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝑺𝟐𝑬 𝑽𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓­𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝑺𝟐𝑬

𝜼𝟐𝒀⁄𝑿 = = 𝟐= = 𝟐
𝑽𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝑺𝒚 𝑽𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓­𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 + 𝑽𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂­𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔 𝑺𝑬 + 𝑺𝟐𝑹

𝓬 • 𝑷𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é𝒔 ∶

 𝜼𝟐𝒀⁄𝑿 𝒏’𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒔𝒚𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆, 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒕𝒆­𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒖 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝒀 𝒏𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕

𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒖𝒓𝒆 ∶ 𝜼𝟐𝒀⁄𝑿 ≠ 𝜼𝟐𝑿⁄𝒀

 𝟎 ≤ 𝜼𝟐𝒀⁄𝑿 ≤ 𝟏
𝒔
𝟏
 𝜼𝟐𝒀⁄𝑿 =𝟏⟺ 𝑺𝟐𝑹 =𝟎⟺ 𝑺𝟐𝒊 = ̅ 𝒊 )𝟐 = 𝟎 , ∀𝒊 ⟺ 𝒚𝒋 = 𝒀
∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 (𝒚𝒋 − 𝒀 ̅ 𝒊 , ∀𝒊
𝒏𝒊⦁
𝒋=𝟏

𝒅′ 𝒂𝒑𝒓è𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝑺𝟐𝑹 (𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒓é𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒏𝒖𝒍𝒍𝒆, 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒄𝒖𝒏𝒆

𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒏𝒖𝒍𝒍𝒆) ; 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔é𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒕, 𝒀 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝓒𝒊 (𝒑𝒖𝒊𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆

𝒔𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒏𝒖𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒄𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔) ; 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒖𝒏 𝒕𝒆𝒍 𝒄𝒂𝒔, 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑿

144 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
(𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝓒𝒊 à 𝒍𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒖)𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒔𝒖𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒂î𝒕𝒓𝒆

̅ 𝒊 ) ∶ 𝒊𝒍 𝒚 𝒂 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝒀 .

𝒀 (𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒗𝒂𝒖𝒕 𝒀
𝒓
𝟏
 𝜼𝟐𝒀⁄𝑿 =𝟎⟺ 𝑺𝟐𝑬 =𝟎⟺ 𝑺𝟐𝑬 ̅𝒊 − 𝒀
= ∑ 𝒏𝒊⦁ (𝒀 ̅ )𝟐 = 𝟎 , ∀𝒊 ⟺ 𝒀
̅𝒊 = 𝒀
̅ , ∀𝒊
𝒏
𝒊=𝟏

𝑬𝒏 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆, 𝑿 𝒏′𝒂 𝒂𝒖𝒄𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒇𝒍𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒀 (𝒑𝒖𝒊𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒀 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆,

𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒅𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝑿) ∶ 𝒊𝒍 𝒏′𝒚 𝒂 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔.

 𝑶𝒏 𝒓𝒆𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒂 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝜼𝟐𝒀⁄𝑿 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅, 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝒀 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒆

𝓭 • 𝑻𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒔𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒊𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒕é ∶

𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒅𝒎𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒓𝒂 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒍’𝒉𝒚𝒑𝒐𝒕𝒉è𝒔𝒆 𝑯𝟎 : 𝜼𝟐𝒀⁄𝑿 = 𝟎 (𝒏𝒖𝒍𝒍𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒖 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏)

(𝒏 − 𝒓)𝜼𝟐𝒀⁄𝑿
, 𝒍𝒂 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é 𝑭 = ↝ 𝓕((𝒓 − 𝟏), (𝒏 − 𝒓) ) , (𝑳𝒐𝒊 𝒅𝒆 𝑭𝒊𝒔𝒉𝒆𝒓 à (𝒓 − 𝟏)𝒆𝒕 (𝒏 − 𝒓) 𝒅𝒆𝒈𝒓é𝒔
(𝒓 − 𝟏)𝜼𝟐𝒀⁄𝑿

𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒊𝒃𝒆𝒓𝒕é). 𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒅é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒔𝒊 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝜼𝟐𝒀⁄𝑿 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒔𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒊𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝟎

(𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒖𝒏 𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅’𝒆𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝜶 = 𝟓%), 𝒊𝒍 𝒔𝒖𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒕𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝑭 𝒂𝒖

𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒆 𝒅’𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝟎. 𝟗𝟓 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒍𝒐𝒊 𝒅𝒆 𝑭𝒊𝒔𝒉𝒆𝒓 à (𝒓 − 𝟏)𝒆𝒕 (𝒏 − 𝒓) 𝒅𝒆𝒈𝒓é𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒊𝒃𝒆𝒓𝒕é.

Exercice 12 (6 points = 1 point par question) :

ÉNONCÉ
𝑳𝒂 𝒓é𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅’𝒖𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒏 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝒄𝒉è𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 (𝒎𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒉è𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔)𝒔𝒆𝒍𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒆

𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕, 𝒏𝒐𝒕é 𝑿, 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒓é𝒈𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅’é𝒎𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏, 𝒏𝒐𝒕é𝒆 𝑹 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒕 :

𝑹é𝒈𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝑹𝟏 𝑹𝟐
𝑿
𝟏𝟎 𝟏𝟓𝟎 𝟓𝟎
𝟐𝟎 𝑨 𝟐𝟎𝟎
𝟒𝟎 𝟑𝟎𝟎 𝑩
1) 𝑫é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝑨 𝒆𝒕 𝑩
2) 𝑻𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒓 𝑨 𝒆𝒕 𝑩 𝒔𝒂𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒉è𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍 à 𝟐𝟖

145 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
3) 𝑫é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝑿
4) 𝑬𝒏 𝒅é𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑿
5) 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒉è𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒄𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒓é𝒈𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝑹𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝑹𝟐
6) 𝑺𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒃𝒂𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒔 𝒑𝒓é𝒄é𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔, 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒄𝒕é𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒉è𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 «𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔 »
𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 « 𝒓é𝒈𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅’é𝒎𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 » 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕­𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 ? 𝑱𝒖𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒗𝒐𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒓é𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒆.

Corrigé
1) 𝑵𝒐𝒕𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒏𝒊𝒋 𝒍’𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒋𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅 𝒂𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒑𝒍𝒆 ( 𝒙𝒊 , 𝑹𝒋 ), (𝒊, 𝒋) ∈ {𝟏, 𝟐, 𝟑} × {𝟏, 𝟐},

𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝒍’𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒈𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕 à 𝒙𝒊 , 𝒏⦁𝒋 𝒍’𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒈𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕 à 𝑹𝒋 𝒆𝒕

𝒏 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝒍’𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍

𝑹
𝑹𝟏 𝑹𝟐 ∑
𝑿

𝒙𝟏 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒏𝟏𝟏 = 𝟏𝟓𝟎 𝒏𝟏𝟐 = 𝟓𝟎 𝒏𝟏⦁ = 𝟐𝟎𝟎

𝒙𝟐 = 𝟐𝟎 𝒏𝟐𝟏 = 𝑨 𝒏𝟐𝟐 = 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝒏𝟐⦁ = 𝑨 + 𝟐𝟎𝟎

𝒙𝟑 = 𝟒𝟎 𝒏𝟑𝟏 = 𝟑𝟎𝟎 𝒏𝟑𝟐 = 𝑩 𝒏𝟑⦁ = 𝑩 + 𝟑𝟎𝟎

∑ 𝒏⦁𝟏 = 𝑨 + 𝟒𝟓𝟎 𝒏⦁𝟐 = 𝑩 + 𝟐𝟓𝟎 𝒏 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎

𝟑 𝟐 𝟐 𝟑 𝟑 𝟐

𝑶𝒓 𝒏 = ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 = ∑ ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝒋 = ∑ 𝒏𝒊⦁ = ∑ 𝒏⦁𝒋 ⟺ (𝑨 + 𝟒𝟓𝟎) + (𝑩 + 𝟐𝟓𝟎) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎

𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒋=𝟏

𝒅′ 𝒐ù 𝑩 = 𝟑𝟎𝟎 − 𝑨 (𝟏)

̅ = 𝟏 ∑𝟑𝒊=𝟏 𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝒙𝒊 ⟺ 𝟐𝟖 = 𝒏𝟏⦁𝒙𝟏 +𝒏𝟐⦁𝒙𝟐+𝒏𝟑⦁𝒙𝟑

2) 𝑿 𝒏 𝒏

(𝟐𝟎𝟎 × 𝟏𝟎) + [(𝑨 + 𝟐𝟎𝟎) × 𝟐𝟎] + [(𝑩 + 𝟑𝟎𝟎) × 𝟒𝟎]

⟺ 𝟐𝟖 = ⟺ 𝑨 + 𝟐𝑩 = 𝟓𝟎𝟎 (𝟐)
𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎
𝑩 = 𝟑𝟎𝟎 − 𝑨 𝑩 = 𝟑𝟎𝟎 − 𝑨
𝑨𝒗𝒆𝒄 (𝟏) 𝒆𝒕 (𝟐), 𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒚𝒔𝒕é𝒎𝒆 ∶ { ⟺{
𝑨 + 𝟐𝑩 = 𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝑨 + 𝟔𝟎𝟎 − 𝟐𝑨 = 𝟓𝟎𝟎

𝑭𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕, 𝒐𝒏 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆 : 𝑨 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝑩 = 𝟐𝟎𝟎

3) 𝑫𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒃𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝑿 ∶

𝑿 𝒏𝒊⦁ 𝒇𝒊⦁ 𝒇𝒊⦁ 𝒙𝒊 𝒇𝒊⦁ 𝒙𝟐𝒊
𝒙𝟏 = 𝟏𝟎 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝟎, 𝟐 𝟐 𝟐𝟎

𝒙𝟐 = 𝟐𝟎 𝟑𝟎𝟎 𝟎, 𝟑 𝟔 𝟏𝟐𝟎

𝒙𝟑 = 𝟒𝟎 𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝟎, 𝟓 𝟐𝟎 𝟖𝟎𝟎

𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟏 ̅ = 𝟐𝟖
𝑿 𝟑
∑
∑ 𝒇𝒊⦁ 𝒙𝟐𝒊 = 𝟗𝟒𝟎
𝒊=𝟏
𝟏
4) 𝑺𝟐𝒙 = ∑𝒓 𝒏 (𝒙 ̅ )𝟐 = ∑𝒓𝒊=𝟏 𝒇𝒊⦁ (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿
−𝑿 ̅ )𝟐 = ∑𝒓𝒊=𝟏 𝒇𝒊⦁ 𝒙𝟐𝒊 − 𝑿
̅ 𝟐 = 𝟗𝟒𝟎 − 𝟐𝟖𝟐 ⟺ 𝑺𝟐𝒙 = 𝟏𝟓𝟔
𝒏 𝒊=𝟏 𝒊⦁ 𝒊

146 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
̅ 𝒋 , (𝒋 = 𝟏, 𝟐)𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒓é𝒈𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝑹𝒋 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏
5) 𝑵𝒐𝒕𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝑿

(𝑿| 𝑹𝟏 ) 𝒏𝒊𝟏 𝒏𝒊𝟏 𝒙𝒊 𝒏𝒊𝟏 𝒙𝟐𝒊 (𝑿| 𝑹𝟐 ) 𝒏𝒊𝟐 𝒏𝒊𝟐 𝒙𝒊 𝒏𝒊𝟐 𝒙𝟐𝒊
𝒙𝟏 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒏𝟏𝟏 = 𝟏𝟓𝟎 𝟏𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟓𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝒙𝟏 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒏𝟏𝟐 = 𝟓𝟎 𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝟓𝟎𝟎𝟎

𝒙𝟐 = 𝟐𝟎 𝒏𝟐𝟏 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟐𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟒𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝒙𝟐 = 𝟐𝟎 𝒏𝟐𝟐 = 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝟒𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟖𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎

𝒙𝟑 = 𝟒𝟎 𝒏𝟑𝟏 = 𝟑𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟐𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟒𝟖𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝒙𝟑 = 𝟒𝟎 𝒏𝟑𝟐 = 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝟖𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟑𝟐𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎

∑ 𝒏⦁𝟏 = 𝟓𝟓𝟎 𝟏𝟓𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝟓𝟑𝟓𝟎𝟎𝟎 ∑ 𝒏⦁𝟐 = 𝟒𝟓𝟎 𝟏𝟐𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝟒𝟎𝟓𝟎𝟎𝟎

𝟑 𝟑
𝟏 𝟏𝟓𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝟏 𝟏𝟐𝟓𝟎𝟎
̅𝟏 =
∙𝑿 ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝟏 𝒙𝒊 = ̅𝟐 =
= 𝟐𝟖, 𝟏𝟖𝟐 ∙ 𝑿 ∑ 𝒏𝒊𝟐 𝒙𝒊 = = 𝟐𝟕, 𝟕𝟕𝟖
𝒏⦁𝟏 𝟓𝟓𝟎 𝒏⦁𝟐 𝟒𝟓𝟎
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

6)

▪ 𝟏è𝒓𝒆 𝑴é𝒕𝒉𝒐𝒅𝒆 ∶
𝟐
𝟏
 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒓é𝒔𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝑺𝟐𝑹 = ∑ 𝒏⦁𝒋 𝑺𝟐𝒋 , 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆
𝒏
𝒋=𝟏

𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂­𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔, 𝒐𝒖 à 𝒍′ 𝒊𝒏𝒕é𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒓é𝒈𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔. , 𝒐ù 𝑺𝟐𝒋 (𝒋 = 𝟏, 𝟐)𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝑿

𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒓é𝒈𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝑹𝒋 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏

𝟑 𝟑
𝟏 𝟏 𝟓𝟑𝟓𝟎𝟎𝟎
∙ 𝑺𝟐𝟏 = ̅ 𝟏 )𝟐 =
∑ 𝒏𝒊𝟏 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ 𝟐𝟏 =
∑ 𝒏𝒊𝟏 𝒙𝟐𝒊 − 𝑿 − (𝟐𝟖, 𝟏𝟖𝟐)𝟐 = 𝟏𝟕𝟖, 𝟓𝟏𝟐
𝒏⦁𝟏 𝒏⦁𝟏 𝟓𝟓𝟎
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝟑 𝟑
𝟏 𝟏 𝟒𝟎𝟓𝟎𝟎𝟎
∙ 𝑺𝟐𝟐 = ̅ 𝟐 )𝟐 =
∑ 𝒏𝒊𝟐 (𝒙𝒊 − 𝑿 ̅ 𝟐𝟐 =
∑ 𝒏𝒊𝟐 𝒙𝟐𝒊 − 𝑿 − (𝟐𝟕, 𝟕𝟕𝟖)𝟐 = 𝟏𝟐𝟖, 𝟑𝟗𝟓
𝒏⦁𝟐 𝒏⦁𝟐 𝟒𝟓𝟎
𝒊=𝟏 𝒊=𝟏

𝟐
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
∙ 𝑺𝟐𝑹 = ∑ 𝒏⦁𝒋 𝑺𝟐𝒋 = (𝒏⦁𝟏 𝑺𝟐𝟏 + 𝒏⦁𝟐 𝑺𝟐𝟐 ) = [(𝟓𝟓𝟎
⏟ (𝟒𝟓𝟎 × 𝟏𝟐𝟖, 𝟑𝟗𝟓)] = 𝟏𝟓𝟓, 𝟗𝟔
× 𝟏𝟕𝟖, 𝟓𝟏𝟐) + ⏟
𝒏 𝒏 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎
𝒋=𝟏 𝟗𝟖𝟏𝟖𝟏,𝟖𝟏𝟖 𝟓𝟕𝟕𝟕𝟕,𝟕𝟕𝟖

𝟐
𝟏
 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒒𝒖é𝒆 𝑺𝟐𝑬 = ∑ 𝒏⦁𝒋 (𝑿 ̅ )𝟐 , 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆
̅𝒋 − 𝑿
𝒏
𝒋=𝟏

𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓­𝒄𝒍𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒔, 𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒓é𝒈𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔

𝟐
𝟏 𝟏
∙ 𝑺𝟐𝑬 = ∑ 𝒏⦁𝒋 (𝑿 ̅ )𝟐 = [𝒏⦁𝟏 (𝑿
̅𝒋 − 𝑿 ̅𝟏 − 𝑿
̅ )𝟐 + 𝒏⦁𝟐 (𝑿
̅𝟐 − 𝑿
̅ )𝟐 ]
𝒏 𝒏
𝒋=𝟏

𝟏
𝑺𝟐𝑬 = [(𝟓𝟓𝟎
⏟ × (𝟐𝟖, 𝟏𝟖𝟐 − 𝟐𝟖)𝟐 ) + ⏟
(𝟒𝟓𝟎 × (𝟐𝟕, 𝟕𝟕𝟖 − 𝟐𝟖)𝟐 )] = 𝟎, 𝟎𝟒
𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟖,𝟏𝟖𝟐 𝟐𝟐,𝟐𝟐𝟐

𝑶𝒏 𝒗é𝒓𝒊𝒇𝒊𝒆 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝑺𝟐𝒙 , 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝑿 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆

147 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝟐
𝒓é𝒔𝒊𝒅𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒒𝒖é𝒆 ∶ 𝑺
⏟𝒙𝟐
= 𝑺
⏟𝑹 + ⏟𝟐𝑬
𝑺
𝟏𝟓𝟔 𝟏𝟓𝟓,𝟗𝟔 𝟎,𝟎𝟒

 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝑳𝒆 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓é𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒊𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 𝒆𝒏 𝑹 ∶

𝑺𝟐𝑬 𝑺𝟐𝑬 𝟎, 𝟎𝟒
𝜼𝟐𝑿⁄𝒀 = 𝟐
= 𝟐 𝟐
= = 𝟎, 𝟎𝟐𝟔% ≅ 𝟎%
𝑺𝒙 𝑺𝑬 + 𝑺𝑹 𝟏𝟓𝟔

𝑳𝒂 𝒓é𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒉è𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒓é𝒈𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅’é𝒎𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏, 𝒐𝒏

𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒓𝒂 𝒅𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒓é𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒓é𝒈𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅’é𝒎𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒏’𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕

𝒗𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒎𝒂𝒍 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒆

▪ 𝟐è𝒎𝒆 𝑴é𝒕𝒉𝒐𝒅𝒆 (𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒅é𝒆) :

𝟐
𝟏
̅ 𝟏 = 𝟐𝟖, 𝟏𝟖𝟐 ; 𝑿
𝑿 ̅ 𝟐 = 𝟐𝟕, 𝟕𝟕𝟖 𝒆𝒕 𝑿
̅ = 𝟐𝟖 ⇒ 𝑿
̅𝟏 ≅ 𝑿
̅𝟐 ≅ 𝑿
̅⇒ 𝑺𝟐𝑬 ̅ )𝟐 ≅ 𝟎 ⇒ 𝜼𝟐𝑿⁄𝒀 ≅ 𝟎%
̅𝒋 − 𝑿
= ∑ 𝒏⦁𝒋 (𝑿
𝒏
𝒋=𝟏

𝑬𝒏 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆, 𝑹𝒋 (𝒓é𝒈𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅’é𝒎𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏) 𝒏′𝒂 𝒂𝒖𝒄𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒇𝒍𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝑿 (𝒑𝒖𝒊𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓

𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑿 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆, 𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒓é𝒈𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅’é𝒎𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏: 𝒊𝒍 𝒏′ 𝒚 𝒂 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒊𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆

𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔.

148 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014

𝓐– 𝟏 • 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 ∶

𝓪 • 𝑻𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒖 ∶ 𝑺𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒚 = 𝒇(𝒕), 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍’é𝒗𝒐𝒍𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔 𝒆𝒔𝒕

𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒇.

 𝑻𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 ∶ 𝑳𝒂 𝒅é𝒓𝒊𝒗é𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒚 𝒑𝒂𝒓

𝝏𝒇(𝒕)
𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒂𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒕é𝒆 ∶ 𝒚′ = 𝒆𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏
𝝏𝒕
𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒏é𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒚 𝒆𝒏 𝒕.

𝑳𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏, 𝒏𝒐𝒕é 𝓣𝒚 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒇 𝒆𝒏 𝒖𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒕 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔, 𝒔𝒐𝒊𝒕 ∶

𝒚′ 𝝏𝒇(𝒕)⁄𝝏𝒕
𝓣𝒚 = =
𝒚 𝒇(𝒕)

 𝑻𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅’𝒖𝒏 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑫𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒔

𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 é𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔, 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒇 𝒔’é𝒄𝒓𝒊𝒕 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒐𝒖 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔: 𝒇(𝒕) = 𝒌𝒉(𝒕)𝜶 𝒍(𝒕)𝜷 (𝟏) . 𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙

𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒚 𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔, 𝒐𝒏 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆

𝒚′ 𝝏 𝐥𝐧 𝒇(𝒕)⁄𝝏𝒕
𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 ∶ 𝓣𝒚 = =
𝒚 𝒇(𝒕)

𝑨𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒕, 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔 𝒏’𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝒅’𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆

𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒅é𝒓𝒊𝒗é𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒍𝒐𝒈𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒂𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔.

𝑼𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒇 𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆

𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒖 𝒎𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍’é𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 (𝟏). 𝑶𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓

𝒍𝒆 𝒍𝒐𝒈𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒚 ∶ 𝐥𝐧 𝒚 = 𝐥𝐧(𝒇(𝒕)) = 𝐥𝐧 𝒌 + 𝜶 𝐥𝐧(𝒉(𝒕)) + 𝜷 𝐥𝐧(𝒍(𝒕))

𝑫é𝒓𝒊𝒗𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒂𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔 ∶

149 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝝏 𝐥𝐧(𝒇(𝒕)) 𝝏 𝐥𝐧 𝒌 𝝏 𝐥𝐧(𝒉(𝒕)) 𝝏 𝐥𝐧(𝒍(𝒕))
= +𝜶 +𝜷 , 𝒔𝒐𝒊𝒕 ∶ 𝓣𝒚 = 𝜶𝓣𝒉 + 𝜷𝓣𝒍
𝝏𝒕 𝝏𝒕 𝝏𝒕 𝝏𝒕
𝒐ù 𝓣𝒉 𝒆𝒕 𝓣𝒍 𝒅é𝒔𝒊𝒈𝒏𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍’é𝒗𝒐𝒍𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒖

𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒉 𝒆𝒕 𝒍 𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕.

 𝑷𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é 𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 ∶ 𝑺𝒊 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒚 𝒄𝒓𝒐î𝒕 𝒂𝒖 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒂, 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 ∶

𝒚 = 𝒇(𝒕) = 𝒆𝒂𝒕 𝒇(𝟎)

𝑳𝒂 𝒅é𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒕𝒉𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆

𝒓é𝒔𝒐𝒍𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆𝒔 é𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒍𝒊𝒏é𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒐𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆.

𝑳𝒂 𝒔𝒐𝒍𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 é𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒚𝒑𝒆 ∶ 𝒚′ = 𝒂𝒚 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒚(𝒕) = 𝒌𝒆𝒂𝒕 .

𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒌, 𝒊𝒍 𝒔𝒖𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒕 𝒅’𝒂𝒏𝒏𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 é𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏, 𝒄𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆 ∶ 𝒌 = 𝒚(𝟎).

𝓫 • 𝑻𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒄𝒓𝒆𝒕 ∶ 𝑫𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒎𝒐𝒅è𝒍𝒆𝒔, 𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅è𝒓𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒍’é𝒗𝒐𝒍𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒚 𝒆𝒏 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔, 𝒎𝒂𝒊𝒔 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒕ô𝒕 à 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒓é𝒈𝒖𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒓𝒔: 𝒕, 𝒕 + 𝟏, 𝒕 + 𝟐, 𝒆𝒕𝒄.

 𝑻𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 ∶ 𝑫𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔, 𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆 𝒚𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒚 à 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒕. 𝑺𝒐𝒏 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝓣𝒚 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒕 𝒆𝒕 𝒕 + 𝟏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂

𝒚𝒕+𝟏 − 𝒚𝒕 𝚫𝒚𝒕 𝒚𝒕+𝟏

𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒆 ∶ 𝓣𝒚 = = = −𝟏
𝒚𝒕 𝒚𝒕 𝒚𝒕

 𝑻𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅’𝒖𝒏 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑺𝒖𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆

𝒚 𝒔𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆­ 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒕 𝒅’𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒌 (𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒂𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔), 𝒉𝒕 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒕

𝜷
(𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔𝒂𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔) ∶ 𝒚𝒕 = 𝒌𝒉𝜶𝒕 𝒍𝒕

𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒚 𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔

𝒚𝒕+𝟏 − 𝒚𝒕 𝒚𝒕+𝟏
𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔, 𝒐𝒏 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒍’𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒙𝒊𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 ∶ 𝓣𝒚 = = − 𝟏 ≈ 𝐥𝐧 𝒚𝒕+𝟏 − 𝐥𝐧 𝒚𝒕
𝒚𝒕 𝒚𝒕
𝒚𝒕+𝟏 𝒚𝒕+𝟏 𝒚𝒕+𝟏
𝒑𝒖𝒊𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒔𝒊 𝒚𝒕+𝟏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒚𝒕 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 → 𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝐥𝐧 ( )~ −𝟏
𝒚𝒕 ⏟ 𝒚𝒕 ⏟𝒚𝒕
𝐥𝐧 𝒚𝒕+𝟏 −𝐥𝐧 𝒚𝒕 𝓣𝒚

𝑪𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒙𝒊𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é ∶ (𝐥𝐧(𝒙) ~𝟏 (𝒙 − 𝟏))

𝑬𝒏 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒙𝒊𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒕 𝒆𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 (𝓣𝒉 ≈ 𝐥𝐧(𝒉𝒕+𝟏 ) − 𝐥𝐧(𝒉𝒕 )) 𝒆𝒕

(𝓣𝒍 ≈ 𝐥𝐧(𝒍𝒕+𝟏 ) − 𝐥𝐧(𝒍𝒕 )) 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒉𝒕 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒕 , 𝒐𝒏 𝒂 ∶

150 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝓣𝒚 ≈ 𝐥𝐧 𝒚𝒕+𝟏 − 𝐥𝐧 𝒚𝒕
𝜷
{𝐥𝐧 𝒚𝒕+𝟏 = 𝐥𝐧(𝒌𝒉𝜶𝒕+𝟏 𝒍𝒕+𝟏 ) = 𝐥𝐧(𝒌) + 𝜶 𝐥𝐧(𝒉𝒕+𝟏 ) + 𝜷 𝐥𝐧(𝒍𝒕+𝟏 )
𝜷
𝒍𝒏 𝒚𝒕 = 𝒍𝒏(𝒌𝒉𝜶𝒕 𝒍𝒕 ) = 𝒍𝒏(𝒌) + 𝜶 𝒍𝒏(𝒉𝒕 ) + 𝜷 𝒍𝒏(𝒍𝒕 )

𝒅′ 𝒐ù ∶ 𝓣𝒚 ≈ 𝐥𝐧 𝒚𝒕+𝟏 − 𝐥𝐧 𝒚𝒕 = 𝜶𝓣𝒉 + 𝜷𝓣𝒍

 𝑺𝒊 𝒚𝒕 = 𝒉𝒕 𝒍𝒕 , 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝓣𝒚 = (𝟏 + 𝓣𝒉 )(𝟏 + 𝓣𝒍 ) − 𝟏 𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝓣𝒚 ≈ 𝓣𝒉 + 𝓣𝒍

𝒉𝒕 𝟏 + 𝓣𝒉
 𝑺𝒊 𝒚𝒕 = , 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝓣𝒚 = − 𝟏 𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝓣𝒚 ≈ 𝓣𝒉 − 𝓣𝒍
𝒍𝒕 𝟏 + 𝓣𝒍

 𝑷𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é 𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝑺𝒊 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒚 𝒆𝒏 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒄𝒓𝒆𝒕 𝒄𝒓𝒐î𝒕 𝒂𝒖 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙

𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕, 𝓣𝒚 = 𝒓, 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é 𝒚𝒕 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒂𝒖𝒈𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕é𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝓣𝒚 𝒚𝒕 = 𝒓𝒚𝒕 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒗𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 ∶

𝒚𝒕+𝟏 = 𝒚𝒕 + 𝒓𝒚𝒕 = (𝟏 + 𝒓)𝒚𝒕 𝒔𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒂𝒕𝒆 𝒕 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒆:

𝒚𝒕+𝟏 = (𝟏 + 𝓣𝒚 )𝒚𝒕 = (𝟏 + 𝒓)𝒚𝒕

𝑳𝒆 𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒆 (𝟏 + 𝒓) 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍é 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒊𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒐𝒄𝒊é 𝒂𝒖 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒓.

 𝑹𝒆𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒎𝒃𝒓𝒆 𝒓 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒇 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒄𝒓𝒐î𝒕 𝒆𝒕𝒏é𝒈𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒇

𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒅é𝒄𝒓𝒐î𝒕.

𝑨𝒑𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒓 (𝒕) 𝒇𝒐𝒊𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒖𝒏 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒓, 𝒓𝒆𝒗𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 à 𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒊𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒓 (𝒕) 𝒇𝒐𝒊𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒆

𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒊𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝟏 + 𝒓 . 𝑪𝒆𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒗𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 à 𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒊𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒑𝒂𝒓 (𝟏 + 𝒓)𝒕

𝑺𝒊 𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆 𝒚𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒂𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔 (𝒕) 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒂𝒖𝒈𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒓%, 𝒐𝒏 𝒂 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒆 ∶

𝒚𝒕 = 𝒚𝟎 (𝟏 + 𝒓)𝒕

𝓬 • 𝑻𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍 𝒆𝒕 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏 ∶ 𝑳𝒐𝒓𝒔𝒒𝒖’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒑é𝒓𝒊𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒕

𝒂𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔, 𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒑é𝒓𝒊𝒐𝒅𝒆.
𝒚𝒕 − 𝒚𝟎 𝒚𝒕
𝑺𝒊 𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒚𝟎 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒚𝒕 , 𝒄𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒆 ∶ 𝓣𝑮 = = −𝟏
𝒚𝟎 𝒚𝟎
𝒚𝒕
𝑳𝒆 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒂î𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒊𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒑é𝒓𝒊𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆
𝒚𝟎
𝒚𝒕
𝒑𝒖𝒊𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ = 𝟏 + 𝓣𝑮
𝒚𝟎

 𝑫é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 (𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏): 𝑳𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅’𝒂𝒄𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒏𝒏𝒖𝒆𝒍 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆

𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍 𝒂𝒖 𝒃𝒐𝒖𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒑é𝒓𝒊𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒕 𝒂𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔.
𝒕 𝒕
𝑶𝒏 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒍𝒐𝒏 𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒆 ∶ 𝓣𝑴 = √𝒚𝒕 ⁄𝒚𝟎 − 𝟏 = √𝟏 + 𝓣𝑮 − 𝟏

151 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝓐– 𝟐 • 𝑰𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 é𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝓪 • 𝑫é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝑳’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆.

𝑳𝒂 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒆𝒓 𝒍’é𝒗𝒐𝒍𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 “𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒙𝒕𝒆𝒔”

𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 ∶ 𝒆𝒏 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍, 𝒐𝒏 𝒔’𝒊𝒏𝒕é𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒆 à 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓 à 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔, 𝒎𝒂𝒊𝒔

𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒂𝒖𝒔𝒔𝒊 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒆 à 𝒍’𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒓é𝒈𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔

𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔. 𝑫𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒄𝒂𝒔, 𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒍𝒆 𝒅’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒆𝒍 𝒐𝒖 𝒄𝒉𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒐𝒍𝒐𝒈𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆, 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆

𝒔𝒆𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒅 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒅’𝒖𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒔𝒑𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒂𝒍 𝒐𝒖 𝒓é𝒈𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒂𝒍.

𝑺𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒈𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅′ 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝑮 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒂𝒕𝒆 𝒕 𝒆𝒕 𝒈𝒕′ 𝒔𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 à 𝒍′ é𝒑𝒐𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒕′ .

𝒈𝒕
𝑶𝒏 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 é𝒍é𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍’𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 : 𝒊𝒕⁄𝒕′ = = (𝟏 + 𝓣𝑮 )
𝒈𝒕′

𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎é𝒔 (𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆𝒔)𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒃𝒂𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝟏𝟎𝟎.
𝒈𝒕
𝑫𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔, 𝒐𝒏 é𝒄𝒓𝒊𝒕 ∶ 𝑰𝒕⁄𝒕′ = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × 𝒊𝒕⁄𝒕′
𝒈𝒕′

 𝑹𝒆𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 ∶

 𝑫𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 é𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔, 𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒉𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒊𝒕 𝒆𝒏 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒂𝒕𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒐𝒖 𝒅𝒂𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆

𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒇𝒊é𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔 𝒛é𝒓𝒐” 𝒆𝒕 𝒐𝒏 é𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒊𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 à 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒂𝒕𝒆.
𝒈𝒕
𝑳’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝟏𝟎𝟎 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒂𝒕𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 ∶ 𝑰𝒕⁄𝟎 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × 𝒊𝒕⁄𝟎 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × (𝟏 + 𝓣𝑮 )
𝒈𝟎

 𝑳𝒆 𝒄𝒉𝒐𝒊𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒃𝒂𝒔𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒂𝒓𝒃𝒊𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒕 𝒂𝒖𝒔𝒔𝒊 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒃𝒂𝒔𝒆 𝟏 𝒐𝒖 𝒖𝒏𝒆

𝒃𝒂𝒔𝒆 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎. 𝑳𝒂 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒗𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒓𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒆𝒔 à 𝒖𝒏 𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒊𝒑𝒍𝒆

𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒃𝒂𝒔𝒆 𝒑𝒓è𝒔, 𝒆𝒏 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍 à 𝒖𝒏 𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒊𝒑𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝒑𝒓è𝒔.

𝒈𝒕 − 𝒈𝟎
 𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝑷𝑽𝒕⁄𝟎 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × 𝓣𝑮 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( ) = 𝑰𝒕⁄𝟎 − 𝟏𝟎𝟎
𝒈𝟎

 𝑻𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅′ 𝒂𝒄𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒕 𝒆𝒕 𝒕 + 𝟏 𝒅′ 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒚 ∶

𝒚𝒕+𝟏 − 𝒚𝒕 𝚫𝒚𝒕 𝒚𝒕+𝟏
𝓣𝒚 = = = − 𝟏 = 𝒊𝒕+𝟏⁄𝒕 (𝒚) − 𝟏
𝒚𝒕 𝒚𝒕 𝒚𝒕

𝓫 • 𝑰𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒓𝒔 (𝑰𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ):

𝒑𝒕
 𝑰𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 ∶ 𝑰𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × 𝒊𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑)
𝒑𝟎

152 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒒𝒕
 𝑰𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔 ∶ 𝑰𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × 𝒊𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒒)
𝒒𝟎
𝒗𝒕
 𝑰𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 ∶ 𝑰𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒗) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × 𝒊𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒗)
𝒗𝟎

𝓬 • 𝑷𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 é𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝒈𝒕
𝒊𝒕⁄𝒕 = = 𝟏
𝒈𝒕
 𝑰𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é ∶ { 𝒈𝒕
𝑰𝒕⁄𝒕 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × = 𝟏𝟎𝟎
𝒈𝒕

 𝑯𝒐𝒎𝒐𝒈é𝒏é𝒊𝒕é ∶ 𝑳’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒎𝒆𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒆

𝟏
𝒊𝒕⁄𝟎 =
𝒊𝟎⁄𝒕
 𝑹é𝒗𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒕é ∶
𝟏𝟎𝟒
𝑰𝒕⁄𝟎 =
{ 𝑰𝟎⁄𝒕

𝑻𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒕é 𝒊𝒕⁄𝒖 × 𝒊𝒖⁄𝒗 = 𝒊𝒕⁄𝒗

 (𝑻𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒔𝒇é𝒓𝒂𝒃𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒕é ∶{
𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒉𝒂î𝒏𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆) 𝑰𝒕⁄𝒖 × 𝑰𝒖⁄𝒗 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × 𝑰𝒕⁄𝒗

𝑮𝒓â𝒄𝒆 à 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é, 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒆𝒓 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 à 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔, 𝒊𝒍 𝒔𝒖𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒕

𝑰𝒕⁄𝒗
𝒅𝒆 𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒐𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 à 𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑰𝒕⁄𝒖 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 ×
𝑰𝒖⁄𝒗

𝑰𝒕⁄𝟎
𝒆𝒏 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒗 = 𝟎 ∶ 𝑰𝒕⁄𝒖 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 ×
𝑰𝒖⁄𝟎

𝒊𝟎⁄𝒕 × 𝒊𝒕⁄𝒖 × 𝒊𝒖⁄𝟎 = 𝟏

 𝑪𝒊𝒓𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕é ∶ {
𝑰𝟎⁄𝒕 × 𝑰𝒕⁄𝒖 × 𝑰𝒖⁄𝟎 = 𝟏𝟎𝟔

 𝑴𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒊𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝑺𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒑 𝒆𝒕 𝒒 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆

𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒕 (𝒑𝒒) 𝒂 𝒖𝒏 𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒔, 𝒍′ 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 é𝒍é𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒋𝒐𝒖𝒊𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒊𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶

𝒊𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑𝒒) = 𝒊𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑)𝒊𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒒)

{
𝟏𝟎𝟎 × 𝑰𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑𝒒) = 𝑰𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑)𝑰𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒒)

𝑪𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒕𝒆 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒔𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒆𝒗𝒐𝒊𝒓 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔

 𝑹𝒆𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 ∶ (𝒗 = 𝒑 × 𝒒)

𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 = 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 × 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é ⟺ 𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆 = 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 × 𝒗𝒐𝒍𝒖𝒎𝒆

153 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014

Exercice 13 (7 points = 1 point par question) :

ÉNONCÉ
𝑪𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔 𝑿𝒕 𝒆𝒕 𝒀𝒕 𝒐𝒃𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒗é𝒆𝒔 à 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒑é𝒓𝒊𝒐𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒄𝒄𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔.
𝑶𝒏 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒆 𝑹𝑿𝒕 𝒆𝒕 𝑹𝒀𝒕 𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑é𝒓𝒊𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒕 − 𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂
𝒑é𝒓𝒊𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝑿𝒕 𝒆𝒕 𝒀𝒕 . 𝑶𝒏 𝒔’𝒊𝒏𝒕é𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒆 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 :
𝑺𝒕 = 𝑿𝒕 + 𝒀𝒕 𝒆𝒕 𝑷𝒕 = 𝑿𝒕 𝒀𝒕
1)
i. 𝑹𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍’𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝑹𝑿𝒕 𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝑿𝒕 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝑿𝒕−𝟏 . 𝑬𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕
𝑿𝒕
𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝑹𝑿𝒕
𝑿𝒕−𝟏
ii. 𝑸𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒕 𝒍’𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝑿𝒕 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒐ù 𝑹𝑿𝒕 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆
𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒄 𝒊𝒏𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔 ?
2)
i. 𝑬𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒓 𝑹𝑷𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒕 𝑷𝒕 𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝑹𝑿𝒕 𝒆𝒕 𝑹𝒀𝒕
ii. 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓é𝒕𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒓é𝒔𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒕 𝒑𝒓é𝒄é𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒔𝒊 𝒍′ 𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅è𝒓𝒆 𝑿𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒖𝒏 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒆𝒕𝒀𝒕
𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é
iii. 𝑬𝒏 𝒅é𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝟐)­𝐢. 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑿𝟐𝒕 𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝑹𝑿𝒕
3)
i. 𝑬𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒓 𝑹𝑺𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝑺𝒕 𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝑹𝑿𝒕 𝒆𝒕 𝑹𝒀𝒕 𝒆𝒕
𝒅𝒆 𝑿𝒕−𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝒀𝒕−𝟏
ii. 𝑸𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒗𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒓é𝒔𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒕 𝒑𝒓é𝒄è𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒔𝒊 𝒍′ 𝒐𝒏𝒂 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 ?
𝑱𝒖𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒗𝒐𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒔.

Corrigé
1)
i.

𝜟𝑿𝒕 𝑿𝒕 − 𝑿𝒕−𝟏 𝑿𝒕 𝑿𝒕
𝑹𝑿𝒕 = = = −𝟏⟺ = 𝟏 + 𝑹𝑿𝒕
𝑿𝒕−𝟏 𝑿𝒕−𝟏 𝑿𝒕−𝟏 𝑿𝒕−𝟏

𝒀𝒕
𝑫𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆, 𝒐𝒏 𝒗é𝒓𝒊𝒇𝒊𝒆 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝒒𝒖𝒆 : = 𝟏 + 𝑹𝒀𝒕
𝒀𝒕−𝟏

ii. 𝑺𝒊 𝑿𝒕 𝒂𝒖𝒈𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒎𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 (𝒊𝒏𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒎𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔)𝒅𝒆 𝒄% (𝑹𝑿𝒕 = 𝒄)

154 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝑿𝒕
𝑶𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕, 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 : = 𝟏 + 𝑹𝑿𝒕 = 𝟏 + 𝒄 ⟺ 𝑿𝒕 = (𝟏 + 𝒄)𝑿𝒕−𝟏
𝑿𝒕−𝟏

𝑶𝒏 𝒔𝒖𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝑿𝒕 ≠ 𝟎 𝒄­à­𝒅. 𝑹𝑿𝒕 ≠ −𝟏 𝒐𝒖 𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒆 𝒄 ≠ −𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝑿𝟎 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂

𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝑿 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒂𝒕𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒂𝒍𝒆( 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆).

𝑨𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊 𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒄𝒖𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝑿𝒕 = (𝟏 + 𝒄)𝑿𝒕−𝟏 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒈é𝒐𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏

𝒏𝒐𝒏 𝒏𝒖𝒍𝒍𝒆 (𝟏 + 𝒄) 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒆 𝑿𝟎 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒆 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍 𝒏𝒐𝒖𝒔 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆

𝒍’𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝑿𝒕 ∶ 𝑿𝒕 = 𝑿𝟎 (𝟏 + 𝒄)𝒕

2)
𝚫𝑷𝒕 𝑷𝒕 −𝑷𝒕−𝟏 𝑷𝒕 𝑿𝒕 𝒀𝒕 𝑿 𝒀
i. 𝑹𝑷𝒕 = = = −𝟏= − 𝟏 = ( 𝒕 )( 𝒕 ) − 𝟏
𝑷𝒕−𝟏 𝑷𝒕−𝟏 𝑷𝒕−𝟏 𝑿𝒕−𝟏 𝒀𝒕−𝟏 ⏟𝑿𝒕−𝟏 ⏟𝒀𝒕−𝟏
𝟏+𝑹𝑿𝒕 𝟏+𝑹𝒀𝒕

𝑫′ 𝒐ù 𝟏 + 𝑹𝑷𝒕 = (𝟏 + 𝑹𝑿𝒕 )(𝟏 + 𝑹𝒀𝒕 )

𝑿𝒕 𝒀𝒕
ii. 𝑵𝒐𝒕𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 ∶ 𝑿 = 𝒊𝒕⁄𝒕−𝟏 (𝒑) 𝒆𝒕 = 𝒊𝒕⁄𝒕−𝟏 (𝒒) , 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔
𝒕−𝟏 𝒀𝒕−𝟏
𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝑿 𝒆𝒕𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂

𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒀 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒕 − 𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝒕 .

𝑿𝒕 𝒀𝒕 𝒊𝒕⁄𝒕−𝟏 (𝒑) = 𝟏 + 𝑹𝑿𝒕

𝑶𝒓 = 𝟏 + 𝑹𝑿𝒕 𝒆𝒕 = 𝟏 + 𝑹𝒀𝒕 ⇒ {
𝑿𝒕−𝟏 𝒀𝒕−𝟏 𝒊𝒕⁄𝒕−𝟏 (𝒒) = 𝟏 + 𝑹𝒀𝒕

𝑫′ 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕, 𝑷𝒕 = 𝑿𝒕 𝒀𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒄 𝒍𝒂 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝑷 𝒏′ 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒗𝒐𝒍𝒖𝒎𝒆 (𝒐𝒖 𝒍𝒂 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓)𝒅′ 𝒖𝒏

𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕é 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝑿 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒀

𝑷𝒕 𝑷𝒕
𝑶𝒏 𝒂𝒖𝒓𝒂 𝒂𝒖𝒔𝒔𝒊 = 𝒊𝒕⁄𝒕−𝟏 (𝒗) , = 𝟏 + 𝑷𝑿𝒕 𝒆𝒕 é𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒆𝒎𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒊𝒕⁄𝒕−𝟏 (𝒗) = 𝟏 + 𝑹𝑷𝒕
𝑷𝒕−𝟏 𝑷𝒕−𝟏

𝑬𝒏 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒕 (𝟏 + 𝑹𝑷𝒕 ) = (𝟏 + 𝑹𝑿𝒕 )(𝟏 + 𝑹𝒀𝒕 ) ⟺ 𝒊𝒕⁄𝒕−𝟏 (𝒗) = 𝒊𝒕⁄𝒕−𝟏 (𝒑) × 𝒊𝒕⁄𝒕−𝟏 (𝒒)

𝑬𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕 𝒍’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 é𝒍é𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 (𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒕𝒊𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒄𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏)𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆

𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒕 𝑷𝒕 = 𝑿𝒕 𝒀𝒕 à 𝒖𝒏 𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒔 (𝒗𝒐𝒍𝒖𝒎𝒆 )

iii. 𝑶𝒏 𝒂 ∶ 𝟏 + 𝑹𝑷𝒕 = (𝟏 + 𝑹𝑿𝒕 )(𝟏 + 𝑹𝒀𝒕 ) 𝒐𝒓 𝒔𝒊 𝑿𝒕 = 𝒀𝒕 , 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝑷𝒕 = 𝑿𝟐𝒕

𝑶𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒕𝒆 ∶ 𝟏 + 𝑹𝑿𝟐𝒕 = (𝟏 + 𝑹𝑿𝒕 )𝟐 ⟺ 𝟏 + 𝑹𝑿𝟐𝒕 = 𝟏 + (𝑹𝑿𝒕 )𝟐 + 𝟐𝑹𝑿𝒕

𝑫′ 𝒐ù: 𝑹𝑿𝟐𝒕 = (𝑹𝑿𝒕 )𝟐 + 𝟐𝑹𝑿𝒕

3)
𝚫𝑺𝒕 𝑺𝒕 −𝑺𝒕−𝟏 𝑺𝒕 𝑿𝒕 +𝒀𝒕
i. 𝑹𝑺𝒕 = 𝑺 = =𝑺 −𝟏=𝑿 −𝟏
𝒕−𝟏 𝑺𝒕−𝟏 𝒕−𝟏 𝒕−𝟏 +𝒀𝒕−𝟏

155 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝑿𝒕
= 𝟏 + 𝑹𝑿𝒕
𝑿𝒕−𝟏 𝑿 = (𝟏 + 𝑹𝑿𝒕 )𝑿𝒕−𝟏 (𝟏 + 𝑹𝑿𝒕 )𝑿𝒕−𝟏 + (𝟏 + 𝑹𝒀𝒕 )𝒀𝒕−𝟏
𝑶𝒓 ⟺{ 𝒕 ⟺ 𝑹𝑺𝒕 = −𝟏
𝒀𝒕 𝒀𝒕 = (𝟏 + 𝑹𝒀𝒕 )𝒀𝒕−𝟏 𝑿𝒕−𝟏 + 𝒀𝒕−𝟏
= 𝟏 + 𝑹𝒀𝒕
{ 𝒀𝒕−𝟏

𝑿𝒕−𝟏 + 𝒀𝒕−𝟏 + 𝑹𝑿𝒕 𝑿𝒕−𝟏 + 𝑹𝒀𝒕 𝒀𝒕−𝟏 𝑹𝑿𝒕 𝑿𝒕−𝟏 + 𝑹𝒀𝒕 𝒀𝒕−𝟏
𝑹𝑺𝒕 = −𝟏 = 𝟏+ −𝟏
𝑿𝒕−𝟏 + 𝒀𝒕−𝟏 𝑿𝒕−𝟏 + 𝒀𝒕−𝟏

𝑹𝑿𝒕 𝑿𝒕−𝟏 + 𝑹𝒀𝒕 𝒀𝒕−𝟏

𝑫′ 𝒐ù 𝑹𝑺𝒕 =
𝑿𝒕−𝟏 + 𝒀𝒕−𝟏

ii. É𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏é 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔 𝑿𝒕 , 𝒀𝒕 , 𝒁𝒕 𝒆𝒕 𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝑺𝒕 = 𝑿𝒕 + 𝒀𝒕 + 𝒁𝒕

𝚫𝑺𝒕 𝑺𝒕 − 𝑺𝒕−𝟏 𝑺𝒕 𝑿𝒕 + 𝒀𝒕 + 𝒁𝒕
𝑶𝒏 𝒔𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒆 𝒅’𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒓 𝑹𝑺𝒕 = = = −𝟏= −𝟏
𝑺𝒕−𝟏 𝑺𝒕−𝟏 𝑺𝒕−𝟏 𝑿𝒕−𝟏 + 𝒀𝒕−𝟏 + 𝒁𝒕−𝟏

𝒆𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝑹𝑿𝒕 , 𝑹𝒀𝒕 , 𝑹𝒁𝒕 , 𝑿𝒕−𝟏 , 𝒀𝒕−𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝒁𝒕−𝟏 ∶

𝑿𝒕 ⁄𝑿𝒕−𝟏 = 𝟏 + 𝑹𝑿𝒕 𝑿𝒕 = (𝟏 + 𝑹𝑿𝒕 )𝑿𝒕−𝟏

𝑶𝒓 { 𝒀𝒕 ⁄𝒀𝒕−𝟏 = 𝟏 + 𝑹𝒀𝒕 ⟺ { 𝒀𝒕 = (𝟏 + 𝑹𝒀𝒕 )𝒀𝒕−𝟏
𝒁𝒕 ⁄𝒁𝒕−𝟏 = 𝟏 + 𝑹𝒁𝒕 𝒁𝒕 = (𝟏 + 𝑹𝒁𝒕 )𝒁𝒕−𝟏

(𝟏 + 𝑹𝑿𝒕 )𝑿𝒕−𝟏 + (𝟏 + 𝑹𝒀𝒕 )𝒀𝒕−𝟏 + (𝟏 + 𝑹𝒀𝒕 )𝒀𝒕−𝟏

⟺ 𝑹𝑺𝒕 = −𝟏
𝑿𝒕−𝟏 + 𝒀𝒕−𝟏 + 𝒁𝒕−𝟏

𝑿𝒕−𝟏 + 𝒀𝒕−𝟏 + 𝒁𝒕−𝟏 + 𝑹𝑿𝒕 𝑿𝒕−𝟏 + 𝑹𝒀𝒕 𝒀𝒕−𝟏 + 𝑹𝒁𝒕 𝒁𝒕−𝟏

⟺ 𝑹𝑺𝒕 = −𝟏
𝑿𝒕−𝟏 + 𝒀𝒕−𝟏 + 𝒁𝒕−𝟏

𝑹𝑿𝒕 𝑿𝒕−𝟏 + 𝑹𝒀𝒕 𝒀𝒕−𝟏 + 𝑹𝒁𝒕 𝒁𝒕−𝟏

⟺ 𝑹𝑺𝒕 = 𝟏 + −𝟏
𝑿𝒕−𝟏 + 𝒀𝒕−𝟏 + 𝒁𝒕−𝟏

𝑹𝑿𝒕 𝑿𝒕−𝟏 + 𝑹𝒀𝒕 𝒀𝒕−𝟏 + 𝑹𝒁𝒕 𝒁𝒕−𝟏

𝑫′ 𝒐ù 𝑹𝑺𝒕 =
𝑿𝒕−𝟏 + 𝒀𝒕−𝟏 + 𝒁𝒕−𝟏

Exercice 14 :
ÉNONCÉ
𝑼𝒏𝒆 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒇𝒂𝒃𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒒𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝒒𝟐 𝒒𝒖’𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒅 𝒂𝒖 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔

𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝒑𝟐 . 𝑶𝒏 𝒔𝒂𝒊𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒖𝒓é𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝟐 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒐𝒖𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒖𝒓é𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓

𝒍𝒆 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝟏.

1) 𝑨𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒏𝒏é𝒆, 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒑𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝒑𝟐 𝒂𝒖𝒈𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝟏, 𝟓% 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝟐%

𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒔 𝒂𝒖𝒈𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝟓% 𝒆𝒕 𝟑% 𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕.
𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍’𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆.
2) 𝑸𝒖𝒆𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕, 𝒂𝒖 𝒃𝒐𝒖𝒕 𝒅’𝒖𝒏 𝒂𝒏, 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒔 ?

156 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
3) 𝑨𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍’𝒂𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆, 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒖 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝟐 𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒉𝒖𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝟏𝟎% 𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙
𝒑𝟐 𝒂𝒖𝒈𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝟓%. 𝑬𝒏 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔, 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒖 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝟏 𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔é 𝒅𝒆 𝟏𝟎%.
𝑸𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒑𝟏 𝒇𝒆𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒕 𝒆𝒏 𝒔𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒕𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒈é𝒆 ?
4) 𝑸𝒖𝒆𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕, 𝒂𝒖 𝒃𝒐𝒖𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒂𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔, 𝒍𝒆 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒔 ?

Corrigé
1) 𝑵𝒐𝒕𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒓𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝒓𝟐 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒖𝒓é𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒔. 𝑳𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒂𝒖 𝒅é𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕

𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒓 = 𝒓𝟏 + 𝒓𝟐 , 𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒖 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 ∶
𝒓𝟏 = 𝒑𝟏 𝒒𝟏
{𝒓 = 𝒑 𝒒
𝟐 𝟐 𝟐

𝑺𝒐𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒑′𝟏 , 𝒑′𝟐 , 𝒒′𝟏 , 𝒒′𝟐 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒆𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒔 𝒂𝒖 𝒃𝒐𝒖𝒕 𝒅’𝒖𝒏 𝒂𝒏 ; 𝓣𝒑𝟏 , 𝓣𝒑𝟐 , 𝓣𝒒𝟏

𝒆𝒕 𝓣𝒒𝟐 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 .

𝒑′𝟏 − 𝒑𝟏 𝒑′𝟏 𝒑′𝟏

𝑶𝒏 𝒂 ∶ 𝓣𝒑𝟏 = = −𝟏⟺ = 𝟏 + 𝓣𝒑𝟏 ⟺ 𝒑′𝟏 = (𝟏 + 𝓣𝒑𝟏 )𝒑𝟏 = (𝟏𝟎𝟎% + 𝟏, 𝟓%)𝒑𝟏
𝒑𝟏 𝒑𝟏 𝒑𝟏

𝒑′𝟏 = 𝟏, 𝟎𝟏𝟓𝒑𝟏 𝒆𝒕 𝒒′𝟏 = (𝟏 + 𝓣𝒒𝟏 )𝒑𝟏 = (𝟏𝟎𝟎% + 𝟓%)𝒒𝟏 = 𝟏, 𝟎𝟓𝒒𝟏

𝒑′𝟐 = (𝟏 + 𝓣𝒑𝟐 )𝒑𝟐 = (𝟏𝟎𝟎% + 𝟐%)𝒑𝟐 = 𝟏, 𝟎𝟐𝒑𝟐 𝒆𝒕 𝒒′𝟐 = (𝟏 + 𝓣𝒒𝟐 )𝒒𝟐 = (𝟏𝟎𝟎% + 𝟑%)𝒒𝟐 = 𝟏, 𝟎𝟑𝒒𝟐

𝑶𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒊 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒔 𝒂𝒖 𝒃𝒐𝒖𝒕 𝒅’𝒖𝒏 𝒂𝒏 ∶

𝒓′𝟏 = 𝒑′𝟏 𝒒′𝟏 = 𝟏, 𝟎𝟏𝟓𝒑𝟏 × 𝟏, 𝟎𝟓𝒒𝟏 = 𝟏, 𝟎𝟔𝟓𝟕𝟓𝒑𝟏 𝒒𝟏 = 𝟏, 𝟎𝟔𝟓𝟕𝟓𝒓𝟏

{
𝒓′𝟐 = 𝒑′𝟐 𝒒′𝟐 = 𝟏, 𝟎𝟐𝒑𝟐 × 𝟏, 𝟎𝟑𝒒𝟐 = 𝟏, 𝟎𝟓𝟎𝟔𝒑𝟐 𝒒𝟐 = 𝟏, 𝟎𝟓𝟎𝟔𝒓𝟐

𝑳𝒂 𝒏𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 ∶ 𝒓′ = 𝒓′𝟏 + 𝒓′𝟐 = 𝟏, 𝟎𝟔𝟓𝟕𝟓𝒓𝟏 + 𝟏, 𝟎𝟓𝟎𝟔𝒓𝟐

𝑳𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒍’𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 ∶

𝒓′ − 𝒓 (𝟏, 𝟎𝟔𝟓𝟕𝟓𝒓𝟏 + 𝟏, 𝟎𝟓𝟎𝟔𝒓𝟐 ) − (𝒓𝟏 + 𝒓𝟐 ) 𝟎, 𝟎𝟔𝟓𝟕𝟓𝒓𝟏 + 𝟎, 𝟎𝟓𝟎𝟔𝒓𝟐

𝓣𝒓 = = =
𝒓 𝒓𝟏 + 𝒓𝟐 𝒓𝟏 + 𝒓𝟐

𝑶𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒖𝒓é𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝟐 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒐𝒖𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒄𝒖𝒓é𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝟏

⇒ 𝒓𝟐 = 𝟐𝒓𝟏

𝟎, 𝟎𝟔𝟓𝟕𝟓𝒓𝟏 + (𝟎, 𝟎𝟓𝟎𝟔 × 𝟐𝒓𝟏 ) 𝟎, 𝟏𝟔𝟔𝟗𝟓𝒓𝟏

𝑷𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒂 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒕𝒆, 𝓣𝒓 = = = 𝟎, 𝟎𝟓𝟓𝟔𝟓
𝒓𝟏 + 𝟐𝒓𝟏 𝟑𝒓𝟏

𝓣𝒓 ≈ 𝟓, 𝟓𝟕%
𝒓
2) 𝑺𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝜸′ 𝒍𝒆 𝒏𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒔 𝒆𝒕 𝜸 = 𝒓𝟐 = 𝟐 ,
𝟏

𝒓′𝟐 ′
𝟏, 𝟎𝟓𝟎𝟔𝒓𝟐 𝒓𝟐
𝒍𝒆 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒂𝒖 𝒅é𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕 ∶ 𝜸 = ′ = = 𝟎, 𝟗𝟖𝟓𝟖 = 𝟎, 𝟗𝟖𝟓𝟖𝜸 = 𝟏, 𝟗𝟕𝟏𝟔
𝒓𝟏 𝟏, 𝟎𝟔𝟓𝟕𝟓𝒓𝟏 𝒓𝟏

157 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝑳𝒆 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒂 𝒖𝒏 𝒑𝒆𝒖 𝒃𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒔é ∶ 𝒊𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔𝒔é 𝒅𝒆 𝟐 à 𝟏, 𝟗𝟕𝟏𝟔 , 𝒔𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒃𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝟏, 𝟒𝟐%

3) 𝑨𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍’𝒂𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 :

∙ 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒖 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝟐 𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒉𝒖𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝟏𝟎% ∶ 𝒒′′ ′ ′ ′ ′

𝟐 = (𝟏 + 𝓣𝒒𝟐 )𝒒𝟐 = (𝟏𝟎𝟎% − 𝟏𝟎%)𝒒𝟐 = 𝟎, 𝟗𝒒𝟐

∙ 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒅𝒖 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝟐 𝒂𝒖𝒈𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝟓%: 𝒑′′ ′ ′ ′ ′

𝟐 = (𝟏 + 𝓣𝒑𝟐 )𝒑𝟐 = (𝟏𝟎𝟎% + 𝟓%)𝒑𝟐 = 𝟏, 𝟎𝟓𝒑𝟐

∙ 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒖 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝟏 𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒈𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔é 𝒅𝒆 𝟏𝟎% ∶ 𝒒′′ ′ ′ ′ ′

𝟏 = (𝟏 + 𝓣𝒒𝟏 )𝒒𝟏 = (𝟏𝟎𝟎% + 𝟏𝟎%)𝒒𝟏 = 𝟏, 𝟏𝒒𝟏

∙ 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒏𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒔 ∶

𝒓′′ ′′ ′′ ′ ′ ′ ′ ′ ′ ′ ′
𝟏 = 𝒑𝟏 𝒒𝟏 = (𝟏 + 𝓣𝒑𝟏 )𝒑𝟏 × 𝟏, 𝟏𝒒𝟏 = 𝟏, 𝟏(𝟏 + 𝓣𝒑𝟏 )𝒑𝟏 𝒒𝟏 = 𝟏, 𝟏(𝟏 + 𝓣𝒑𝟏 )𝒓𝟏
{
𝒓′′ ′′ ′′ ′ ′ ′ ′
𝟐 = 𝒑𝟐 𝒒𝟐 = 𝟏, 𝟎𝟓𝒑𝟐 × 𝟎, 𝟗𝒒𝟐 = 𝟎, 𝟗𝟒𝟓𝒑𝟐 𝒒𝟐 = 𝟎, 𝟗𝟒𝟓𝒓𝟐
′

𝑳𝒂 𝒏𝒐𝒖𝒗𝒆𝒍𝒍𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 ∶ 𝒓′′ = 𝒓′′ ′′ ′ ′ ′

𝟏 + 𝒓𝟐 = 𝟏, 𝟏(𝟏 + 𝓣𝒑𝟏 )𝒓𝟏 + 𝟎, 𝟗𝟒𝟓𝒓𝟐

𝒓′𝟐
𝑶𝒏 𝒂 𝒗𝒖 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒓é𝒄é𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝜸 = ′ = 𝟏, 𝟗𝟕𝟏𝟔 ⟹ 𝒓′𝟐 = 𝟏, 𝟗𝟕𝟏𝟔𝒓′𝟏
′
𝒓𝟏

𝑪𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒊 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆 ∶ 𝒓′′ = 𝟏, 𝟏(𝟏 + 𝓣′𝒑𝟏 )𝒓′𝟏 + 𝟎, 𝟗𝟒𝟓𝒓′𝟐 = 𝟏, 𝟏(𝟏 + 𝓣′𝒑𝟏 )𝒓′𝟏 + (𝟎, 𝟗𝟒𝟓 × 𝟏, 𝟗𝟕𝟏𝟔𝒓′𝟏 )

𝒓′′ = 𝟏, 𝟏𝓣′𝒑𝟏 𝒓′𝟏 + 𝟏, 𝟏𝒓′𝟏 + 𝟏, 𝟖𝟔𝟑𝟏𝟔𝟐𝒓′𝟏 = 𝟏, 𝟏𝓣′𝒑𝟏 𝒓′𝟏 + 𝟐, 𝟗𝟔𝟑𝟏𝟔𝒓′𝟏

𝑶𝒓 𝒓′𝟏 = 𝟏, 𝟎𝟔𝟓𝟕𝟓𝒓𝟏 ⟹ 𝒓′′ = (𝟏, 𝟏 × 𝟏, 𝟎𝟔𝟓𝟕𝟓𝓣′𝒑𝟏 𝒓𝟏 ) + (𝟐, 𝟗𝟔𝟑𝟏𝟔 × 𝟏, 𝟎𝟔𝟓𝟕𝟓𝒓𝟏 )

𝒓′𝟏 = 𝟏, 𝟏𝟕𝟐𝟑𝟐𝟓𝓣′𝒑𝟏 𝒓𝟏 + 𝟑, 𝟏𝟓𝟕𝟗𝟖𝟕𝟕𝟕𝒓𝟏 = (𝟏, 𝟏𝟕𝟐𝟑𝟐𝟓𝓣′𝒑𝟏 + 𝟑, 𝟏𝟓𝟕𝟗𝟖𝟕𝟕𝟕)𝒓𝟏

𝑫′ 𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕, 𝒓′ = 𝒓′𝟏 + 𝒓′𝟐 = 𝟏, 𝟎𝟔𝟓𝟕𝟓𝒓𝟏 + 𝟏, 𝟎𝟓𝟎𝟔 ⏟

𝒓𝟐 = 𝟑, 𝟏𝟔𝟔𝟗𝟓𝒓𝟏
𝟐𝒓𝟏

𝑳𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒕𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒈é𝒆 ⟺ 𝒓′ = 𝒓′′ ⟺ 𝟑, 𝟏𝟔𝟔𝟗𝟓𝒓𝟏 = (𝟏, 𝟏𝟕𝟐𝟑𝟐𝟓𝓣′𝒑𝟏 + 𝟑, 𝟏𝟓𝟕𝟗𝟖𝟕𝟕𝟕)𝒓𝟏

𝟑, 𝟏𝟔𝟔𝟗𝟓 − 𝟑, 𝟏𝟓𝟕𝟗𝟖𝟕𝟕𝟕
⟺ 𝟑, 𝟏𝟔𝟔𝟗𝟓 = 𝟏, 𝟏𝟕𝟐𝟑𝟐𝟓𝓣′𝒑𝟏 + 𝟑, 𝟏𝟓𝟕𝟗𝟖𝟕𝟕𝟕 ⟺ 𝓣′𝒑𝟏 = = 𝟎, 𝟎𝟎𝟕𝟔
𝟏, 𝟏𝟕𝟐𝟑𝟐𝟓

𝓣′𝒑𝟏 = 𝟎, 𝟕𝟔%

4) 𝑺𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝜸′′ 𝒍𝒆 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒔 𝒂𝒖 𝒃𝒐𝒖𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒂𝒏𝒏é𝒆𝒔

𝒓′′
𝟐
′′
𝟎, 𝟗𝟒𝟓𝒓′𝟐 𝟎, 𝟗𝟒𝟓𝒓′𝟐 𝟎, 𝟗𝟒𝟓𝒓′𝟐 𝒓′𝟐
𝜸 = ′′ = = = = 𝟎, 𝟖𝟓𝟐𝟔 ( ′ )
𝒓𝟏 𝟏, 𝟏(𝟏 + 𝓣′𝒑𝟏 )𝒓′𝟏 𝟏, 𝟏 × (𝟏𝟎𝟎% + 𝟎, 𝟕𝟔%)𝒓′𝟏 𝟏, 𝟏𝟎𝟖𝟑𝟔𝒓′𝟏 ⏟𝒓𝟏
𝜸′ =𝟏,𝟗𝟕𝟏𝟔

𝒓′′
𝟐
′′
𝜸 = ′′ = 𝟏, 𝟔𝟖
𝒓𝟏

158 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014

𝑼𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒅𝒊𝒕 𝒔𝒚𝒏𝒕𝒉é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔𝒒𝒖’𝒊𝒍 𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒓 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒖𝒓𝒆 à

𝒍𝒂 𝒇𝒐𝒊𝒔.

𝑺𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒏 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆 𝒏𝒂𝒕𝒖𝒓𝒆 : 𝒈𝟏 , 𝒈𝟐 , … , 𝒈𝒏 , 𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒎ê𝒎𝒆

𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 à 𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔, 𝒐𝒏 𝒂𝒖𝒓𝒂 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒖𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒔𝒚𝒏𝒕𝒉é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒔𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆, 𝒆𝒏 𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒂𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕

𝒖𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅é𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒏 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒓𝒂 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒖𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅é𝒓é.

𝓑– 𝟏 • 𝑰𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑩𝒓𝒂𝒅𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒆𝒕 (𝒐𝒖 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔) ∶

𝒈𝟏𝒕 + 𝒈𝟐𝒕 + ⋯ +𝒈𝒏𝒕 ∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 𝒈𝒌𝒕

𝑩𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈) = =
𝒈𝟏𝟎 + 𝒈𝟐𝟎 + ⋯ +𝒈𝒏𝟎 ∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 𝒈𝒌𝟎

𝓑– 𝟐 • 𝑴𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓, 𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓𝒆𝒓 𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 é𝒍é𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒂𝒍𝒐𝒓𝒔 𝒖𝒏𝒆

𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒔𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔.

𝒏 𝒏
𝟏 𝒈𝒌𝒕 𝟏
𝓪 • 𝑰𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑨𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈) = ∑ 𝒌 = ∑ 𝒊𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈𝒌 )
𝒏 𝒈𝟎 𝒏
𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏

𝒏 𝒏 𝒏
𝓫 • 𝑰𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒉𝒂𝒓𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑯𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈) = = =
∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏
𝟏 𝒈𝒌𝟎 ∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 𝒊𝟎⁄𝒕 (𝒈𝒌 )
𝒈𝒌𝒕 ⁄𝒈𝒌𝟎 ∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏
𝒈𝒌𝒕

𝒏 𝒏
𝒏 𝒈𝒌𝒕 𝒏
𝓬 • 𝑰𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒈é𝒐𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑮𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈) = √∏ = √∏ 𝒊𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈𝒌 )
𝒈𝒌𝟎
𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏

𝓭 • 𝑷𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é 𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 ∶ 𝑪𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 (𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆, 𝒉𝒂𝒓𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆

, 𝒈é𝒐𝒎é𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒆) 𝒗é𝒓𝒊𝒇𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 é𝒍é𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔

 𝑬𝒙𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆 ∶ 𝑨𝒕⁄𝒖 (𝒈) × 𝑨𝒖⁄𝒗 (𝒈) ≠ 𝑨𝒕⁄𝒗 (𝒈)

𝓑– 𝟑 • 𝑷𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒊è𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝑶𝒏 𝒔’𝒊𝒏𝒕é𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒆𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é. 𝑨 𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒅’𝒆𝒙𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆, 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓𝒐𝒏𝒔

𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 :

𝓪 • 𝑪𝒂𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶

159 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒏
𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝒕 𝟏 𝒑𝟏𝒕 𝒑𝟐𝒕 𝒑𝒏𝒕
𝑶𝒏 𝒂 ∶ 𝑨𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = ∑ 𝒌 = [ 𝟏 + 𝟐 + ⋯ + 𝒏 ]
𝒏 𝒑𝟎 𝒏 𝒑𝟎 𝒑𝟎 𝒑𝟎
𝒌=𝟏

𝟏 𝟏 𝒏 𝟏
𝒏 𝒏 (𝒑𝟏𝒕 × 𝟐
𝟏 ) + (𝒑𝒕 × 𝟐 ) + ⋯ + (𝒑𝒕 × 𝒑𝒏 ) 𝒏
𝟏 𝟏 𝒑𝟎 𝒑𝟎 𝟎 𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝒕
𝑫’𝒂𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕 ∶ ∑ (𝒑𝟏𝒕 × )⁄∑ (𝒑𝟏𝟎 × )= = ∑ 𝒌
𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝒏 𝒑𝟎
𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏 (𝒑𝟏𝟎 × 𝟏 ) + (𝒑𝟐𝟎 × 𝟐 ) + ⋯ + (𝒑𝒏𝟎 × 𝒏 ) 𝒌=𝟏
⏟ 𝒑𝟎 𝒑𝟎 𝒑 𝟎
𝒏

𝟏
𝒏 ∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 (𝒑𝒌𝒕 × )
′
𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝒕 𝒑𝒌𝟎
𝑫 𝒐ù, 𝑨𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = ∑ 𝒌 =
𝒏 𝒑𝟎 𝟏
𝒌=𝟏 ∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 (𝒑𝒌𝟎 × )
𝒑𝒌𝟎

𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
𝑪𝒆𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒇𝒂𝒊𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒗𝒆𝒏𝒊𝒓 𝒆𝒏 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅é𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏, 𝒍’𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 { , ,…, } 𝒐ù
𝒑𝟏𝟎 𝒑𝟐𝟎 𝒑𝒏𝟎

𝟏
( ) 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓é𝒆 𝒒𝒖′ 𝒐𝒏𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒅é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒓 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒆
𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝟏≤𝒌≤𝒏

𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒖𝒏𝒊𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒆𝒍é𝒆 (𝒑𝒂𝒏𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒇𝒊𝒙𝒆 ).

 𝑳′ 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝑨𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆 à 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒆𝒏 𝒉𝒂𝒖𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒒𝒖′ à𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒆𝒏
𝒏 𝒏
𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟎 + 𝚫𝒑𝒌𝒕 𝟏 𝚫𝒑𝒌𝒕
𝒃𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆. 𝑬𝒏 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒕 ∶ 𝑨𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = ∑ ( 𝒌
) = 𝟏 + ∑ 𝒌
, 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝚫𝒑𝒌𝒕 = 𝒑𝒌𝒕 − 𝒑𝒌𝟎
𝒏 𝒑𝟎 𝒏 𝒑𝟎
𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏

 𝑳′ 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 é𝒈𝒂𝒍 à 𝟏𝟎𝟎% 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆

𝚫𝒑𝒌𝒕
𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒂𝒄𝒄𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔 ( )
𝒑𝒌𝟎

𝟏
∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 (𝒑𝒌𝒕 × )
𝒏 𝒑𝒌𝒕
𝓫 • 𝑪𝒂𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒉𝒂𝒓𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑯𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = =
𝒑𝒌 𝟏
∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 𝟎𝒌 ∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 (𝒑𝒌𝟎 × )
𝒑𝒕 𝒑𝒌𝒕

𝑯𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍′ 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑩𝒓𝒂𝒅𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒆𝒕, 𝒐𝒃𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒖𝒆 𝒆𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒖𝒏

𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅é𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 { , ,…, } 𝒐ù ( ) 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒍𝒆
𝒑𝟏𝒕 𝒑𝟐𝒕 𝒑𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒌𝒕
𝟏≤𝒌≤𝒏

(𝒑𝒂𝒏𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 ).

 𝑳′ 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒉𝒂𝒓𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆, 𝑯𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒆𝒏 𝒃𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒔𝒆

𝓬 • 𝑹𝒆𝒎𝒂𝒓𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 ∶

160 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝟏
 𝑶𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 ∶ 𝑨𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈) =
𝑯𝟎⁄𝒕 (𝒈)

 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝑯, 𝑮 𝒆𝒕 𝑨 𝒔𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒔𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é𝒔 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝑯𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈) ≤ 𝑮𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈) ≤ 𝑨𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈)

𝑸𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒅 𝒐𝒏 𝒗𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒖𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 à 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙, 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒃𝒍è𝒎𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒗𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕

𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒊𝒒𝒖é. 𝑼𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒔𝒚𝒏𝒕𝒉é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅’𝒖𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒔𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒆

𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 à 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆. 𝑶𝒏 𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒖𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒖𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆

𝒔𝒚𝒏𝒕𝒉é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒆𝒏 𝒂𝒅𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒔𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆𝒔.

𝑰𝒍 𝒇𝒂𝒖𝒕, 𝒆𝒏 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒕, 𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒊𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒂𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒕é𝒆𝒔.

𝑮é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑩𝒓𝒂𝒅𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒆𝒕 𝒆𝒏 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅é𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒕 à 𝒍’𝒂𝒊𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅é𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 (𝒘) 𝒅𝒆𝒔

𝒘𝟏∗ 𝒈𝟏𝒕 + 𝒘𝟐∗ 𝒈𝟐𝒕 + ⋯ + 𝒘𝒏∗ 𝒈𝒏𝒕 ∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 𝒘𝒌∗ 𝒈𝒌𝒕

𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒔 (𝒈) ∶ 𝑩𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈) = 𝟏 𝟏 =
𝒘∗ 𝒈𝟎 + 𝒘𝟐∗ 𝒈𝟐𝟎 + ⋯ + 𝒘𝒏∗ 𝒈𝒏𝟎 ∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 𝒘𝒌∗ 𝒈𝒌𝟎

𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒖𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒏 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝟏, 𝟐, . . . , 𝒏, 𝒐𝒏

𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒏𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 ∶

• 𝒑𝒌𝒕 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒅𝒖 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 (𝒊) 𝒂𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔 (𝒕)

• 𝒒𝒌𝒕 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 (𝒊) 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎é𝒆 𝒂𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔 (𝒕)

𝑰𝒍 𝒆𝒙𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒎é𝒕𝒉𝒐𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒇𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙, 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆

𝑷𝒂𝒂𝒔𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒆𝒕 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒂𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒚𝒓𝒆𝒔.

𝓒– 𝟏 • 𝑰𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒂𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒚𝒓𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝓪 • 𝑫é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝑪′ 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒔𝒚𝒏𝒕𝒉é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅é𝒓é 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅é𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 (𝒘𝒌𝟎 ) 𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅

′
𝒘𝟏𝟎 𝒈𝟏𝒕 + 𝒘𝟐𝟎 𝒈𝟐𝒕 + ⋯ + 𝒘𝒏𝟎 𝒈𝒏𝒕 ∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 𝒘𝒌𝟎 𝒈𝒌𝒕
𝒅𝒆 𝒍 é𝒑𝒐𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒃𝒂𝒔𝒆 𝒔𝒆𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕: 𝑳𝒕⁄𝟎 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [ 𝟏 𝟏 ] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( 𝒏 )
𝒘𝟎 𝒈𝟎 + 𝒘𝟐𝟎 𝒈𝟐𝟎 + ⋯ + 𝒘𝒏𝟎 𝒈𝒏𝟎 ∑𝒌=𝟏 𝒘𝒌𝟎 𝒈𝒌𝟎

 𝑪𝒂𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒓𝒔 ∶

𝒒𝟏𝟎 𝒑𝟏𝒕 + 𝒒𝟐𝟎 𝒑𝟐𝒕 + ⋯ + 𝒒𝒏𝟎 𝒑𝒏𝒕 ∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝟎 𝒑𝒌𝒕

• 𝑷𝒓𝒊𝒙 ∶ 𝑳𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [ ] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( )
𝒒𝟏𝟎 𝒑𝟏𝟎 + 𝒒𝟐𝟎 𝒑𝟐𝟎 + ⋯ + 𝒒𝒏𝟎 𝒑𝒏𝟎 ∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝟎 𝒑𝒌𝟎

161 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒌
𝑶𝒏 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓, 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔 {𝒒𝟎 } 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒂𝒖𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍 𝒐𝒏

𝒗𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆.

𝒑𝟏𝟎 𝒒𝟏𝒕 + 𝒑𝟐𝟎 𝒒𝟐𝒕 + ⋯ + 𝒑𝒏𝟎 𝒒𝒏𝒕 ∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝒒𝒌𝒕

• 𝑸𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é ∶ 𝑳𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [ 𝟏 𝟏 ] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( 𝒏 )
𝒑𝟎 𝒒𝟎 + 𝒑𝟐𝟎 𝒒𝟐𝟎 + ⋯ + 𝒑𝒏𝟎 𝒒𝒏𝟎 ∑𝒌=𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝒒𝒌𝟎

𝑶𝒏 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓, 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 {𝒑𝒌𝟎 } 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅é𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏.

𝓫 • 𝑷𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é𝒔 ∶ 𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝑳𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅é𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 {𝒒𝒌𝟎 } 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒖𝒏

𝒑𝒂𝒏𝒏𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒇𝒊𝒙𝒆, 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓é𝒆 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒂𝒕𝒆

𝒃𝒂𝒔𝒆 (𝟎) ∶

𝒊𝟏𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝒊𝟐𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝒊𝒏

𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑)
𝜶𝟏 𝜶𝟐 𝜶𝒏
⏞𝒑𝟏 ⏞𝒑𝟐 ⏞𝒑𝒏
⏞
(𝒑𝟏𝟎 𝒒𝟏𝟎 ) ( 𝒕𝟏 ) + ⏞
(𝒑𝟐𝟎 𝒒𝟐𝟎 ) ( 𝒕𝟐 ) + ⋯ + ⏞
(𝒑𝒏𝟎 𝒒𝒏𝟎 ) ( 𝒕𝒏 )
𝑳𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝒒𝟏𝟎 𝒑𝟏𝒕 + 𝒒𝟐𝟎 𝒑𝟐𝒕 + ⋯ + 𝒒𝒏𝟎 𝒑𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝟎 𝒑𝟎 𝒑𝟎
= 𝟏 𝟏 =
𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝒒𝟎 𝒑𝟎 + 𝒒𝟐𝟎 𝒑𝟐𝟎 + ⋯ + 𝒒𝒏𝟎 𝒑𝒏𝟎 𝒒𝟏 𝟏
⏟𝟎 𝒑𝟎 + 𝒒
𝟐 𝟐
⏟𝟎 𝒑𝟎 + ⋯ + 𝒒
𝒏 𝒏
⏟𝟎 𝒑𝟎
𝜶𝟏 𝜶𝟐 𝜶𝒏

𝑳𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝜶𝟏 𝒊𝟏𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) + 𝜶𝟐 𝒊𝟐𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) + ⋯ + 𝜶𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝜶𝟏 𝒊𝟏𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) + 𝜶𝟐 𝒊𝟐𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) + ⋯ + 𝜶𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑)
= =
𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝜶𝟏 + 𝜶𝟐 + ⋯ + 𝜶𝒏 ∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 𝜶𝒌
𝒏
𝑳𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝜶𝟏 𝜶𝟐 𝜶𝒏
=( 𝒏 ) 𝒊𝟏𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) + ( 𝒏 ) 𝒊𝟐𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) + ⋯ + ( 𝒏 ) 𝒊𝒏𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = ∑ 𝒘𝒌𝟎 𝒊𝒌𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑)
𝟏𝟎𝟎 ∑ 𝜶
⏟ 𝒌=𝟏 𝒌 ∑ 𝜶
⏟ 𝒌=𝟏 𝒌 ∑ 𝜶
⏟ 𝒌=𝟏 𝒌 𝒌=𝟏
𝒘𝟏𝟎 𝒘𝟐𝟎 𝒘𝒏
𝟎

𝑳’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒂𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒚𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕𝒉𝒎é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅é𝒓é𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓
𝒏
𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝒒𝒌𝟎
𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒃𝒖𝒅𝒈é𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒂𝒕𝒆 𝟎 ; {𝒘𝒌𝟎 } ∶ 𝒐ù 𝒘𝒌𝟎 = 𝒆𝒕 𝒗é𝒓𝒊𝒇𝒊𝒆 ∶ ∑ 𝒘𝒌𝟎 = 𝟏
∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝒒𝒌𝟎
𝒌=𝟎

𝒏 𝒏 𝒏
𝒑𝒌𝒕
𝑳𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = ∑ 𝒘𝒌𝟎 𝑰𝒌𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ∑ 𝒘𝒌𝟎 𝒊𝒌𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × 𝒌
∑ 𝒘𝟎 ( 𝒌 )
𝒑𝟎
𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏

 𝑳𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒅𝒔 𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝒒𝒌𝟎 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 (𝒌) 𝒂𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔 𝟎

 𝑳’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒂𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒚𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒔è𝒅𝒆 𝒏𝒊 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒊𝒓𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕é 𝒏𝒊 𝒅𝒆

𝒓é𝒗𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒕é.

 𝑳’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒂𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒚𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒇𝒂𝒄𝒊𝒍𝒆 à 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓, 𝒄𝒂𝒓 𝒔𝒆𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔 {𝒒𝒌𝟎 } 𝒅𝒖

𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒏é𝒄𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓.

 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒃𝒖𝒅𝒈é𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒂𝒕𝒆 𝟎 ; {𝒘𝒌𝟎 } 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔.

162 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
 𝑳’𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑𝒓é𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒂𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒚𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒑𝒆𝒖 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒃𝒍é𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆

𝒑𝒖𝒊𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎é𝒕𝒉𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅é𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒔𝒖𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆

𝒏𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒅 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒈𝒆𝒏𝒕. 𝑫𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔, 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒂𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒚𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒅

à 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒅𝒓𝒆 𝒔𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒗𝒊𝒕é 𝒂𝒖 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒔 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔.

𝓒– 𝟐 • 𝑰𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑷𝒂𝒂𝒔𝒄𝒉𝒆 ∶

𝓪 • 𝑫é𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝑪′ 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒔𝒚𝒏𝒕𝒉é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅é𝒓é 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅é𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 (𝒘𝒌𝒕 ) 𝒅é𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅

′
𝒘𝟏𝒕 𝒈𝟏𝒕 + 𝒘𝟐𝒕 𝒈𝟐𝒕 + ⋯ + 𝒘𝒏𝒕 𝒈𝒏𝒕 ∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 𝒘𝒌𝒕 𝒈𝒌𝒕
𝒅𝒆 𝒍 é𝒑𝒐𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 ∶ 𝑷𝒕⁄𝟎 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [ 𝟏 𝟏 ] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( 𝒏 )
𝒘𝒕 𝒈𝟎 + 𝒘𝟐𝒕 𝒈𝟐𝟎 + ⋯ + 𝒘𝒏𝒕 𝒈𝒏𝟎 ∑𝒌=𝟏 𝒘𝒌𝒕 𝒈𝒌𝟎

 𝑪𝒂𝒔 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒊𝒆𝒓𝒔 ∶

𝒒𝟏𝒕 𝒑𝟏𝒕 + 𝒒𝟐𝒕 𝒑𝟐𝒕 + ⋯ + 𝒒𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒏𝒕 ∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝒕 𝒑𝒌𝒕

• 𝑷𝒓𝒊𝒙 ∶ 𝑷𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [ 𝟏 𝟏 ] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( 𝒏 )
𝒒𝒕 𝒑𝟎 + 𝒒𝟐𝒕 𝒑𝟐𝟎 + ⋯ + 𝒒𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒏𝟎 ∑𝒌=𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝒕 𝒑𝒌𝟎

𝑶𝒏 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓, 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔 {𝒒𝒌𝒕 } 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒂𝒖𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍 𝒐𝒏 𝒗𝒆𝒖𝒕

𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆.

𝒑𝟏𝒕 𝒒𝟏𝒕 + 𝒑𝟐𝒕 𝒒𝟐𝒕 + ⋯ + 𝒑𝒏𝒕 𝒒𝒏𝒕 ∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝒕 𝒒𝒌𝒕

• 𝑸𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é 𝑷𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [ 𝟏 𝟏 ] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( )
𝒑𝒕 𝒒𝟎 + 𝒑𝟐𝒕 𝒒𝟐𝟎 + ⋯ + 𝒑𝒏𝒕 𝒒𝒏𝟎 ∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝒕 𝒒𝒌𝟎

𝑶𝒏 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓, 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 {𝒑𝒌𝟎 } 𝒅𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒓𝒂𝒑𝒑𝒐𝒓𝒕 𝒂𝒖𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍 𝒐𝒏 𝒗𝒆𝒖𝒕

𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑷𝒂𝒂𝒔𝒄𝒉𝒆 .

𝓫 • 𝑷𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é𝒔 ∶ 𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝑷𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅é𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 {𝒒𝒌𝒕 } 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝒖𝒏

𝒑𝒂𝒏𝒏𝒊𝒆𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒐𝒎𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é 𝒈𝒍𝒐𝒃𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅é𝒓é𝒆 à 𝒍𝒂

𝒅𝒂𝒕𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 (𝒕)

𝜷𝟏 𝜷𝟐 𝜷𝒏

𝑷𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝒒𝟏𝒕 𝒑𝟏𝒕 + 𝒒𝟐𝒕 𝒑𝟐𝒕 + ⋯ + 𝒒𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒏𝒕 ⏞

𝒒𝟏𝒕 𝒑𝟏𝒕 + ⏞
𝒒𝟐𝒕 𝒑𝟐𝒕 + ⋯ + ⏞
𝒒𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒏𝒕
= 𝟏 𝟏 =
𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝒒𝒕 𝒑𝟎 + 𝒒𝟐𝒕 𝒑𝟐𝟎 + ⋯ + 𝒒𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒏𝟎 𝟏 𝟏 𝒑𝟏𝟎 𝟐 𝟐 𝒑𝟐𝟎 𝒏
𝒏 𝒏 ) 𝒑𝟎
(𝒑 𝒒 )
⏟ 𝒕 𝒕 𝒑𝟏( ) + (𝒑 𝒒 )
⏟ 𝒕 𝒕 𝒑𝟐( ) + ⋯ + (𝒑
⏟ 𝒕 𝒕 𝒑𝒏 )
𝒒 (
⏟ 𝒕 ⏟ 𝒕 ⏟𝒕
𝜷
𝟏 𝜷 𝟐 𝜷𝒏
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
𝒊𝟏𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝒊𝟐𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝒊𝒏
𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑)

𝑷𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝜷𝟏 + 𝜷𝟐 + ⋯ + 𝜷𝒏 ∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 𝜷𝒌

= =
𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝜷𝟏 𝜷𝟐 𝜷𝒏 𝜷𝟏 𝜷𝟐 𝜷𝒏
𝟏 (𝒑) + 𝟐 (𝒑) + ⋯ + 𝟐 (𝒑) 𝟏 (𝒑) + 𝟐 (𝒑) + ⋯ + 𝟐 (𝒑)
𝒊𝒕⁄𝟎 𝒊𝒕⁄𝟎 𝒊𝒕⁄𝟎 𝒊𝒕⁄𝟎 𝒊𝒕⁄𝟎 𝒊𝒕⁄𝟎

163 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝒏 −𝟏
𝑷𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝟏 𝒘𝒌𝒕
= = [∑ 𝒌 ]
𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝒘𝟏𝒕 𝒘𝟐𝒕 𝒘𝒏
𝒕 𝒊𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑)
𝒌=𝟏
⏞ 𝜷𝟏 ⏞𝜷 ⏞𝜷
𝒏 ⁄𝒊𝟏𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) + 𝒏 𝟐 ⁄𝒊𝟐𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) + ⋯ + 𝒏 𝒏 ⁄𝒊𝟐𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑)
∑𝒌=𝟏 𝜷𝒌 ∑𝒌=𝟏 𝜷𝒌 ∑𝒌=𝟏 𝜷𝒌

𝑳’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑷𝒂𝒂𝒔𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒎𝒐𝒚𝒆𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒉𝒂𝒓𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒊𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅é𝒓é𝒆 𝒑𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔
𝒏
𝒑𝒌𝒕 𝒒𝒌𝒕
𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒃𝒖𝒅𝒈é𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒂𝒕𝒆 𝒕 ; {𝒘𝒌𝒕 } ∶ 𝒐ù 𝒘𝒌𝒕 = 𝒆𝒕 𝒗é𝒓𝒊𝒇𝒊𝒆 ∶ ∑ 𝒘𝒌𝒕 = 𝟏
∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝒕 𝒒𝒌𝒕
𝒌=𝟎

𝒏 −𝟏 𝒏 −𝟏 𝒏 −𝟏
𝒘𝒌𝒕 𝒘𝒌𝒕 𝒘𝒌𝒕
𝑷𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = [∑ 𝒌 ] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [∑ 𝒌 ] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [∑ ]
𝑰𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝒊𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝒑𝒌𝒕 ⁄𝒑𝒌𝟎
𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏

 𝑳𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒅𝒔 𝒑𝒌𝒕 𝒒𝒌𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒓𝒆𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒕𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍𝒆 𝒅𝒖 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 (𝒌) 𝒂𝒖 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔

𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒕 (𝒕)

 𝑳’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑷𝒂𝒂𝒔𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒔è𝒅𝒆 𝒏𝒊 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒊𝒓𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒕é 𝒏𝒊 𝒅𝒆

𝒓é𝒗𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒕é.

 𝑳’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑷𝒂𝒂𝒔𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒍𝒆 à 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒂𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒚𝒓𝒆𝒔,

𝒄𝒂𝒓 𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒐𝒊𝒕 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒂𝒊𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒅𝒆( 𝒕) 𝒆𝒕 𝒄′ 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒐𝒖𝒓

𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒂𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒚𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔é 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆

 𝑳’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑷𝒂𝒂𝒔𝒄𝒉𝒆, 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔é 𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒄 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒂𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒚𝒓𝒆𝒔, 𝒔𝒆𝒓𝒕 à 𝒅é𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒓

𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒇𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒄𝒉𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒅′ 𝒆𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏

 𝑳𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒅𝒔 {𝒘𝒌𝒕 } (𝒏𝒆 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔)𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔

𝒃𝒖𝒅𝒈é𝒕𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆𝒔 « 𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒊𝒄𝒊𝒆𝒍𝒔 » é𝒗𝒐𝒍𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔, 𝒄𝒐𝒓𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒂𝒖 𝒄𝒐û𝒕

𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑é𝒓𝒊𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒐𝒖𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒂𝒖𝒙 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑é𝒓𝒊𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒃𝒂𝒔𝒆.

 𝑳’𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅𝒆 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑷𝒂𝒂𝒔𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒏’𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒂𝒔 𝒂𝒊𝒔é𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒓 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒔

𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒑é𝒓𝒊𝒐𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒍𝒆𝒙𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒖𝒊𝒔𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒐𝒏𝒅é𝒓𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏𝒔 𝒗𝒂𝒓𝒊𝒆𝒏𝒕

𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒕𝒆𝒎𝒑𝒔.

𝓒– 𝟑 • 𝑹𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟐
• 𝑳𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈) =
𝑷𝟎⁄𝒕 (𝒈)

• 𝑳𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈) ≥ 𝑷𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈) , (𝒆𝒏 𝒈é𝒏é𝒓𝒂𝒍)

164 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝓒– 𝟒 • 𝑨𝒖𝒕𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 ∶

𝑳𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈) + 𝑷𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈)

𝓪 • 𝑰𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑺𝒊𝒅𝒈𝒘𝒊𝒄𝒌 ∶ 𝑺𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈) =
𝟐
∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏(𝒘𝒌𝟎 + 𝒘𝒌𝒕 )𝒈𝒌𝒕
𝓫 • 𝑰𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑬𝒅𝒈𝒆𝒘𝒐𝒓𝒕𝒉 ∶ 𝑬𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈) = 𝒏
∑𝒌=𝟏(𝒘𝒌𝟎 + 𝒘𝒌𝒕 )𝒈𝒌𝟎

𝓬 • 𝑰𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝑭𝒊𝒔𝒉𝒆𝒓 ∶ 𝑭𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈) = √𝑳𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈)𝑷𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈)

 𝑪𝒆𝒕 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒑𝒐𝒔𝒔è𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒑𝒓𝒊é𝒕é 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒗𝒆𝒓𝒔𝒊𝒃𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒕é, 𝒊𝒍 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒑𝒍𝒖𝒔 𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔é 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔

𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟐
𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒑𝒓é𝒄é𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒔 ∶ 𝑭𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒈) =
𝑭𝟎⁄𝒕 (𝒈)

 𝑰𝒍 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒏𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒎𝒆𝒊𝒍𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒉𝒂𝒖𝒔𝒔𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙. 𝑬𝒏 𝒆𝒇𝒇𝒆𝒕 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆

𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒂𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒚𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒂 𝒕𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒄𝒆 à 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒓é𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒖𝒆𝒓, 𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒖𝒊 𝒅𝒆 𝑷𝒂𝒂𝒔𝒄𝒉𝒆 à

𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒖𝒔­𝒆𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒎𝒆𝒓.

𝓭 • 𝑰𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒚𝒏𝒕𝒉é𝒕𝒊𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒗𝒂𝒍𝒆𝒖𝒓 ∶

𝒏
∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 𝒘𝒌𝒕 𝒗𝒌𝒕 𝒑𝒌∗ 𝒒𝒌∗
𝑽𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒗) = 𝑩𝒕⁄𝟎 (𝒗) = 𝒐ù 𝒘𝒌∗ = 𝒏 𝒆𝒕 𝒗é𝒓𝒊𝒇𝒊𝒆 ∶ ∑ 𝒘𝒌∗ = 𝟏; (∗= 𝟎, 𝒕)
∑𝒏𝒌=𝟏 𝒘𝒌𝟎 𝒗𝒌𝟎 ∑𝒌=𝟏 𝒑𝒌∗ 𝒒𝒌∗
𝒌=𝟎

𝓮 • 𝑰𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔­𝒄𝒉𝒂î𝒏𝒆𝒔 ∶ 𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒎𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒆𝒓 𝒅𝒆𝒔 « é𝒑𝒐𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒊𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒄𝒕𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍’é𝒑𝒐𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒓é𝒇é𝒓𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒆, 𝒔𝒊

𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒐𝒏𝒕 𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒕𝒊𝒇𝒔, 𝒍𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒃𝒍è𝒎𝒆 𝒆𝒔𝒕 𝒓é𝒔𝒐𝒍𝒖. 𝑫𝒂𝒏𝒔 𝒍𝒆 𝒄𝒂𝒔 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒂𝒊𝒓𝒆, 𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒖𝒊𝒕 𝒅𝒆𝒔

𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔­𝒄𝒉𝒂î𝒏𝒆𝒔. 𝑷𝒐𝒖𝒓 𝒄𝒆𝒍𝒂, 𝒐𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒊𝒅è𝒓𝒆 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝟎, 𝟏, 𝟐, … , 𝒌, … 𝒆𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒕𝒆

𝒅’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒆𝒙𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒎é𝒔 𝒆𝒏 𝒃𝒂𝒔𝒆 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝒅𝒆 𝒍’𝒂𝒏𝒏é𝒆 𝒑𝒓é𝒄é𝒅𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝑰𝟏⁄𝟎 , 𝑰𝟐⁄𝟏 , … , 𝑰𝒌⁄𝒌−𝟏 , …

𝑶𝒏 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒖𝒊𝒕 𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒕𝒆 𝒅’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔­𝒄𝒉𝒂î𝒏𝒆𝒔, 𝒃𝒂𝒔𝒆 𝟏𝟎𝟎 à 𝒍𝒂 𝒅𝒂𝒕𝒆 (𝟎)𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂 𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒆 :

𝑪𝑰𝟏⁄𝟎 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × 𝒊𝟏⁄𝟎 = 𝑰𝟏⁄𝟎

𝟏
𝑪𝑰𝟐⁄𝟎 = 𝑪𝑰𝟏⁄𝟎 𝒊𝟐⁄𝟏 = 𝑪𝑰 𝑰
𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏⁄𝟎 𝟐⁄𝟏

……………………

𝟏
𝑪𝑰𝒏⁄𝟎 = 𝑪𝑰𝒏−𝟏⁄𝟎 𝒊𝒏⁄𝒏−𝟏 = 𝑪𝑰 𝑰
𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝒏−𝟏⁄𝟎 𝒏⁄𝒏−𝟏
𝒕 𝒕
𝟏
∀𝒕 ∈ {𝟏, … , 𝒏} , 𝑪𝑰𝒕⁄𝟎 = ∏ 𝑰𝒌⁄𝒌−𝟏 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 ∏ 𝒊𝒌⁄𝒌−𝟏
𝟏𝟎𝟎𝒕−𝟏
𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏

𝑨 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒕𝒊𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒄𝒆𝒕𝒕𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏, 𝒐𝒏 𝒑𝒆𝒖𝒕 𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒍’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆 𝒓𝒆𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒇 à 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒍𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒍𝒂

165 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝑪𝑰𝒕′ ⁄𝟎
𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒕𝒆, 𝒔𝒐𝒊𝒕 : ∀𝒕, 𝒕′ ∈ {𝟏, … , 𝒏} , 𝒊𝒕′ ⁄𝒕 =
𝑪𝑰𝒕⁄𝟎

 𝑼𝒕𝒊𝒍𝒊𝒔𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 ∶ 𝑳’𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆­𝒄𝒉𝒂î𝒏𝒆 𝒑𝒆𝒓𝒎𝒆𝒕 𝒎𝒊𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒒𝒖𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒂𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒚𝒓𝒆𝒔

𝒐𝒖 𝒅𝒆 𝑷𝒂𝒂𝒔𝒄𝒉𝒆, 𝒅𝒆 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒓𝒆 𝒍’é𝒗𝒐𝒍𝒖𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒅’𝒖𝒏𝒆 𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒏𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒓 𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒓𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒅𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒔 𝒔𝒖𝒄𝒄𝒆𝒔𝒔𝒊𝒗𝒆𝒔.

Exercice 15 :
ÉNONCÉ
𝑳𝒆 𝒕𝒂𝒃𝒍𝒆𝒂𝒖 𝒔𝒖𝒊𝒗𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝒑𝒓é𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒆𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝒕𝒓𝒐𝒊𝒔 𝒃𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝒑𝒆𝒏𝒅𝒂𝒏𝒕 𝟑 𝒂𝒏𝒔

𝑷é𝒓𝒊𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝟎 𝟏 𝟐
𝑩𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝑷𝒓𝒊𝒙: 𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝑸𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔: 𝒒𝒌𝟎 𝑷𝒓𝒊𝒙: 𝒑𝒌𝟏 𝑸𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔: 𝒒𝒌𝟏 𝑷𝒓𝒊𝒙: 𝒑𝒌𝟐 𝑸𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔: 𝒒𝒌𝟐
𝑩𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝟏 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟒 𝟏𝟓𝟎 𝟏𝟎 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝟖
𝑩𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝟐 𝟔𝟎 𝟏𝟎 𝟓𝟎 𝟏𝟐 𝟒𝟎 𝟏𝟒
𝑩𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝟑 𝟏𝟔𝟎 𝟒 𝟏𝟒𝟎 𝟓 𝟏𝟒𝟎 𝟓
1)
a) 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒂𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒚𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙
b) 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝑳𝒂𝒔𝒑𝒆𝒚𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔
2)
a) 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝑷𝒂𝒂𝒔𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙
b) 𝑪𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓 𝒅𝒆 𝒅𝒆𝒖𝒙 𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆𝒔 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝑷𝒂𝒂𝒔𝒄𝒉𝒆 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔
3) 𝑫é𝒅𝒖𝒊𝒓𝒆 𝒍𝒆𝒔 𝒊𝒏𝒅𝒊𝒄𝒆𝒔 𝒅𝒆 𝑭𝒊𝒔𝒉𝒆𝒓 𝒑𝒓𝒊𝒙 𝒆𝒕 𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒏𝒕𝒊𝒕é𝒔

Corrigé
1)

𝑷é𝒓𝒊𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝟎 𝟏 𝟐 𝒒𝒌𝟎 𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝒒𝒌𝟎 𝒑𝒌𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝟎 𝒑𝒌𝟐 𝒒𝒌𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟐 𝒒𝒌𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟏 𝒘𝒌𝟎 𝒘𝒌𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟐 𝒑𝒌𝟐
𝑩𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝒒𝒌𝟎 𝒑𝒌𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟐 𝒒𝒌𝟐 𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝒑𝒌𝟏
𝟏𝟒𝟎𝟎 𝟐𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟐𝟖𝟎𝟎 𝟐𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝟑𝟓 𝟏𝟓 𝟑 𝟐 𝟒
𝑩𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝟏 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟒 𝟏𝟓𝟎 𝟏𝟎 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝟖
𝟔𝟔 𝟐𝟖 𝟐 𝟑
𝟔𝟎𝟎 𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝟒𝟎𝟎 𝟒𝟖𝟎 𝟔𝟎𝟎 𝟓 𝟑 𝟓 𝟐 𝟒
𝑩𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝟐 𝟔𝟎 𝟏𝟎 𝟓𝟎 𝟏𝟐 𝟒𝟎 𝟏𝟒
𝟐𝟐 𝟏𝟒 𝟔 𝟑 𝟓
𝟔𝟒𝟎 𝟓𝟔𝟎 𝟓𝟔𝟎 𝟕𝟎𝟎 𝟕𝟎𝟎 𝟖 𝟏 𝟕 𝟕 𝟏
𝑩𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝟑 𝟏𝟔𝟎 𝟒 𝟏𝟒𝟎 𝟓 𝟏𝟒𝟎 𝟓
𝟑𝟑 𝟒 𝟖 𝟖
∑ 𝟐𝟔𝟒𝟎 𝟑𝟏𝟔𝟎 𝟑𝟕𝟔𝟎 𝟑𝟏𝟖𝟎 𝟐𝟖𝟎𝟎 𝟏 𝟏

𝑷é𝒓𝒊𝒐𝒅𝒆 𝟎 𝟏 𝟐 𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝒒𝒌𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝒒𝒌𝟐 𝒑𝒌𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝟐 𝒑𝒌𝟐 𝒒𝒌𝟐 𝒘𝒌𝟎 𝒘𝒌𝟏 𝒘𝒌𝟐 𝒒𝒌𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝟐 𝒒𝒌𝟐
𝑩𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝒒𝒌𝟎 𝒑𝒌𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟐 𝒒𝒌𝟐 𝒒𝒌𝟎 𝒒𝒌𝟎 𝒒𝒌𝟏
𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝟖𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟔𝟎𝟎 𝟑𝟓 𝟏𝟓 𝟖𝟎 𝟓 𝟒 𝟒
𝑩𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝟏 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟒 𝟏𝟓𝟎 𝟏𝟎 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝟖
𝟔𝟔 𝟐𝟖 𝟏𝟒𝟑 𝟕 𝟕 𝟓
𝟕𝟐𝟎 𝟖𝟒𝟎 𝟕𝟎𝟎 𝟓𝟔𝟎 𝟓 𝟑 𝟐𝟖 𝟔 𝟕 𝟕
𝑩𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝟐 𝟔𝟎 𝟏𝟎 𝟓𝟎 𝟏𝟐 𝟒𝟎 𝟏𝟒
𝟐𝟐 𝟏𝟒 𝟏𝟒𝟑 𝟓 𝟓 𝟔
𝟖𝟎𝟎 𝟖𝟎𝟎 𝟕𝟎𝟎 𝟕𝟎𝟎 𝟖 𝟏 𝟑𝟓 𝟓 𝟓 𝟏
𝑩𝒊𝒆𝒏 𝟑 𝟏𝟔𝟎 𝟒 𝟏𝟒𝟎 𝟓 𝟏𝟒𝟎 𝟓
𝟑𝟑 𝟒 𝟏𝟒𝟑 𝟒 𝟒
∑ 𝟐𝟓𝟐𝟎 𝟐𝟒𝟒𝟎 𝟐𝟔𝟎𝟎 𝟐𝟖𝟔𝟎 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
a)

 𝟏è𝒓𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆 ∶

166 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
∑𝟑𝒌=𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝟎 𝒑𝒌𝟏 𝟑𝟏𝟔𝟎
∙ 𝑳𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( 𝟑 𝒌 𝒌
) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( ) = 𝟏𝟏𝟗, 𝟔𝟗𝟕%
∑𝒌=𝟏 𝒒𝟎 𝒑𝟎 𝟐𝟔𝟒𝟎

∑𝟑𝒌=𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝟎 𝒑𝒌𝟐 𝟑𝟕𝟔𝟎

∙ 𝑳𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( ) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( ) = 𝟏𝟒𝟐, 𝟒𝟐𝟒%
∑𝟑𝒌=𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝟎 𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝟐𝟔𝟒𝟎

∑𝟑𝒌=𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟐 𝟑𝟏𝟖𝟎

∙ 𝑳𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( ) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( ) = 𝟏𝟏𝟑, 𝟓𝟕𝟏%
∑𝟑𝒌=𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟏 𝟐𝟖𝟎𝟎

 𝟐 è𝒎𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆 ∶
𝟑 𝟑 𝟑
𝒑𝒌𝟏
∙ 𝑳𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = ∑ 𝒘𝒌𝟎 𝑰𝒌𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ∑ 𝒘𝒌𝟎 𝒊𝒌𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ∑ 𝒘𝒌𝟎 ( )
𝒑𝒌𝟎
𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏

𝒑𝟏𝟏 𝒑𝟐𝟏 𝒑𝟑𝟏 𝟑𝟓 𝟓 𝟐 𝟖 𝟕

𝑳𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [𝒘𝟏𝟎 ( 𝟏 ) + 𝒘𝟐𝟎 ( 𝟐 ) + 𝒘𝟑𝟎 ( 𝟑 )] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [( × 𝟏, 𝟓) + ( × ) + ( × )]
𝒑𝟎 𝒑𝟎 𝒑𝟎 𝟔𝟔 𝟐𝟐 𝟑 𝟑𝟑 𝟖

𝑳𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟏𝟗, 𝟔𝟗𝟕%

𝟑 𝟑 𝟑
𝒑𝒌𝟐
∙ 𝑳𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = ∑ 𝒘𝒌𝟎 𝑰𝒌𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ∑ 𝒘𝒌𝟎 𝒊𝒌𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ∑ 𝒘𝒌𝟎 ( )
𝒑𝒌𝟎
𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏

𝟏
𝒑𝟏𝟐 𝟐
𝒑𝟐𝟐 𝟑
𝒑𝟑𝟐 𝟑𝟓 𝟓 𝟐 𝟖 𝟕
𝑳𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [𝒘𝟎 ( 𝟏 ) + 𝒘𝟎 ( 𝟐 ) + 𝒘𝟎 ( 𝟑 )] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [( × 𝟐) + ( × ) + ( × )]
𝒑𝟎 𝒑𝟎 𝒑𝟎 𝟔𝟔 𝟐𝟐 𝟑 𝟑𝟑 𝟖

𝑳𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟒𝟐, 𝟒𝟐𝟒%

𝟑 𝟑 𝟑
𝒑𝒌𝟐
∙ 𝑳𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒑) = ∑ 𝒘𝒌𝟏 𝑰𝒌𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ∑ 𝒘𝒌𝟏 𝒊𝒌𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × 𝒌
∑ 𝒘𝟏 ( 𝒌 )
𝒑𝟏
𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏

𝒑𝟏𝟐 𝒑𝟐𝟐 𝒑𝟑𝟐 𝟏𝟓 𝟒 𝟑 𝟒 𝟏

𝑳𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [𝒘𝟏𝟏 ( 𝟏 ) + 𝒘𝟐𝟏 ( 𝟐 ) + 𝒘𝟑𝟏 ( 𝟑 )] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [( × ) + ( × ) + ( × 𝟏)]
𝒑𝟏 𝒑𝟏 𝒑𝟏 𝟐𝟖 𝟑 𝟏𝟒 𝟓 𝟒

𝑳𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟏𝟑, 𝟓𝟕𝟏%

b)

 𝟏è𝒓𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆 ∶

∑𝟑𝒌=𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝒒𝒌𝟏 𝟐𝟓𝟐𝟎

∙ 𝑳𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( 𝟑 ) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( ) = 𝟗𝟓, 𝟒𝟓𝟓%
∑𝒌=𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝒒𝒌𝟎 𝟐𝟔𝟒𝟎

∑𝟑𝒌=𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝒒𝒌𝟐 𝟐𝟒𝟒𝟎

∙ 𝑳𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( 𝟑 𝒌 𝒌
) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( ) = 𝟗𝟐, 𝟒𝟐𝟒%
∑𝒌=𝟏 𝒑𝟎 𝒒𝟎 𝟐𝟔𝟒𝟎

167 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
∑𝟑𝒌=𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝟐 𝟐𝟔𝟎𝟎
∙ 𝑳𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒒) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( 𝟑 𝒌 𝒌
) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( ) = 𝟗𝟐, 𝟖𝟓𝟕%
∑𝒌=𝟏 𝒑𝟏 𝒒𝟏 𝟐𝟖𝟎𝟎

 𝟐 è𝒎𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆 ∶
𝟑 𝟑 𝟑
𝒒𝒌𝟏
∙ 𝑳𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = ∑ 𝒘𝒌𝟎 𝑰𝒌𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ∑ 𝒘𝒌𝟎 𝒊𝒌𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ∑ 𝒘𝒌𝟎 ( 𝒌 )
𝒒𝟎
𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏

𝒒𝟏𝟏 𝒒𝟐𝟏 𝒒𝟑𝟏 𝟑𝟓 𝟓 𝟓 𝟔 𝟖 𝟓

𝑳𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [𝒘𝟏𝟎 ( 𝟏 ) + 𝒘𝟐𝟎 ( 𝟐 ) + 𝒘𝟑𝟎 ( 𝟑 )] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [( × ) + ( × ) + ( × )]
𝒒𝟎 𝒒𝟎 𝒒𝟎 𝟔𝟔 𝟕 𝟐𝟐 𝟓 𝟑𝟑 𝟒

𝑳𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = 𝟗𝟓, 𝟒𝟓𝟓%

𝟑 𝟑 𝟑
𝒒𝒌𝟐
∙ 𝑳𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = ∑ 𝒘𝒌𝟎 𝑰𝒌𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ∑ 𝒘𝒌𝟎 𝒊𝒌𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ∑ 𝒘𝒌𝟎 ( 𝒌 )
𝒒𝟎
𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏

𝟏
𝒒𝟏𝟐 𝟐
𝒒𝟐𝟐 𝟑
𝒒𝟑𝟐 𝟑𝟓 𝟒 𝟓 𝟕 𝟖 𝟓
𝑳𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [𝒘𝟎 ( 𝟏 ) + 𝒘𝟎 ( 𝟐 ) + 𝒘𝟎 ( 𝟑 )] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [( × ) + ( × ) + ( × )]
𝒒𝟎 𝒒𝟎 𝒒𝟎 𝟔𝟔 𝟕 𝟐𝟐 𝟓 𝟑𝟑 𝟒

𝑳𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = 𝟗𝟐, 𝟒𝟐𝟒%

𝟑 𝟑 𝟑
𝒒𝒌𝟐
∙ 𝑳𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒒) = ∑ 𝒘𝒌𝟏 𝑰𝒌𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒒) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ∑ 𝒘𝒌𝟏 𝒊𝒌𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒒) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × 𝒌
∑ 𝒘𝟏 ( 𝒌 )
𝒒𝟏
𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏

𝒒𝟏𝟐 𝒒𝟐𝟐 𝒒𝟑𝟐 𝟏𝟓 𝟒 𝟑 𝟕 𝟏

𝑳𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒒) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [𝒘𝟏𝟏 ( 𝟏 ) + 𝒘𝟐𝟏 ( 𝟐 ) + 𝒘𝟑𝟏 ( 𝟑 )] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [( × ) + ( × ) + ( × 𝟏)]
𝒒𝟏 𝒒𝟏 𝒒𝟏 𝟐𝟖 𝟓 𝟏𝟒 𝟔 𝟒

𝑳𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒒) = 𝟗𝟐, 𝟖𝟓𝟕%

2)
a)

 𝟏è𝒓𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆 ∶

∑𝟑𝒌=𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟏 𝟐𝟖𝟎𝟎

∙ 𝑷𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( ) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( ) = 𝟏𝟏𝟏, 𝟏𝟏𝟏%
∑𝟑𝒌=𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝟐𝟓𝟐𝟎

∑𝟑𝒌=𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝟐 𝒑𝒌𝟐 𝟐𝟖𝟔𝟎

∙ 𝑷𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( ) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( ) = 𝟏𝟏𝟕, 𝟐𝟏𝟑%
∑𝟑𝒌=𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝟐 𝒑𝒌𝟎 𝟐𝟒𝟒𝟎

∑𝟑𝒌=𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝟐 𝒑𝒌𝟐 𝟐𝟖𝟔𝟎

∙ 𝑷𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒑) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( ) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( ) = 𝟏𝟏𝟎%
∑𝟑𝒌=𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝟐 𝒑𝒌𝟏 𝟐𝟔𝟎𝟎

 𝟐 è𝒎𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆 ∶

168 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝟑 −𝟏 𝟑 −𝟏 𝟑 −𝟏
𝒘𝒌𝟏 𝒘𝒌𝟏 𝒘𝒌𝟏
∙ 𝑷𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = [∑ 𝒌 ] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [∑ 𝒌 ] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [∑ ]
𝑰𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝒊𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝒑𝒌𝟏 ⁄𝒑𝒌𝟎
𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏

𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟎

𝑷𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = = = = 𝟏𝟏𝟏, 𝟏𝟏𝟏%
𝒘𝟏 𝒘𝟐𝟏 𝒘𝟑𝟏 𝟏𝟓⁄𝟐𝟖 𝟑⁄𝟏𝟒 𝟏⁄𝟒 𝟗⁄𝟏𝟎
[ 𝟏 𝟏𝟏 + + ] [ + + ]
𝒑𝟏 ⁄𝒑𝟎 𝒑𝟐𝟏 ⁄𝒑𝟐𝟎 𝒑𝟑𝟏 ⁄𝒑𝟑𝟎 𝟑⁄𝟐 𝟓⁄𝟔 𝟕⁄𝟖

𝟑 −𝟏 𝟑 −𝟏 𝟑 −𝟏
𝒘𝒌𝟐 𝒘𝒌𝟐 𝒘𝒌𝟐
∙ 𝑷𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = [∑ 𝒌 ] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [∑ 𝒌 ] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [∑ ]
𝑰𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝒊𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒑) 𝒑𝒌𝟐 ⁄𝒑𝒌𝟎
𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏

𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟎

𝑷𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = = = = 𝟏𝟏𝟕, 𝟐𝟏𝟑%
𝒘𝟏 𝒘𝟐𝟐 𝒘𝟑𝟐 𝟖𝟎⁄𝟏𝟒𝟑 𝟐𝟖⁄𝟏𝟒𝟑 𝟑𝟓⁄𝟏𝟒𝟑 𝟏𝟐𝟐⁄𝟏𝟒𝟑
[ 𝟏 𝟐𝟏 + + ] [ 𝟐 + + ]
𝒑𝟐 ⁄𝒑𝟎 𝒑𝟐𝟐 ⁄𝒑𝟐𝟎 𝒑𝟑𝟐 ⁄𝒑𝟑𝟎 𝟐⁄𝟑 𝟕⁄𝟖

𝟑 −𝟏 𝟑 −𝟏 𝟑 −𝟏
𝒘𝒌𝟐 𝒘𝒌𝟐 𝒘𝒌𝟐
∙ 𝑷𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒑) = [∑ 𝒌 ] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [∑ 𝒌 ] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [∑ ]
𝑰𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒑) 𝒊𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒑) 𝒑𝒌𝟐 ⁄𝒑𝒌𝟏
𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏

𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟎

𝑷𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒑) = = = = 𝟏𝟏𝟎%
𝒘𝟏 𝒘𝟐𝟐 𝒘𝟑𝟐 𝟖𝟎⁄𝟏𝟒𝟑 𝟐𝟖⁄𝟏𝟒𝟑 𝟑𝟓⁄𝟏𝟒𝟑 𝟏𝟎⁄𝟏𝟏
[ + +
[ 𝟏 𝟐𝟏
𝒑𝟐 ⁄𝒑𝟏
+
𝒑𝟐𝟐 ⁄𝒑𝟐𝟏
+
𝒑𝟑𝟐 ⁄𝒑𝟑𝟏
] 𝟒⁄𝟑 𝟒⁄𝟓 𝟏 ]

b)

 𝟏è𝒓𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆 ∶

∑𝟑𝒌=𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟏 𝒒𝒌𝟏 𝟐𝟖𝟎𝟎

∙ 𝑷𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( 𝟑 𝒌 𝒌
) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( ) = 𝟖𝟖, 𝟔𝟎𝟖%
∑𝒌=𝟏 𝒑𝟏 𝒒𝟎 𝟑𝟏𝟔𝟎

∑𝟑𝒌=𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟐 𝒒𝒌𝟐 𝟐𝟖𝟔𝟎

∙ 𝑷𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( 𝟑 ) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( ) = 𝟕𝟔, 𝟎𝟔𝟒%
∑𝒌=𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟐 𝒒𝒌𝟎 𝟑𝟕𝟔𝟎

∑𝟑𝒌=𝟏 𝒑𝒌𝟐 𝒒𝒌𝟐 𝟐𝟖𝟔𝟎

∙ 𝑷𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒒) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( 𝟑 𝒌 𝒌
) = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × ( ) = 𝟖𝟗, 𝟗𝟑𝟕%
∑𝒌=𝟏 𝒑𝟐 𝒒𝟏 𝟑𝟏𝟖𝟎

 𝟐 è𝒎𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒏𝒊è𝒓𝒆 ∶

𝟑 −𝟏 𝟑 −𝟏 𝟑 −𝟏
𝒘𝒌𝟏 𝒘𝒌𝟏 𝒘𝒌𝟏
∙ 𝑷𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = [∑ 𝒌 ] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [∑ 𝒌 ] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [∑ ]
𝑰𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒒) 𝒊𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒒) 𝒒𝒌𝟏 ⁄𝒒𝒌𝟎
𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏

𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟎

𝑷𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = = = = 𝟖𝟖, 𝟔𝟎𝟖%
𝒘𝟏 𝒘𝟐 𝒘𝟑 𝟏𝟓⁄𝟐𝟖 𝟑⁄𝟏𝟒 𝟏⁄𝟒 𝟕𝟗⁄𝟕𝟎
[ 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 + 𝟐 𝟏 𝟐 + 𝟑 𝟏 𝟑] [ + + ]
𝒒𝟏 ⁄𝒒𝟎 𝒒𝟏 ⁄𝒒𝟎 𝒒𝟏 ⁄𝒒𝟎 𝟓⁄𝟕 𝟔⁄𝟓 𝟓⁄𝟒

169 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
𝟑 −𝟏 𝟑 −𝟏 𝟑 −𝟏
𝒘𝒌𝟐 𝒘𝒌𝟐 𝒘𝒌𝟐
∙ 𝑷𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = [∑ 𝒌 ] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [∑ 𝒌 ] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [∑ ]
𝑰𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒒) 𝒊𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒒) 𝒒𝒌𝟐 ⁄𝒒𝒌𝟎
𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏

𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟎

𝑷𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = = = = 𝟕𝟔, 𝟎𝟔𝟒%
𝒘𝟏 𝒘𝟐𝟐 𝒘𝟑𝟐 𝟖𝟎⁄𝟏𝟒𝟑 𝟐𝟖⁄𝟏𝟒𝟑 𝟑𝟓⁄𝟏𝟒𝟑 𝟏𝟖𝟖⁄𝟏𝟒𝟑
[ 𝟏 𝟐𝟏 + + ] [ + + ]
𝒒𝟐 ⁄𝒒𝟎 𝒒𝟐𝟐 ⁄𝒒𝟐𝟎 𝒒𝟑𝟐 ⁄𝒒𝟑𝟎 𝟒⁄𝟕 𝟕⁄𝟓 𝟓⁄𝟒

𝟑 −𝟏 𝟑 −𝟏 𝟑 −𝟏
𝒘𝒌𝟐 𝒘𝒌𝟐 𝒘𝒌𝟐
∙ 𝑷𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒒) = [∑ 𝒌 ] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [∑ 𝒌 ] = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 × [∑ ]
𝑰𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒒) 𝒊𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒒) 𝒒𝒌𝟐 ⁄𝒒𝒌𝟏
𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏 𝒌=𝟏

𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟎

𝑷𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒒) = = = = 𝟖𝟗, 𝟗𝟑𝟕%
𝒘𝟏 𝒘𝟐𝟐 𝒘𝟑𝟐 𝟖𝟎⁄𝟏𝟒𝟑 𝟐𝟖⁄𝟏𝟒𝟑 𝟑𝟓⁄𝟏𝟒𝟑 𝟏𝟓𝟗⁄𝟏𝟒𝟑
[ + +
[ 𝟏 𝟐𝟏
𝒒𝟐 ⁄𝒒𝟏
+
𝒒𝟐𝟐 ⁄𝒒𝟐𝟏
+
𝒒𝟑𝟐 ⁄𝒒𝟑𝟏
] 𝟒⁄𝟓 𝟕⁄𝟔 𝟏 ]

3)

 𝑭𝒕⁄𝒕′ (𝒑) = √𝑳𝒕⁄𝒕′ (𝒑)𝑷𝒕⁄𝒕′ (𝒑) ∶

∙ 𝑭𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = √𝑳𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒑)𝑷𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = (√𝟏𝟏𝟗, 𝟔𝟗𝟕 × 𝟏𝟏𝟏, 𝟏𝟏𝟏)% = 𝟏𝟏𝟓, 𝟑𝟐𝟒%

∙ 𝑭𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = √𝑳𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒑)𝑷𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒑) = (√𝟏𝟒𝟐, 𝟒𝟐𝟒 × 𝟏𝟏𝟕, 𝟐𝟏𝟑)% = 𝟏𝟐𝟗, 𝟐𝟎𝟓%

∙ 𝑭𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒑) = √𝑳𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒑)𝑷𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒑) = (√𝟏𝟏𝟑, 𝟓𝟕𝟏 × 𝟏𝟏𝟎) % = 𝟏𝟏𝟏, 𝟕𝟕𝟏%

 𝑭𝒕⁄𝒕′ (𝒒) = √𝑳𝒕⁄𝒕′ (𝒒)𝑷𝒕⁄𝒕′ (𝒒) ∶

∙ 𝑭𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = √𝑳𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒒)𝑷𝟏⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = (√𝟗𝟓, 𝟒𝟓𝟓 × 𝟖𝟖, 𝟔𝟎𝟖) % = 𝟗𝟏, 𝟗𝟔𝟖%

∙ 𝑭𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = √𝑳𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒒)𝑷𝟐⁄𝟎 (𝒒) = (√𝟗𝟐, 𝟒𝟐𝟒 × 𝟕𝟔, 𝟎𝟔𝟒)% = 𝟖𝟑, 𝟖𝟒𝟔%

∙ 𝑭𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒒) = √𝑳𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒒)𝑷𝟐⁄𝟏 (𝒒) = (√𝟗𝟐, 𝟖𝟓𝟕 × 𝟖𝟗, 𝟗𝟑𝟕) % = 𝟗𝟏, 𝟑𝟖𝟓%

170 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014

Terminologie de base ........................................................................................................................................ 67

 Population (ou population statistique):
 Individu (ou unité statistique):
 Échantillon∶
 Taille de l'échantillon∶
 Enquête (statistique):
 Recensement∶
 Sondage
 Variable (statistique):
 Série statistique∶
 Données (statistiques):
Étude d’une variable qualitative ..................................................................................................................... 68
 Variables nominales et variables ordinales∶
 Traitements statistiques∶
a. Construction∶
b. Exemple∶
 Représentations graphiques∶
 Mode∶
Variables quantitatives discrètes ...................................................................................................................... 70
 Introduction∶
 Organisation des données∶
 Représentations graphiques usuelles∶
 Notion de quantile et applications∶
a. Définition∶
b. La médiane et les quartiles∶
c. Les autres quantiles∶
 Principaux paramètres de position (ou de tendance centrale)∶
a. Le mode∶
b. Les Moyennes arithmétique,géométrique,quadratiques et harmoniques ∶
 La moyenne arithmétique∶
 La moyenne géométrique de r valeurs positives :
 La moyenne quadratique :
 La moyenne harmonique de r valeurs non nulles :
 Principaux paramètres de dispersion∶
a. L'étendue ∶
b. L'étendue interquartile∶
c. Écart absolu moyen par rapport à la médiane ∶
d. Écart absolu moyen par rapport à la moyenne ∶
e. Écar-ttype ou écart quadratique moyen∶
 Théorème de KönigHuygens∶
 Variance d’échantillonnage∶
 Identité∶
f. Variable centrée réduite ∶
g. Le coefficient de variation∶
h. Intervalle de variation∶
i. Les moments empiriques∶
 Moments empiriques par rapport à a d’ordre s ∶
 Moments empiriques par rapport à l’origine (ou non centrés) d’ordre k ∶
 Moments empiriques centrés d’ordre k∶
j. Moyennes et variances dans des groupes ∶
 Théorème de Huygens ∶
Exercice 1 : ........................................................................................................................................................................79
Exercice 2 : ........................................................................................................................................................................79
Exercice 3 (I.FI.D XXVIIème PROMO JUILLET 2007 ) : ........................................................................................................83
Exercice 4 (ENA Janvier 2013 - Candidats Ingénieurs) : ......................................................................................................87

171 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
Variables quantitatives continues ..................................................................................................................... 88
 Généralités∶
a. Choix du nombre de classes∶
b. Choix de la longueur des classes∶
c. Choix des limites des classes∶
 Organisation des données∶
 Représentations graphiques∶
a. L'histogramme∶
b. La courbe cumulative∶
 Principaux paramètres de position (ou de tendance centrale)∶
a. Classes modales et modes∶
b. Les Moyennes arithmétique,géométrique,quadratiques et harmoniques ∶
c. Quantiles et applications ∶
 Interpolation linéaire ∶
 La médiane (ou le second quartile)
 Le premier quartile et le troisième quartile :
 Les autres quantiles :
 Paramètres de dispersion∶
a. L'étendue ∶
b. L'étendue interquartile ∶
c. Écart absolu moyen par rapport à la médiane ∶
d. Écart absolu moyen par rapport à la moyenne ∶
e. Écart-type ou écart quadratique moyen∶
 Théorème de KönigHuygens∶
 Variance d’échantillonnage∶
 Identité∶
f. Les moments empiriques∶
 Moments empiriques par rapport à a d’ordre k ∶
 Moments empiriques par rapport à l’origine (ou non centrés) d’ordre k ∶
 Moments empiriques centrés d’ordre k∶
g. L’inégalité de BienayméTchebychev∶
 Paramètres de forme∶
a. Asymétrie d'une distribution ∶
 Coefficient d’asymétrie de Pearson :
 Coefficient de Yule & Kendall ∶
 Coefficient d’asymétrie de Fisher∶
b. Paramètre d’aplatissement (kurtosis) ∶
 Paramètres de concentration (mesures de l'inégalité) ∶
a. Introduction ∶
b. Définitions et détermination algébrique∶
 Valeurs globales ∶
 Valeurs globales totales∶
 Valeurs globales relatives∶
 Valeurs globales relatives cumulées croissantes ∶
 Médiale ∶
c. Courbe de concentration (ou de Lorenz)∶
d. Indice de concentration (ou Indice de GINI)∶
 Définition∶
 Méthode graphique ∶
 Méthode des triangles ∶
 Méthode des trapèzes ∶
 Méthode de la différence moyenne:
 Méthode par intégration de la fonction de concentration ∶
Exercice 5 (ENA Octobre 2011- Candidats Ingénieurs) : ...................................................................................................104
Exercice 6 (ENA Septembre 2013- Candidats Ingénieurs) : ...............................................................................................105
Exercice 7 (ENA Octobre 2015- Candidats Ingénieurs) : ...................................................................................................107
Exercice 8 : ......................................................................................................................................................................110

Présentation des données .......................................................................................................................113

 Tableau des données ponctuelles ∶
 Tableau à double entrée (ou tableau de contingence) ∶
 Distributions conditionnelles∶
 Indépendance statistique∶
 Valeurs typiques ∶
a. Distributions marginales ∶
 Moyennes:
 Variances:

172 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014
b. Distributions conditionnelles ∶
 Moyennes:
 Variances:
c. Relations entre les caractéristiques marginales et conditionnelles ∶
 Relation entre les moyennes∶
 Relation entre les variances∶
 Les moments ∶
a. Moments empiriques par rapport à l’origine (ou non centrés) d’ordre k et l ∶
b. Moments empiriques centrés d’ordre k et l ∶
 Covariance,Corrélation ∶
a. Covariance∶
b. Le coefficient de corrélation linéaire∶
Ajustement analythique ........................................................................................................................122
 Nuage de points∶
a. Introduction∶
b. Régression linéaire entre deux variables∶
c. Critère de Mayer∶
d. Méthode de Mayer∶
 Méthodes des moindres carrés∶
a. Introduction∶
b. Détermination des coefficients de la régression affine∶
c. Remarques∶
d. Régression linéaire de X sur Y∶
 Droites de régressions∶
e. Autre cas d’ajustement∶
f. Changements de variables usuelles∶
g. Ajustement et corrélation∶
h. Exemple∶
 Analyse de la variance∶
a. Somme des carrés totale∶
b. Somme des carrés expliqués ou de la régression:
c. Somme des carrés des résidus (ou résiduelle)∶
d. L’équation d’analyse de la variance∶
e. Décomposition de la variance/Coefficient de détermination ∶
 Rapports de corrélation∶
a. Définition∶
b. Propriétés∶
Exercice 9 (ENA Janvier 2013 - Candidats Économistes et Gestionnaires) : ......................................................................132
Exercice 10 (ENA Octobre 2015- Candidats Économistes et Gestionnaires) : ....................................................................133
Exercice 11 : ....................................................................................................................................................................135

Présentation des données................................................................................................................................. 137

 Introduction∶
 Données observées et Tableau de contingence∶
a. Données observées∶
b. Définition des profils∶
c. Tableau de contingence∶
 Les représentations graphiques∶
Les indices de liaison : le khi-deux et ses dérivés ......................................................................................139
 Effectifs théoriques et khi¬deux ∶
a. Exemple ∶

Présentation des données .......................................................................................................................141

 Introduction∶
 Les données∶
Formules de décomposition-Rapport de corrélation .................................................................................142
 Formules∶
 Rapport de corrélation empirique∶
a. Idée générale∶
b. Aspects calculatoires∶
c. Propriétés∶
d. Test de significativité∶
Exercice 12 (I.FI.D XXXVIIème PROMO AOÛT 2017): .......................................................................................................145

173 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba
BEN AHMED MOHSEN Téléphone: (+216) 97 619191 / 54 619191
[email protected] https://web.facebook.com/OMEGACENTER2014

Taux de croissance et indices élémentaires ..............................................................................................149

 Calcul des taux de croissance∶
a. Temps continu∶
 Taux de croissance d’une variable ∶
 Taux de croissance d’un produit de variables ∶
 Propriété importante∶
b. Temps discret∶
 Taux de croissance d’une variable∶
 Taux de croissance d’un produit de variables ∶
 Propriété importante :
c. Taux global et taux moyen ∶
 Indices élementaires ∶
a. Définition∶
 Pourcentage de variation∶
 Taux d'accroissemententre les dates t et t+1 d'une variable y∶
b. Indices particuliers (Indices de consommation ):
 Indice des prix ∶
 Indice des quantités ∶
 Indice des valeurs∶
c. Propriétés des indices élementaires∶
Exercice 13 (I.FI.D XXXVIIIème PROMO JUILLET 2018): ....................................................................................................154
Exercice 14: .....................................................................................................................................................................156
Indices synthétiques simples .................................................................................................................159
 Indice de Bradstreet (ou indice des moyennes arithmétiques) ∶
 Moyenne des indices ∶
a. Indice moyenne arithmétique∶
b. Indice moyenne harmonique∶
c. Indice moyenne géométrique∶
d. Propriété importante des moyenne∶
 Propriétés particulières de ces moyennes∶
a. Cas de l'indice moyenne arithmétique∶
b. Cas de l'indice moyenne harmonique∶

Indices synthétiques pondérés ...............................................................................................................161

 Indice de Laspeyres∶
a. Définition∶
b. Propriétés :
 Indice de Paasche∶
a. Définition∶
b. Propriétés∶
 Relation entre les indices∶
 Autres indices∶
a. Indice de Sidgwick ∶
b. Indice de Edgeworth ∶
c. Indice de Fisher∶
d. Indices synthétiques de valeur∶
e. Indices-chaînes∶
Exercice 15: .................................................................................................................................................................166

174 38èmeA&40ème B 2020/Axe ②

Adresse : 2, Rue Ibn Arafa, av de l'environnement Manouba Centre, Manouba